2010 GLK

X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 1
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1
GLK
Operators Manual
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 2
Symbols YY This continuation symbol marks a

warning or procedure which is
Trademarks: continued on the next page.
RBabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Display Text in displays, such as the control
Automotive Corp.
system, are printed in the type
RBluetooth is a registered trademark of shown here.
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP is a registered trademark of Daimler.
RHomeLink is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RLogic 7 is a registered trademark of
Harman International Industries,
Incorporated.
RMicrosoft is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
RWindows media is a registered trademark
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
The following symbols are found in this
Operators Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in

damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you

may find useful.
X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 1
Our company and staff congratulate you on

the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
2045841081 2045841081F
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 2
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 3
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25
Introduction ......................................... 19 Safety and security ............................. 35
Controls in detail ................................. 65
Operation ........................................... 211
Practical hints ................................... 259
Technical data ................................... 327

X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 4
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Air conditioning refrigerant and

lubricant ............................................. 336
115V AC Socket ................................. 198 Air distribution .................................. 181
4-ETS Air pressure
see ETS/4-ETS see Tire inflation pressure
4MATIC Air pressure (tires) ............................ 239
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Air pump (electric) ............................ 315
911 Emergency calls ........................ 161 Air recirculation mode ...................... 183
Air volume .......................................... 182
A Alarm system
ABS (Antilock Brake System) see Anti-theft systems
Indicator lamp ................................ 289 All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 171
Messages in the multifunction Alternator
display ................................... 271, 272 Messages in the multifunction
Accessory weight .............................. 239 display ........................................... 281
Accidents ........................................... 101 Alternator (Technical data)
Air bags ........................................... 37 see Vehicle specification
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 201 Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 338
Emergency calls (Telephone) ......... 161 Anti-theft systems ............................... 63
NECK-PRO active front head Anti-theft alarm system ................... 63
restraints ........................................ 51 Immobilizer ...................................... 63
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps Aquaplaning
see Headlamps see Hydroplaning
Additives Armrest, front
Engine oil ....................................... 336 Storage compartments .................. 193
Gasoline ......................................... 337 Armrest, rear
Address change ................................... 21 Storage compartment .................... 193
Advanced Tire Pressure Ashtrays ............................................. 196
Monitoring System (Advanced Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 239
TPMS) ................................................. 224 Audio menu ........................................ 115
Messages in the multifunction Audio system ..................................... 125
display ........................................... 268 Adjusting volume ........................... 133
Air bags ................................................ 37 Audio and telephone operation ...... 125
Emergency call upon deployment . . 201 Audio AUX mode ............................ 154
Front, driver and passenger ............. 40 Bluetooth settings ....................... 135
Front passenger front air bag off CD mode ........................................ 146
indicator lamp (Canada Components .................................. 126
only) ........................................ 45, 297 MP3 mode ..................................... 146
Front passenger front air bag off Operating safety ............................ 126
indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 298 Radio operation ............................. 136
Messages in the multifunction Satellite radio ................................ 140
display ........................................... 264 Switching on and off ...................... 132
OCS (Occupant Classification System settings ............................. 135
System) ........................................... 42 Telephone ...................................... 155
Safety guidelines ............................. 39 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 84
Side impact ...................................... 40 Automatic central locking .......... 70, 124
Window curtain ................................ 41 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 88
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 5
Index 5
Automatic interior lighting control .... 92 Brake Assist System

Automatic locking when driving ...... 124 see BAS
Automatic shift program .................. 106 Brake fluid
Automatic transmission ................... 103 Checking level ............................... 217
Automatic shift program ................ 106 Messages in the multifunction
Gear range indicator ...................... 106 display ........................................... 273
Gear ranges ................................... 106 Brake lamps
Gear selector lever ........................ 103 Cleaning lenses ............................. 254
Hill-start assist system .................. 171 Replacing bulbs ............................. 305
Kickdown ....................................... 105 Brake pads
One-touch gearshifting .................. 107 Messages in the multifunction
Program mode indicator ................ 107 display ........................................... 270
Program mode selector switch Brakes ................................................ 244
(automatic shift program) .............. 106 Parking brake ................................ 102
Shifting procedure ......................... 104 Warning lamp ................................. 289
Towing a trailer .............................. 106 Break-in period .................................. 212
Transmission position indicator ..... 104 Bulbs
Transmission positions .................. 104 see Replacing bulbs
AUX socket ........................................ 154
Axle oils .............................................. 334 C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 22
B
California retail buyers and
BabySmart lessees, important notice for ............. 20
Air bag deactivation system ............. 45 Calls (phone) .............................. 117, 155
Self-test ........................................... 46 Can holders
Back button ....................................... 129 see Cup holders
Backrest Capacities and recommended
see Seats fuel/lubricants .................................. 334
Backup lamps Cargo compartment
Messages in the multifunction Cargo net ....................................... 191
display ........................................... 283 Cargo volume, expanding .............. 189
Replacing bulbs ............................. 305 Cover blind .................................... 190
Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 239 Fuse box ........................................ 326
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 60 Hooks ............................................ 189
Batteries, SmartKey Tie-down rings ............................... 188
Checking condition .......................... 69 Cargo compartment cover blind ...... 190
Replacing ....................................... 302 Cargo net ........................................... 191
Battery, Vehicle ................................. 317 Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 188
Charging ........................................ 319 Carpets, cleaning .............................. 256
Jump starting ................................. 319 CD player ............................................ 146
Messages in the multifunction Center console
display ........................................... 281 Lower part ....................................... 31
Bead (tire) .......................................... 239 Upper part ....................................... 31
Beverage holders Central locking
see Cup holders Automatic ................................ 70, 124
Bluetooth settings .......................... 135 KEYLESS-GO .................................... 67
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 6
6 Index
Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 71 Collapsible tire (spare wheel) .......... 333
SmartKey ......................................... 66 Collapsible wheel chock ................... 261
Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 71 COMAND system
Certification label .............................. 328 see separate COMAND system
Children in the vehicle operating instructions
Air bags ........................................... 37 Combination gauge ............................. 28
BabySmart air bag deactivation Combination switch ............................ 90
system ............................................. 45 Compass ............................................ 199
Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 58 Control system .................................. 110
Child seat anchors LATCH-type Multifunction display ..................... 112
(ISOFIX) ........................................... 57 Multifunction steering wheel ......... 110
Indicator lamp, front passenger Resetting to factory settings .......... 119
front air bag off (Canada only) ......... 45 Control system menus ...................... 113
Indicator lamp, front passenger Audio ............................................. 115
front air bag off (USA only) .............. 42 Navi ............................................... 115
Infant and child restraint systems .... 54 Service ........................................... 118
ISOFIX (Child seat anchors Settings ......................................... 119
LATCH-type) ..................................... 57 Telephone ...................................... 117
OCS (Occupant Classification Trip ................................................ 113
System) ........................................... 42 Control system submenus
Override switch ................................ 58 Convenience .................................. 124
Safety notes ..................................... 53 Instrument cluster ......................... 120
Tether anchorage points .................. 56 Lighting .......................................... 122
Top tether ........................................ 56 Time/Date ..................................... 121
Child safety Vehicle ........................................... 123
see Children in the vehicle Convenience submenu
Child seat anchors LATCH-type Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 124
(ISOFIX) Fold-in function for exterior rear
see Children in the vehicle view mirrors ................................... 124
Chrome-plated exhaust tip, Coolant
cleaning .............................................. 257 Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 338
Cigarette lighter ................................ 197 Capacities ...................................... 334
Clear button ....................................... 130 Checking level ............................... 216
Climate control system .................... 177 Messages in the multifunction
Air conditioning ............................. 179 display ........................................... 279
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 336 Temperature gauge ........................ 109
Air distribution ............................... 181 Warning lamp ................................. 295
Air recirculation mode ................... 183 Coolant temperature gauge ............... 28
Air volume ..................................... 182 Corner-illuminating lamps .................. 91
Automatic mode ............................ 179 Replacing bulbs ............................. 304
Deactivating system ...................... 179 Cruise control .................................... 168
Front defroster .............................. 182 Activating ....................................... 169
Maximum cooling MAX COOL ........ 182 Canceling ....................................... 169
Temperature .................................. 180 Changing the set speed ................. 170
Clock ............................................ 29, 121 Last stored speed .......................... 170
Coat hooks ......................................... 189 Lever .............................................. 169
Cockpit ................................................. 27 Messages in the multifunction
Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 239 display ........................................... 267
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 7
Index 7
Resume function ............................ 170 Messages in the multifunction

Setting current speed .................... 169 display ........................................... 277
Cup holders ........................................ 195 Opening from inside ......................... 70
Curb weight ....................................... 239 Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 205
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 22 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 204
Customer Relations Department ....... 22 Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 299
DOT (Department of
D Transportation) .................................. 239
Drinking and driving ......................... 243
Dashboard Driving
see Instrument cluster Abroad ........................................... 249
Data recording ..................................... 23 Hydroplaning ................................. 246
Date, Setting ...................................... 121 Instructions ............................. 98, 243
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 88 In winter ........................................ 243
Switching on or off ......................... 122 Problems ....................................... 101
Deep water Safety systems ................................ 59
see Standing water Systems ......................................... 168
Defogging (windshield) ..................... 182 Through standing water ................. 246
Defroster Driving and parking
Front (Climate control system) ...... 182 Safety notes ..................................... 98
Rear window .................................. 184 Driving off .................................. 100, 245
Delayed shut-off Driving safety systems ....................... 59
Exterior lamps ................................ 122 BAS .................................................. 60
Interior lighting .............................. 123 EBP .................................................. 60
Department of Transportation
ESP ................................................ 61
see DOT
ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 62
Difficulties
Driving systems
While driving .................................. 101
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 171
With starting .................................... 99
Cruise control ................................ 168
Dimensions (vehicle)
Hill-start assist system .................. 171
see Vehicle specification Parktronic system .......................... 172
Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 231 Rear view camera .......................... 174
Displays Driving tips, automatic
Maintenance service indicator ....... 250 transmission ...................................... 105
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 262
E
Multifunction display ..................... 112
Symbol messages .......................... 270 Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 83, 124
Text messages ............................... 264 EBP (Electronic Brake
Trip computer ................................ 113 Proportioning) ...................................... 60
Vehicle status message memory ... 118 Electrical system
Vehicle system settings ................. 119 Improper work on or
Door control panel .............................. 33 modifications ................................... 22
Door handles ........................................ 33 Power outlets ................................. 197
Doors Electrical system (Technical data)
Child safety locks ............................ 58 see Vehicle specification
Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 67 Electronic Stability Program
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 66 see ESP
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 8
8 Index
Electronic Traction System Messages in the multifunction

see ETS/4-ETS display ........................... 271, 272, 274
Emergency, in case of Trailer stabilization ........................... 63
First aid kit ..................................... 260 Warning lamp ................................. 293
Flat tire .......................................... 312 ETD (Emergency Tensioning
Hazard warning flasher .................... 90 Device) ................................................. 51
Roadside Assistance ................ 20, 203 Safety guidelines ............................. 39
Towing the vehicle ......................... 321 ETS/4-ETS (Electronic Traction
Emergency calls System) ................................................ 62
Tele Aid .......................................... 201 Express operation
Telephone ...................................... 161 Panorama roof ............................... 185
Emergency operations Power windows ................................ 95
Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 205 Exterior lamp switch ........................... 87
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 204 Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 84
Emergency Tensioning Device Fold-in function ................................ 86
see ETD Parking position ............................... 85
Emission control ............................... 249 Power-folding ................................... 85
Information label ............................ 329 Switching fold-in function on or
System warranties ........................... 19 off .................................................. 124
Engine Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26
Break-in recommendations ............ 212
Cleaning ......................................... 253 F
Compartment ................................ 214
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 49
Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 295
First aid kit ......................................... 260
Flat tire ............................................... 312
display ........................................... 279
Number .......................................... 329 Lowering the vehicle ...................... 317
Starting ............................................ 98 Mounting the spare wheel ............. 312
Turning off ..................................... 102 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 312
Engine (Technical data) Spare wheel ........................... 312, 333
Floormats ........................................... 209
see Vehicle specification
Engine coolant Fluids
see Coolant Automatic transmission fluid ......... 334
Engine oil Brake fluid ..................................... 334
Capacities ...................................... 334
Adding ........................................... 216
Engine coolant ............................... 334
Additives ........................................ 336
Engine oil ....................................... 334
Checking level ............................... 215
Power steering fluid ....................... 334
Consumption ................................. 215
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ........................................... 335
display ........................................... 282
Fog lamps ............................................. 89
Oil dipstick ..................................... 215
Recommended engine oils and oil Messages in the multifunction
filter ............................................... 335 display ................................... 283, 285
Fold-in function for exterior rear
ESP (Electronic Stability
view mirrors ........................................ 86
Program) .............................................. 61
Four-wheel drive
ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 62
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 9
Index 9
Front air bags Shifting procedure ......................... 104

see Air bags Transmission position indicator ..... 104
Front axle oil ...................................... 334 Transmission positions .................. 104
Front lamps Generator
see Headlamps see Alternator
Front passenger front air bag ............ 40 Global locking/unlocking
Messages in the multifunction see Key, SmartKey
display ........................................... 264 Glove box ........................................... 192
Front passenger front air bag off Gross Axle Weight Rating
indicator lamp (Canada only) ..... 45, 297 see GAWR
Front passenger front air bag off Gross Trailer Weight
indicator lamp (USA only) .......... 42, 298 see GTW
Front seat head restraints Gross Vehicle Weight
see Head restraints see GVW
Fuel ..................................................... 212 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Additives ........................................ 337 see GVWR
Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 335 GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) .............. 240
Drive sensiblysafe fuel ................. 243 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 240
Fuel consumption statistics ........... 114 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 213 Rating) ................................................ 240
Fuel tank reserve warning lamp ..... 294
Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 336 H
Refueling ........................................ 212
Requirements ................................ 337 Halogen headlamps
Fuel filler flap ..................................... 213 see Headlamps
Opening manually .......................... 301 Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 256
Fuel gauge ................................... 28, 110 Hazard warning flasher ....................... 90
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ........ 334 Headlamp cleaning system ................ 91
Fuel tank Headlamps
Capacity ........................................ 335 Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 87
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 213 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 88
Refueling ........................................ 212 Bi-Xenon .................................. 87, 304
Fuses .................................................. 325 Cleaning lenses ............................. 254
Cleaning system .............................. 91
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 88
G
Delayed shut-off ............................ 122
Garage door opener .................... 32, 205 Halogen ......................................... 304
Gasoline High-beam flasher ............................ 90
see Fuel High-beam headlamps ..................... 90
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 240 Low-beam headlamps ...................... 88
Gear range ......................................... 106 Messages in the multifunction
Indicator ........................................ 106 display ........................................... 283
Limiting .......................................... 107 Replacing bulbs ............................. 303
Shifting into optimal ...................... 108 Switch .............................................. 87
Gear selector lever ............................ 103 Headliner, cleaning and care of ....... 256
Cleaning ......................................... 256 Head restraints .................................... 78
Gearshift pattern ........................... 103 Adjustment ................................ 78, 80
Lock ......................................... 99, 104 Folding back .................................... 80
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 10
10 Index
NECK-PRO active front head Interior storage spaces

restraints ......................................... 51 see Storage compartments
Rear seat head restraints ................. 80 Intermittent wiping ............................. 93
Height adjustment Rain sensor ...................................... 93
Seat belt outlet ................................ 50 ISOFIX (Child seat anchors
Seats ............................................... 78 LATCH-type)
High-beam flasher ............................... 90 see Children in the vehicle
High-beam headlamps ................ 90, 304
Replacing bulbs ............................. 304 J
Hill-start assist system ..................... 171
Jack ..................................................... 261
Hood ................................................... 214
Jump starting ..................................... 319
display ........................................... 277
Hooks ................................................. 189 K
Horn ...................................................... 27 Key, Mechanical
Hydroplaning ..................................... 246 Loss of ............................................. 69
Replacing ......................................... 70
I Unlocking/locking manually .......... 299
Key, SmartKey
Identification labels .......................... 328
Battery check lamp .......................... 69
Identification number, vehicle
Checking batteries ........................... 69
(VIN) ................................................... 329
Factory setting ........................... 67, 69
Ignition ........................................... 76, 99
Global locking (KEYLESS-
Immobilizer .......................................... 63
GO) .................................................. 69
Infant and child restraint systems
Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 67
see Children in the vehicle
Global unlocking (KEYLESS-
Inflation pressure
GO) .................................................. 69
see Tires, Inflation pressure
Global unlocking
Inside door handle .............................. 70
(SmartKey) ....................................... 67
Instrument cluster ...................... 28, 108
Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 68
Illumination .................................... 109 Locking/unlocking ........................... 66
Lamps ............................................ 288 Loss of ............................................. 69
Multifunction display ..................... 112 Messages in the multifunction
Instrument lighting display ........................................... 277
see Instrument cluster, Illumination Opening and closing the
Instrument panel panorama roof ................................. 97
see Instrument cluster Opening and closing the windows .... 97
Instruments and controls Remote control ................................ 66
see Cockpit Replacing ......................................... 70
Interior lighting Replacing batteries ........................ 302
Delayed shut-off ............................ 123 Restoring to factory setting ....... 67, 69
Emergency lighting .......................... 92 Selective setting ........................ 67, 69
Front ................................................ 92 Starter switch positions ................... 76
Front reading lamps ......................... 92 KEYLESS-GO
Rear ................................................. 92 Starter switch positions ................... 76
Rear reading lamps .......................... 92 Kickdown ........................................... 105
Interior rear view mirror ..................... 84 Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 240
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 84
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 11
Index 11
L Lighting ................................................ 87
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 88
Labels Exterior ............................................ 87
Certification ................................... 328 Interior ............................................. 92
Emission control information ......... 329 Limp-home mode .............................. 108
Tire and Loading Information Load index (tires) ...................... 235, 240
placard ........................................... 227 Loading
Tire inflation pressure .................... 220 see Vehicle loading
Lamps, exterior Locator lighting ................................. 122
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 87 Locking the vehicle
Front .............................................. 304 KEYLESS-GO .................................... 67
Messages in the multifunction Manually ........................................ 299
display ........................................... 283 SmartKey ......................................... 66
Rear ............................................... 305 Loss of
Switching on/off .............................. 87 Key .................................................. 69
Lamps, indicator and warning Service and Warranty Information
ABS .......................................... 28, 289 booklet .......................................... 328
Brakes ..................................... 28, 289 Low-beam headlamps ......................... 88
Center console ................................ 31 Exterior lamp switch ........................ 87
Coolant .................................... 28, 295 Replacing bulbs ............................. 304
Engine malfunction .................. 28, 295 Switching on .................................... 88
ESP ........................................ 28, 293 Lubricants .......................................... 334
Fog lamps ........................................ 89 Lumbar support ................................... 80
Front fog lamps ................................ 28
Front passenger front air bag off
M
(Canada only) .......................... 45, 297
Front passenger front air bag off Maintenance ........................................ 20
(USA only) ................................ 42, 298 Maintenance System
Fuel tank reserve ..................... 28, 294 Service indicator display ................ 251
High-beam headlamps ............... 28, 90 Service indicator message ............. 250
Instrument cluster ................... 28, 288 Service term exceeded .................. 250
Low-beam headlamps ................ 28, 88 Manual headlamp mode (Low-
Low tire pressure/TPMS beam headlamps) ................................ 88
malfunction telltale .................. 28, 296 Maximum engine speed
Rear fog lamp .................................. 28 see Vehicle specification
Seat belt telltale ................ 28, 50, 292 Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 240
SRS .................................... 28, 36, 293 Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 240
Turn signals ..................................... 28 Maximum permissible tire
LATCH-type child seat anchors (ISOFIX) inflation pressure .............................. 240
see Children in the vehicle Mechanical key
License plate lamps see Key, Mechanical
Messages in the multifunction Media interface ................................. 192
display ........................................... 285 Memory function ........................... 33, 86
Replacing bulbs ............................. 305 Menus
Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 256 see Control system menus
Lighter Mirrors .................................................. 83
see Cigarette lighter Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 84
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 12
12 Index
Exterior rear view mirror parking SmartKey ....................................... 277

position ............................................ 85 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 277
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 84 SRS ................................................ 275
Interior rear view mirror ................... 84 Tailgate .......................................... 277
Memory function .............................. 86 Tail lamps ...................................... 286
Power-folding exterior rear view Tele Aid .......................................... 275
mirrors ............................................. 85 Tire inflation pressure ............ 268, 288
Vanity mirror .................................. 196 Tire pressure monitor .................... 268
MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 337 Tires ...................................... 268, 288
Motor Octane Number Trailer brake lamps ........................ 286
see MON Trailer tail lamps ............................ 286
MP3 mode .......................................... 146 Trailer turn signal lamps ................ 287
Multifunction display ........................ 112 Turn signals ................................... 287
Symbol messages .......................... 270 Multifunction steering wheel
Text messages ............................... 264 Adjustment ...................................... 82
Vehicle status messages ............... 262 Buttons .......................................... 110
Multifunction display messages Cleaning ......................................... 256
ABS ....................................... 271, 272 Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 83, 124
Active headlamps .......................... 283 Memory function .............................. 86
Advanced TPMS ............................. 268 Overview .......................................... 29
Air bags ......................................... 264
Alternator ...................................... 281 N
Battery ........................................... 281
Navigation system
Brake fluid ..................................... 273
see Separate operating instructions
Brake pads ..................................... 270
Navi menu .......................................... 115
Cargo compartment ....................... 277
NECK-PRO active front head
Child seat ...................................... 267
restraints ............................................. 51
Coolant .......................................... 279
Resetting ....................................... 301
Corner-illuminating lamps .............. 286
Nets, parcel ....................................... 188
Cruise control ................................ 267
Normal occupant weight .................. 240
Doors ............................................. 277
Number, vehicle identification
EBP ................................................ 272
(VIN) ................................................... 329
Engine oil ....................................... 282
ESP ............................. 271, 272, 274
Fog lamps .............................. 283, 285 O
Front passenger front air bag ........ 264 Occupant Classification System
Gas cap .......................................... 282 see OCS (Occupant Classification
High-beam lamps ........................... 284 System)
Hood .............................................. 277 Occupant distribution ....................... 240
License plate lamps ....................... 285 Occupant safety
Light sensor ................................... 285 Air bags ........................................... 37
Low-beam lamps ............................ 285 BabySmart .................................... 45
Parking brake ................................ 272 Children and air bags ....................... 37
Parking lamps ................................ 284 Children in the vehicle ..................... 53
Power steering ............................... 279 Child seat anchors LATCH-type
Reserve fuel ................................... 282 (ISOFIX) ........................................... 57
Reverse lamp ................................. 283 Fastening the seat belts ................... 49
Side marker lamps ......................... 284
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 13
Index 13
Front passenger front air bag off Minimum distance ......................... 173
indicator lamp (Canada Sensor range ................................. 172
only) ........................................ 45, 297 Switching on/off ........................... 174
Front passenger front air bag off System sensors ............................. 172
indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 298 Warning indicators ......................... 173
Infant and child restraint systems .... 54 Parts service ...................................... 328
Introduction ..................................... 36 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
ISOFIX (Child seat anchors (Canada only)
LATCH-type) ..................................... 57 see Front passenger front air bag
OCS (Occupant Classification off indicator lamp (Canada only)
System) ........................................... 42 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Seat belts .................................. 39, 47 (USA only)
OCS (Occupant Classification see Front passenger front air bag
System) ................................................ 42 off indicator lamp (USA only)
Self-test ........................................... 45 Passenger safety
Odometer ........................................... 113 see Occupant safety
Oil, oil level Pedals ................................................. 244
see Engine oil Phone
On-board computer see Telephone
see Control system Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 256
One-touch gearshifting ..................... 107 Power assistance .............................. 244
Operating safety .................................. 22 Power outlets .................................... 197
Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 254 Power seats
Overhead control panel ...................... 32 see Seats
Power steering
P Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 279
Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 252
Power tailgate
Paintwork code ................................. 329
Closing ............................................. 72
Panic alarm .......................................... 59
Opening ........................................... 72
Panorama roof with power tilt/
Power washer .................................... 252
sliding panel ...................................... 185
Power windows ................................... 95
Cleaning ......................................... 255
Cleaning ......................................... 255
Operation ....................................... 185
Operation ......................................... 95
Roller sunblinds ............................. 184
Rear door window, override
Synchronizing ................................ 186
switch .............................................. 58
Parcel nets ......................................... 188
Synchronizing .................................. 96
Parking ............................................... 101
Practical hints ................................... 260
Parktronic system .......................... 172
Problems
Parking brake .................................... 102
While driving .................................. 101
With vehicle ..................................... 22
display ........................................... 272
With wipers ...................................... 95
Parking position
Product information ............................ 19
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 85
Production options weight ............... 240
Transmission position .................... 104
Program mode selector switch
Parktronic system
Automatic shift program ................ 106
Cleaning system sensors ............... 254
Malfunction .................................... 174
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 14
14 Index
Proximity key Reserve fuel

see Key, SmartKey Messages in the multifunction
PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 240 display ........................................... 282
Warning lamp ................................. 294
R Restraint systems
see Occupant safety
Radio .................................................. 136
Rims ........................................... 241, 331
Satellite radio ................................ 140
Roadside Assistance ................... 20, 203
Selecting stations .......................... 115
Roller sunblinds ................................. 184
Radio transmitters ............................ 249
RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 337
Rain sensor
Roof rack ............................................ 188
see Intermittent wiping
Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 256
Rear axle oil ....................................... 334
Rear center console ashtray
S
see Ashtrays
Rear center seat belt Safety
Unblocking ....................................... 50 Driving safety systems ..................... 59
Rear doors Occupant safety ............................... 36
Child safety locks ............................ 58 Reporting defects ............................ 23
Rear door window Safety belts
Override switch ................................ 58 see Seat belts
Rear fog lamp Satellite radio .................................... 140
see Fog lamps Seat belt force limiter ......................... 51
Rear lamps Seat belts ............................................. 47
see Tail lamps Children in the vehicle ..................... 53
Rear seat head restraints Cleaning ......................................... 256
see Head restraints Fastening ......................................... 49
Rear view camera .............................. 174 Height adjustment ........................... 50
Cleaning the camera lens .............. 254 Proper use of ................................... 48
Rear window defroster ..................... 184 Rear center seat .............................. 50
Rear window wiper/washer ............... 94 Safety guidelines ............................. 39
Recommended tire inflation Safety notes ..................................... 47
pressure ..................................... 219, 240 Telltale ........................................... 292
Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 336 Seat heating ......................................... 81
Refueling ............................................ 212 Seating capacity ................................ 228
Regular checks .................................. 213 Seats ..................................................... 78
Reminder, Seat belt Adjusting ......................................... 33
see Seat belts, Telltale Adjustment ...................................... 78
Remote control Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 83
see Key, SmartKey Heating ............................................ 81
Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ............. 205 Memory function .............................. 86
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 204 Rear seat bench ............................. 189
Replacing Securing cargo
Key .................................................. 70 Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188
Replacing bulbs ................................. 303 Selective setting
Reporting safety defects .................... 23 see Key, SmartKey
Research Octane Number Selector lever
see RON see Gear selector lever
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 15
Index 15
Self-test SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

BabySmart .................................... 46 Indicator lamp ......................... 36, 293
OCS (Occupant Classification Messages in the multifunction
System) ........................................... 45 display ........................................... 275
Tele Aid .......................................... 201 Standing water, driving through ...... 246
Service Starter switch positions
see Maintenance KEYLESS-GO .................................... 76
Service, parts .................................... 328 SmartKey ......................................... 76
Service and warranty information ..... 19 Starting difficulties (engine) .............. 99
Service intervals Starting the engine ............................. 98
see Maintenance System, Service Steering column
indicator message see Multifunction steering wheel,
Service life (tires) .............................. 232 Adjustment
Service menu ..................................... 118 Steering wheel
Settings see Multifunction steering wheel
Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 69 Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 205
Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 67 Storage compartments ..................... 192
Memory function .............................. 86 Storing tires ....................................... 233
Menu ............................................. 119 Stranded vehicle ............................... 324
Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 69 Sun visors .................................. 195, 196
Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 67 SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle) ................. 21
Side impact air bags ........................... 40
Side marker lamps T
Cleaning lenses ............................. 254
Messages in the multifunction Tachometer .................................. 28, 109
display ........................................... 284 Overspeed range ........................... 109
Replacing bulbs ............................. 304 Tailgate
Sidewall (tires) .................................. 241 Closing ............................................. 71
SmartKey Messages in the multifunction
see Key, SmartKey display ........................................... 277
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Opening ........................................... 71
see Key, SmartKey Power tailgate .................................. 72
Snow chains ...................................... 242 Unlocking manually ....................... 300
Tail lamps ........................................... 305
Snow tires
Cleaning lenses ............................. 254
see Winter tires
Spare wheel ....................................... 331
display ........................................... 286
Mounting ....................................... 312
Replacing bulbs ............................. 305
Storage location ............................ 262
Tar stains ........................................... 252
Speedometer ....................................... 28
Technical data
Speed settings
Air conditioning refrigerant .... 335, 336
Cruise control ................................ 169
Brake fluid ............................. 334, 336
Resume function ............................ 170
Capacities fuels, coolants,
Sport Utility Vehicle
lubricants etc. ................................ 334
see SUV
Coolant .................................. 334, 337
Engine oil additives ........................ 336
Engine oils ............................. 334, 335
Fuel requirements .......................... 337
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 16
16 Index
Gasoline additives .......................... 337 Tie-down rings ................................... 188

Identification labels ....................... 328 Tightening torque
Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 336 Wheels ........................................... 317
Rims and tires ................................ 331 Time setting ....................................... 121
Spare wheel ................................... 333 TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 241
Vehicle specification GLK 350 ....... 330 Tire and Loading Information
Vehicle specification placard ............................................... 227
GLK 350 4MATIC ........................... 330 Tire and loading terminology ........... 239
Washer and headlamp cleaning Tire Identification Number
system ................................... 335, 339 see TIN
Technical data (dimensions) Tire inflation pressure
see Vehicle specification Checking ........................................ 221
Technical data (electrical system) Important notes on ........................ 220
see Vehicle specification Label on the inside of fuel filler
Technical data (engine) flap ................................................ 220
see Vehicle specification Placard on drivers door B-pillar ..... 227
Technical data (weights) Tire labeling ....................................... 235
see Vehicle specification Tire load rating .................................. 240
Tele Aid ............................................... 200 Tire ply composition and material
Emergency calls ............................. 201 used .................................................... 241
Information button ......................... 203 Tire pressure loss warning system . 222
Initiating an emergency call Tires ........................................... 218, 331
manually ........................................ 202 Advanced Tire Pressure
Messages in the multifunction Monitoring System (Advanced
display ........................................... 275 TPMS) ............................................ 224
Remote door lock .......................... 205 Air pressure ................................... 219
Remote door unlock ...................... 204 Care and maintenance ................... 232
Roadside Assistance button .......... 203 Cleaning ......................................... 233
Search & Send ............................... 204 Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 231
SOS button .................................... 202 Important notes on tire inflation
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 205 pressure ........................................ 220
System self-test ............................. 201 Inflation pressure ........................... 221
Telephone .................................... 29, 155 Information placard ....................... 227
Answering/ending a call ................ 117 Inspection ...................................... 232
Call lists ......................................... 164 Labeling ......................................... 235
Emergency calls 911 .................. 161 Load index ............................. 235, 240
Hands-free microphone ................... 32 Load rating .................................... 240
Making calls ................................... 165 Messages in the multifunction
Menu ............................................. 117 display ................................... 268, 288
Operation ....................................... 117 Ply composition and material
Phone book ........................... 117, 162 used ............................................... 241
Redialing ........................................ 118 Problems under-/overinflation ...... 221
Temperature Retreads ........................................ 218
Coolant .......................................... 109 Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 331
Interior temperature ...................... 180 Rotation ......................................... 234
Outside .......................................... 110 Service life ..................................... 232
Tether anchorage points Sizes .............................................. 331
see Children in the vehicle Snow chains .................................. 242
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 17
Index 17
Speed rating .......................... 236, 241 Trip menu ........................................... 113

Storing ........................................... 233 Turning off the engine ...................... 102
Temperature .......................... 220, 234 Turn signals ......................................... 90
Terminology ................................... 239 Cleaning lenses ............................. 254
Tire Identification Number ............. 241 Indicator lamps ................................ 28
Tire pressure loss warning system . 222 Messages in the multifunction
TPMS low tire pressure/ display ........................................... 287
malfunction telltale ........................ 296 Replacing bulbs ............................. 304
Traction ................................. 233, 241 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) ........... 241
Tread ............................................. 241
Tread depth ........................... 232, 241 U
Treadwear ...................................... 233
Treadwear indicators ............. 232, 241 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Vehicle maximum load on .............. 241 Standards .................................. 233, 241
Wear pattern .................................. 234 Units
Winter tires ............................ 241, 331 Selecting speedometer display
Tire speed rating ....................... 236, 241 mode ............................................. 120
Tongue Weight Rating Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 336
see TWR Unlocking the vehicle
Top tether KEYLESS-GO .................................... 67
see Children in the vehicle Manually ........................................ 299
Total load limit ................................... 241 SmartKey ......................................... 66
Towing Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 257
Towing eye bolt .............................. 322 Useful features .................................. 195
Trailer .................................... 106, 246
Vehicle ........................................... 321 V
Towing eye bolt ................................. 322 Vehicle
Traction ...................................... 233, 241 Battery ........................................... 317
Trailer towing ............................ 106, 246 Care ............................................... 251
Coupling a trailer ........................... 247 Control system .............................. 110
Decoupling ..................................... 249 Identification Number (VIN) ........... 328
Electrical connections .................... 246 Locking/unlocking ........................... 66
Towing ........................................... 248 Lowering (wheel change) ............... 317
Trailer hitch ................................... 246 Modifications and alterations,
Weights and ratings ....................... 247 Operating safety .............................. 22
Transfer case ..................................... 108 Towing ........................................... 321
Transmission Unlocking/locking manually .......... 299
see Automatic transmission Vehicle dimensions
Transmission fluid level .................... 216 see Vehicle specification
Transmission gear selector lever Vehicle Identification Number
see Gear selector lever (VIN) ................................................... 328
Transmission positions .................... 104 Vehicle jack
Traveling abroad ............................... 249 see Jack
Tread (tires) ....................................... 241 Vehicle lighting .................................... 87
Tread depth (tires) .................... 232, 241 Vehicle loading
Treadwear .......................................... 233 Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188
Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 232, 241 Instructions .................................... 187
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 18
18 Index
Load limit ....................................... 228 Windshield wipers

Roof rack ....................................... 188 Replacing wiper blades .................. 310
Split rear seat bench ..................... 189 Winter driving
Terminology ................................... 239 Instructions .................................... 243
Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 241 Snow chains .................................. 242
Vehicle specification Tires ............................................... 241
GLK 350 ........................................ 330 Winter tires ................................ 241, 331
GLK 350 4MATIC ........................... 330 Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 257
Vehicle status message memory .... 118
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 260
Vehicle washing
see Vehicle care
Vehicle weights
W
Warning sounds
Drivers or passengers seat belt ..... 50
Parking brake ................................ 272
Parktronic system .......................... 174
Seat belt telltale ............................ 292
Warranty coverage ............................ 328
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ................................................ 339
Washer fluid
Mixing ratio .................................... 339
Refilling .......................................... 217
Washing the vehicle .......................... 251
Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 234
Weights (vehicle)
Wheel
Changing ....................................... 312
Removing ....................................... 314
Spare ............................................. 312
Tightening torque ........................... 317
Wheels, sizes ..................................... 331
Wheels, Tires and .............................. 218
Window curtain air bags ..................... 41
Windows
see Power windows
Windows, cleaning ............................ 255
Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades .................... 255
Defogging ...................................... 182
Washer fluid ................................... 339
Wipers ............................................. 93
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 19
Introduction 19
Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

product and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operators Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating particular equipment, any
Use of such parts and accessories could authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operators
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operators Manual Operators Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operators Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operators Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 20
20 Introduction
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Control System Warranty Customer Assistance Center
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon One Mercedes Drive
Laws) Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Important notice for California retail Maintenance

buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
automobiles
necessary maintenance work which should
Under California law you may be entitled to a be performed at regular intervals.
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
purchase price or lease price, if after a you when you take the vehicle to an
reasonable number of repair attempts authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its service. The service advisor will record each
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service in the booklet for you.
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of Roadside Assistance
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer Program provides factory-trained technical
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
reasonable number of repair attempts is toll-free Roadside Assistance number
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
more of the following occurs: (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
(1) the same substantial defect or will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
malfunction results in a condition that is Customer Assistance Representatives
likely to cause death or serious bodily 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect Roadside Assistance will be provided in
or malfunction has been subject to repair accordance with standard program
two or more times, and you have directly guidelines which include providing service to
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from
writing of the need for its repair, a paved roadway. We will make every effort
(2) the same substantial defect or to assist in a breakdown situation, however,
malfunction of a less serious nature than the accessibility of your vehicle will be
category (1) has been subject to repair determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz
four or more times and you have directly Center technician or the tow service provider
notified us in writing of the need for its on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor
repair, or in our ability to respond.
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of Additional charges may be applicable for a
repair of the same or different substantial breakdown location determined not to be a
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative reasonably accessible roadside location as
total of more than 30 calendar days. determined by our authorized technician and
tow service provider.
Written notification should not be sent to a
For additional information refer to the
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 21
Introduction 21
Program brochure (in the USA) or the Delivery Program. For details, consult an
Roadside Assistance section of the Service authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:
and Warranty Information Booklet (in In the USA:
Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Change of address or ownership Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
If you change your address, be sure to send In Canada:
in the Change of Address Notice found in Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
the Service and Warranty Information European Delivery Department
Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in Sport Utility Vehicle
contacting you in a timely manner should the
need arise. G Warning!
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
on-road and off-road use. It can go places and
literature with the vehicle to make it available
perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel
to the next operator.
drive passenger cars are not intended. This
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to vehicle will handle and maneuver differently
send in the Notice of Purchase of Used from conventional passenger cars in driving
Truck found in the Service and Warranty conditions which may occur on streets,
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes- highways and off-road use.
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
and a higher center of gravity than many
(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in
passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
type, if you make sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may
roll over or may go out of control and crash.
Operating your vehicle outside the
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
USA or Canada
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
countries, please be aware that: result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
RService facilities or replacement parts may and severe or fatal injury.
not be readily available. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
RUnleaded
Operators Manual. Take time to become
gasoline for vehicles with
familiar with the driving characteristics of this
catalytic converters may not be available;
vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle
catalysts.
handles on different road surfaces. Do not
RGasoline may have a considerably lower attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving
engine damage. actions that can cause loss of vehicle control.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available When driving off-road or working the vehicle
for delivery in Europe under our European hard, do not overload it. And, always wear
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 22
22 Introduction
your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
an unbelted person is significantly more likely qualified maintenance or repair facility for
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. further inspection or repairs.
Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
G Warning! familiar with the following information and
Work improperly carried out on electronic rules:
components and associated software could Rthe safety precautions in this manual
cause them to cease functioning. Because the
Rthe Technical data section in this manual
vehicles electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made may Rtraffic rules and regulations
produce an undesired effect on other Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your G Warning!
vehicle. Various warning labels are attached to your
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended to
for repairs or modifications to electronic make you and others aware of various risks.
components. Do not remove any of these warning labels
Other improper work or modifications on the unless explicitly instructed to do so by
vehicle could also have a negative impact on information on the label itself. Removing
the operating safety of the vehicle. warning labels may cause you and others to
Some safety systems only function while the be unaware of certain risks which may result
engine is running. You should therefore never in an accident and/or personal injury.
turn off the engine while driving.
G Warning! Problems with your vehicle

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and If you should experience a problem with your
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
Such blows can be caused, for example, by affect its safe operation, we urge you to
running over an obstacle, road debris or a contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
pothole. If you feel a sudden significant immediately to have the problem diagnosed
vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect and corrected if required. If the matter is not
that damage to your vehicle as occurred: handled to your satisfaction, please discuss
Rturn
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center
on your hazard warning flashers
management or, if necessary, contact us at
Rslow down carefully one of the following addresses:
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe In the USA:
distance from the road Customer Assistance Center
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle One Mercedes Drive
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 23
Introduction 23
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Vehicle data recording

98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
Reporting safety defects 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
For the USA only:
devices that can record vehicle systems data
The following text is published as required of and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. transmit some data in certain accidents.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
This information helps, for example, to
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
of 1966.
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Reporting safety defects
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect purposes
which could cause a crash or could cause
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety lessee
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Rin response to an official request by law
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. enforcement or other government agency
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
open an investigation, and if it finds that a Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it organization and/or
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your Please check the Tele Aid subscription
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. service agreement for details regarding the
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle information that may be recorded or
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 transmitted via that system.
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
www.safercar.gov.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 24
24
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 25
25
Exterior view ....................................... 26

Cockpit ................................................. 27
Instrument cluster .............................. 28
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 29
Center console .................................... 31
Overhead control panel ...................... 32
Drivers door control panel and
seat adjustment .................................. 33
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 26
26 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
i This Operators Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Tailgate 71 Wiping with washer fluid 93
Power tailgate 72 Cleaning 255
Locking and unlocking 66 C Panorama roof with power
Unlocking and opening tilt/sliding panel 184
manually 300 D Exterior rear view mirrors 84
; Rear window defroster 184 E Hood 214
= Rear lamps 303 F Front lamps 303
? Doors: G Headlamp cleaning system 91
Locking and unlocking 66
Unlocking/locking H Front towing eye 322
manually 299 I Tires and wheels 218
A Wipers 93 Rims and tires 331
Wiper blades, replacing 310 J Fuel filler flap 212
Wiper blades, cleaning 255
K Rear towing eye 322
B Windshield:
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 27
Cockpit 27
Cockpit
At a glance
: Cruise control lever 168 H Steering wheel adjustment
stalk (electrical) 82
; Instrument cluster 28,
108 I Combination switch: 90
= Multifunction steering 29, Turn signals 90
wheel 110 Wipers 93
High beam 90
? Horn
J Parking brake pedal 102
A Front Parktronic warning
indicators 173 K On-board diagnostics
(OBD) socket
B Overhead control panel 32
L Hood lock release 214
C Glove box 192
M Parking brake release 102
D Glove box lock 192
N Exterior lamp switch 87
E Center console 31
O Door control panel and seat
F Starter switch 76 adjustment/memory 33
G Steering wheel release
handle (manual) 82
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 28
28 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: Combination gauge with: ? Speedometer
Fuel gauge A Multifunction display 112
8 Fuel tank reserve
warning lamp 294 B ! Right turn signal
Coolant temperature gauge indicator lamp 90
? Coolant temperature C Tachometer with:
warning lamp 295 N Front fog lamps
Indicator/warning lamps: indicator lamp 89
K High-beam headlamp R Rear fog lamp
indicator lamp 90 indicator lamp 89
L Low-beam headlamp h Combination low tire
indicator lamp 88 pressure/TPMS
; Engine malfunction malfunction telltale, USA 224,
indicator lamp 295 only 296
$ Brake warning lamp, 6 Supplemental
USA only 291 Restraint System (SRS) 36,
J Brake warning lamp, indicator lamp 293
Canada only 291 ! Antilock Brake
System (ABS) indicator
; # Left turn signal lamp 289
indicator lamp 90 7 Seat belt telltale 50,
= d ESP warning lamp 293 292
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 29
Multifunction steering wheel 29
Function Page Multifunction steering wheel

D Outside temperature/ 110,
At a glance
additional speedometer 121
E Outside temperature 110,
121
F Program mode indicator 106
G Transmission position
indicator/ gear range 104,
indicator 106
H Digital clock
Setting the time 121
I Instrument cluster
illumination 109
Function Page
: Multifunction display 112
; Press button W or X
to set the volume. 115
Press button ~:
to end a call 117
to reject an incoming call 117
Press button 6:
to answer a call 117
to dial1 117
to redial1 118
Press button 8 to mute.
= Press button ? to
activate the Voice Control
System2.
1 Function only available in telephone menu.

2 The Voice Control System is only available with the COMAND system. Refer to separate operating
instructions.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 30
30 Multifunction steering wheel

? Press button % briefly: Press button a:
At a glance
to go to the next higher to confirm selection or

menu level 111 message 112
to confirm display message 111 to switch to the phone
book1 117
to cancel the Voice Control
System2 to dial a selected phone
number1 117
Press and hold button
% to select the standard
display. 112
A Press button = or ;: 111
to call up line for menus
to scroll to the left or right
to select menus
Press button 9 or :
briefly: 111
to select submenus
to scroll up or down through
lists
to select previous or next
track, scene, or stored
station within Audio menu 115
to switch to the phone book
and select a name or
number within Tel menu 117
Press and hold button
9 or :: 111
to select previous or next
track or scene with quick
search or to select previous
or next station in waveband
(if no station list is
available) within Audio
menu 115
to start the quick search in
the phone book within Tel
menu 117
instructions.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 31
Center console 31
Center console Upper part

Lower part
At a glance
Function Page
Function Page : Hazard warning flasher
switch 90
: Ashtray 196
Cigarette lighter 197 ; Alarm system indicator
lamp 63
; Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission 103 = Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp, USA 42,
= Cup holder 195 only 298
? Front armrest storage Front passenger front air
compartments 192 bag off indicator lamp, 45,
Canada only 297
A Audio controller 129
COMAND controller (see
? Electronic Stability
separate operating Program (ESP) switch 63
instructions) A Audio system 125
B Program mode selector or
switch for automatic COMAND system, see
transmission 106 separate operating
instructions
B Seat heating, front
passenger side 81
C Parktronic system
deactivation switch 174
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 32
32 Overhead control panel
Function Page Overhead control panel

D Dual-zone automatic
At a glance
climate control 177

Rear window defroster 184
E Seat heating, drivers side 81
Function Page
: Rear interior lighting on/off 92
; Interior lighting control 92
= Right reading lamp on/off 92
? Roof panel switch 185
A Information button (Tele
Aid system) 203
B SOS button (Tele Aid
system) 202
C Interior rear view mirror 84
D Integrated electronic
compass 199
E Garage door opener 205
F Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone and
Voice Control System3
instructions.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 33
Drivers door control panel and seat adjustment 33
Function Page Drivers door control panel and seat

adjustment
G Roadside Assistance
At a glance
button (Tele Aid system) 203
H Left reading lamp on/off 92
I Front interior lighting on/
off 92
Function Page
: Inside door handle 70
; Central unlocking switch 71
= Seat adjustment 79
? Memory function for
storing seat, exterior
mirror, and steering wheel
settings 86
A Exterior rear view mirrors
adjustment 84
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors4 85
B Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows 95
C Rear door window override
switch 58
4 Depending on vehicle production date.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 34
34 Drivers door control panel and seat adjustment
Function Page
D Remote tailgate opening/
At a glance
closing switch 74
E Central locking switch 71
Seat adjustment, vehicles without memory

function
Function Page
= Seat adjustment 79
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 35
35
Vehicle equipment .............................. 36

Occupant safety .................................. 36
Panic alarm .......................................... 59
Driving safety systems ....................... 59
Anti-theft systems .............................. 63
Safety and security

X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 36
36 Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment G Warning!

Modifications to or work improperly
i This Operators Manual describes all conducted on restraint system components
features, standard or optional, potentially or their wiring, as well as tampering with
available for your vehicle at the time of interconnected electronic systems, can lead
Safety and security
purchase. Please be aware that your to the restraint systems no longer functioning
vehicle might not be equipped with all as intended.
features described in this manual. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Occupant safety although the deceleration threshold for air
Introduction bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
In this section you will learn the most tamper with electronic components or their
important facts about the restraint system software.
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are: i See Children in the vehicle
RSeat belts (Y page 53) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
RChild restraints
the vehicle
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Rrestraint systems for infants and children
(LATCH) also known as ISOFIX
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with SRS indicator lamp
- Air bags The SRS system conducts a self-test when
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
seat belts
The SRS indicator lamp 6 in the
- Seat belt force limiter instrument cluster comes on when the
RNECK-PRO active front head restraints ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine has been
RAir bag system components with started.
- Front passenger front air bag off The SRS components are in operational
indicator lamp readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
- USA only: Front passenger seat with 6 is not lit while the engine is running.
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
- Canada only: Front passenger seat with
BabySmart air bag deactivation system
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 37
Occupant safety 37
G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily

The SRS self-check has detected a releases a small amount of dust from the air
malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful
6 to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some
Rdoes not come on at all
Safety and security

temporary breathing difficulty for people with
Rfails to go out after approximately asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
4 seconds after the engine was started this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
Rcomes on after the engine was started or soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
while driving breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
For your safety, we strongly recommend that air by opening a window or door.
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system G Warning!
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be To reduce the risk of injury when the front air
activated when needed in an accident, which bags inflate, it is very important for the driver
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS and front passenger to always be in a properly
might also deploy unexpectedly and seated position and to wear their respective
unnecessarily which could also result in injury seat belt.
as well.
For maximum protection in the event of a
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates collision always be in normal seated position
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or with your back against the seat backrest.
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
on the SRS must therefore only be performed properly positioned on your body.
by qualified technicians. Contact an
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
speed and force, a proper seating position
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system and correct positioning of the hands on the
to accommodate a person with disabilities, steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes properly or are too close to the air bag can be
(1-800-367-6372) for details. seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
Air bags
position that is as upright as possible with
G Warning! your back against the seat backrest.
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential RMove the drivers seat as far back as
of injury and fatality in certain possible, still permitting proper operation
Rfrontal impacts (front air bags) of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the drivers chest to the center of
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and the air bag cover on the steering wheel
window curtain air bags) must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
Rrollovers (window curtain air bags) You should be able to accomplish this by
However, no system available today can adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 38
38 Occupant safety
you have any difficulties, please contact an There is a possibility for a side impact air bag-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. related injury if occupants, especially
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the children, are not properly seated or restrained
steering wheel or dashboard. when next to a side impact air bag which
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
Safety and security
order to do its job.

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
the rim can increase the risk and potential
follow these guidelines:
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
front air bag inflates. (1) Always sit as upright as possible,
wear the seat belt properly, and for
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as
children 12 years old and under,
possible rearward from the dashboard
use an appropriately sized infant
when the seat is occupied.
restraint, toddler restraint, or
ROccupants, especially children, should booster seat recommended for the
never place their bodies or lean their heads size and weight of the child.
in the area of the door where the side (2) Always wear seat belts properly.
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the side Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as Rfrontal impacts (front air bags)
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized Rside impacts (side impact and window
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or curtain air bags) if the system determines
booster seat recommended for the size and the need for air bag deployment
weight of the child. Rrollovers (window curtain air bags)
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and Only in the event of such a situation will they
under must never ride in the front seat, provide their supplemental protection.
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized The driver and passengers should always
BabySmart compatible child seat, which wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
operates with the BabySmart air bag possible for the air bags to provide their
deactivation system installed in the vehicle supplemental protection.
to deactivate the front passenger front air
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
they will be struck by the air bag when it
bags will not deploy. The driver and
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
passengers will then be protected to the
or fatal injury will result.
extent possible by a properly fastened seat
Failure to follow these instructions can result belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. needed to provide the best possible
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you protection in a rollover.
make the buyer aware of this safety Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
information. Be sure to give the buyer this Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
Operators Manual. whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
air bags.
G Warning!
It is important to your safety and that of your
Accident research shows that the safest place passengers to have deployed air bags
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. replaced and to have any malfunctioning air
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 39
Occupant safety 39
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the RDo not install additional electrical/
air bags will continue to provide supplemental electronic equipment on or near SRS
crash protection for occupants. components and wiring.
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
Safety and security

umbrellas, etc.).
and air bag
RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
G Warning! from the coat hooks or handles over the
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have door. These items may be thrown around in
been subjected to stress in an accident the vehicle and cause head and other
must be replaced. Their anchoring points injuries when the window curtain air bag is
must also be checked. Only use seat belts deployed.
installed or supplied by an authorized RAir bag system components will be hot after
Mercedes-Benz Center. an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency RNever place your feet on the instrument
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
perchlorate material, which may require keep both feet on the floor in front of the
special handling and regard for the seat.
environment. Check with your local
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
governments disposal guidelines.
California residents, see risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ causing unintended air bag deployment.
Perchlorate/index.cfm. Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD Center.
that has deployed must be replaced.
RFor your protection and the protection of
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
They could tear. ETD, our safety instructions must be
RDo not make any modification that could followed. These instructions are available
change the effectiveness of the seat belts. from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
Center.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
not be able to provide adequate protection. required inflation volume, and the material
RNo
of the air bags, there is the possibility of
modifications of any kind may be made
abrasions or other, potentially more serious
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
RDo no change or remove any component or
part of the SRS. If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
RDo not install additional trim material, seat recommend that you inform the subsequent
covers, badges, etc. over the steering owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag Also refer them to the applicable section in
cover, outboard sides of the seat the Operators Manual.
backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
trims.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 40
40 Occupant safety
Front air bags The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the systems preset
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. deployment thresholds. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deploy in the event
Safety and security
of a rollover unless the vehicles rate of

longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if
Rvehicles with OCS, USA only: the system,
based on OCS weight sensor readings,
Drivers front air bag : and front passenger detects that the front passenger seat is
front air bag ; are designed to provide occupied
increased protection for the driver and front Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center
passenger against the risk of injuries to the console is not lit (USA only: (Y page 42),
head and thorax. Canada only: (Y page 45))
Driver and front passenger front air bags are Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
deployed threshold
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
! Vehicles with BabySmart air bag
Rif the system determines that air bag deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
deployment can offer additional protection place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
to that provided by the seat belt the front passenger seat. This could cause
Rdepending on whether the respective seat the front or side impact air bag on the front
belt is in use passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the systems deployment
Rindependently of the side impact air bags threshold.
and/or the window curtain air bags
The front air bags in this vehicle have been Side impact air bags
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows
the air bags to have different rates of inflation. G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle G Warning!
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
control unit.
control are located in the doors. Do not
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The front modify any components of the doors or door
passenger front air bag deployment is trim panels including, for example, the
additionally influenced by the passengers addition of door speakers.
weight category as identified by the Occupant
Improper repair work on the doors or the
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 42).
modification or addition of components to the
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter the doors create a risk of rendering the side
front passenger-side occupant, the higher the impact air bags inoperative or causing
vehicle deceleration rate required for second unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
stage inflation of the front passenger front air doors must therefore only be performed by
bag.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 41
Occupant safety 41
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized the preset deployment threshold for side
Mercedes-Benz Center. impact air bags :.
! Vehicles with BabySmart air bag
deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
Safety and security

the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the systems deployment
threshold.
G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
Side impact air bags : are designed to vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
provide increased protection for the thorax interfere with or prevent the deployment of
but not the head, neck and arms of the driver the side impact air bags. Contact an
or front passenger. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
The side impact air bags : are deployed availability.
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
Window curtain air bags
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
Rregardless of whether the seat belts on the
impacted side of the vehicle are in use
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
Vehicles with OCS (USA only): The front
passenger side impact air bag will not deploy
if the OCS senses that the front passenger
seat is empty and the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened. With the front passenger
seat empty and the seat belt fastened, the
front passenger side impact air bag will Window curtain air bags : are designed to
deploy independently of the empty seat. provide increased protection for the head but
Whether a seat belt is recognized as fastened not the chest or arms.
depends on whether or not the latch plate is Window curtain air bags : are deployed
properly inserted into the buckle.
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
Side impact air bags : are not deployed in
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
side impacts which do not exceed the
systems deployment threshold. vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Side impact air bags : will not deploy in the Rindependently of the front air bags
event of a rollover unless the vehicles rate of Rregardless of whether the front passenger
lateral deceleration or acceleration exceeds seat is occupied
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 42
42 Occupant safety
Rregardless of whether the seat belt on the Only seat accessories approved by
impacted side of the vehicle is in use Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Rin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system Both the driver and the front passenger
determines that air bag deployment can should always use the 45 indicator
offer additional protection to that provided lamp as an indication of whether or not the
Safety and security
by the seat belt front passenger is properly positioned.

Window curtain air bags : are not deployed G Warning!
in impacts which do not exceed the systems If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates
deployment threshold. when an adult or someone larger than a small
Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area individual is in the front passenger seat, have
indicated by the arrows. the front passenger reposition himself or
herself in the seat until the 45
indicator lamp goes out.
Occupant Classification System In the event of a collision, the air bag control
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is unit will not allow front passenger front air bag
standard equipment in USA. deployment when the OCS has classified the
front passenger seat occupant as weighting
The OCS activates or deactivates the front
as much as or less than a typical 12-month-
passenger front air bag automatically. The
old child in a standard child restraint or if the
respective status is based on the classified
front passenger seat is classified as being
occupant weight category determined by
empty.
weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat. When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as
The system does not deactivate
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
Rthe front passenger side impact air bag 12-month-old child in a standard child
Rthe window curtain air bag restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will
Rthe
illuminate when the engine is started and
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
To be classified correctly, the front passenger passenger front air bag is deactivated.
must sit When the OCS senses that the front
Rwith the seat belt properly fastened passenger seat is classified as being empty,
Rin the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
a position that is as upright as possible
with the back against the seat backrest when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the front
Rwith the feet on the floor passenger front air bag is deactivated.
If the occupants weight is transferred to When the OCS senses that the front
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning passenger seat occupant is classified as
on armrests), the OCS may not be able to being heavier than the weight of a typical
properly approximate the occupants weight 12-month-old child seated in a standard child
category. restraint or as being a small individual (such
If your seat, including the trim cover and as a young teenager or a small adult), the
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
Center. started and then, depending on occupant
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 43
Occupant safety 43
illuminated or go out. With the 45 infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster

indicator lamp illuminated, the front seat recommended for the size and weight of
passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the child.
the 45 indicator lamp out, the front The infant or child restraint must be properly
passenger front air bag is activated. secured with the vehicles seat belt, the seat
Safety and security

When the OCS senses that the front belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
passenger seat occupant is classified as an top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
adult or someone larger than a small child seat manufacturers instructions.
individual, the 45 indicator lamp will Occupants, especially children, should always
illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
the engine is started and then goes out, properly and use an appropriately sized infant
indicating that the front passenger front air restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
bag is activated. recommended for the size and weight of the
If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, child.
the front passenger front air bag is Children can be killed or seriously injured by
deactivated and will not be deployed. an inflating air bag. Note the following
If the 45 indicator lamp is not important information when circumstances
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag require you to place a child in the front
is activated and will be deployed passenger seat:
Rin RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
the event of certain frontal impacts
technology designed to deactivate the front
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
threshold
when the system senses the weight of a
Rindependently of the side impact air bags typical 12-month-old child or less along
If the front passenger front air bag is with the weight of a standard appropriate
deployed, the rate of inflation will be child restraint on the front passenger seat.
influenced by RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as front passenger seat will be seriously
assessed by the air bag control unit injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
Rthe front passengers weight category as could occur under some circumstances,
identified by the OCS even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
For more information on air bag display
completely eliminate this risk is to never
messages in the multifunction display, see
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
(Y page 264).
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
G Warning! recommend that you always place a child
According to accident statistics, children are in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
safer when properly restrained in the rear RIf you must install a rear-facing child
seating positions than in the front seating restraint on the front passenger seat
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that because circumstances require you to do
children be placed in the rear seats whenever so, make sure the 45 indicator lamp
possible. Regardless of seating position, is illuminated, indicating that the front
children 12 years old and under must be passenger front air bag is deactivated.
seated and properly secured in an appropriate Should the 45 indicator lamp not
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 44
44 Occupant safety
illuminate or go out while the restraint is impact met the criteria and was of
installed, please check installation. sufficient severity to deploy the driver front
Periodically check the 45 indicator air bag
lamp while driving to make sure the
45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If
Safety and security
the 45 indicator lamp goes out or

remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
facing child restraint on the front passenger 45 indicator lamp : will be
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, illuminated, except with the SmartKey
use the proper child restraint removed from the starter switch or with the
recommended for the age, size and weight starter switch in position 0.
of the child, and secure child restraint with G Warning!
the vehicles seat belt according to the child
If the red SRS indicator lamp 6 in the
seat manufacturers instructions. For
instrument cluster and the 45
children larger than the typical 12-month-
indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there
old child, the front passenger front air bag
is a malfunction in the OCS. The front
may or may not be activated.
passenger front air bag will be deactivated in
Deployment of the driver front air bag does this case. Have the system checked by
not mean that the front passenger front air qualified technicians as soon as possible.
bag also should have deployed. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The OCS may have determined
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
In order to ensure proper operation of the air
12-month-old child seated in a standard
bag system and OCS:
child restraint both of which are instances
where the system suppresses deployment RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
of the front passenger front air bag even position that is as upright as possible with
though the impact met the criteria and was your back against the seat backrest.
of sufficient severity to deploy the driver RWhile seated, an occupant should not
front air bag position him/herself in such a way as to
Rthat the seat was occupied by a small cause the occupants weight to be lifted
individual (such as a young teenager or a from the seat bottom as this may result in
small adult) or a child who weighs more the OCS being unable to correctly
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
child in a standard child restraint both of
which are instances where the system may
suppress deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 45
Occupant safety 45
approximate the occupants weight BabySmart air bag deactivation

category. system
RRead and observe all warnings in this The BabySmart air bag deactivation system
chapter. is standard equipment in Canada.
G Warning!
Safety and security

OCS Self-test
According to accident statistics, children are
After turning the SmartKey in the starter safer when properly restrained in the rear
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the seating positions than in the front seating
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
twice, the 45 indicator lamp children be placed in the rear seats whenever
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly possible. Regardless of seating position,
sitting on the front passenger seat and the children 12 years old and under must be
system classifies the occupant as an adult, seated and properly secured in an appropriate
the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
and go out after approximately 6 seconds. seat recommended for the size and weight of
If the seat is not occupied and the system the child.
classifies the front passenger seat as being The infant or child restraint must be properly
empty, the 45 indicator lamp will secured with the vehicles seat belt, the seat
illuminate and not go out. belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
G Warning! child seat manufacturers instructions.
If the 45 indicator lamp does not Occupants, especially children, should always
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz properly and use an appropriately sized infant
Center before seating any child on the front restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
passenger seat. recommended for the size and weight of the
For more information, see the Practical child.
hints section (Y page 298). Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
G Warning! important information when circumstances
Never place anything between seat cushion require you to place a child in the front
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces passenger seat:
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and RChildren 12 years old and under must never
back of the child seat must make full contact
ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-
with the passenger seat cushion and
Benz authorized BabySmart compatible
backrest.
child seat, which operates with the
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger BabySmart system installed in the vehicle
seat backrest. to deactivate the front passenger front air
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
injuries to the child in case of an accident, they will be struck by the air bag when it
instead of increasing protection for the child. inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
Follow the manufacturers instructions for or fatal injury will result.
installation of child seats. RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 46
46 Occupant safety
injured or even killed if the front passenger the 45 indicator lamp remains
front air bag inflates in a collision which illuminated.
could occur under some circumstances, Please be sure to check the 45
even with the air bag technology installed indicator lamp every time you use a
in your vehicle. The only means to BabySmart compatible child seat on the
Safety and security
completely eliminate this risk is to never front passenger seat. Should the 45
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint indicator lamp go out while the restraint is
in the front seat. We therefore strongly installed, please check installation. If the
recommend that you always place a child 45 indicator lamp remains out, do not
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. use the BabySmart restraint to transport a
RIf you must install a BabySmart child on the front passenger seat until the
compatible rear-facing child restraint on system has been repaired.
the front passenger seat because
circumstances require you to do so, make
sure the 45 indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Should the 45 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 45 indicator
45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If
remains out, do not transport a child on the Special BabySmart compatible child seats,
front passenger seat until the system has designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz
been repaired. system, are required for use with the
BabySmart air bag deactivation system.
Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on availability. With
the special child seat installed properly, the
front passenger front air bag will not deploy.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- 45 indicator lamp : will be
facing child restraint on the front passenger
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
removed from the starter switch or with the
use the proper child restraint
starter switch in position 0.
recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with The system does not deactivate
the vehicles seat belt according to the child Rthe side impact air bag
seat manufacturers instructions. Rthe window curtain air bag
G Warning! Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
When using a BabySmart compatible child
seat on the front passenger seat, the front Self-test BabySmart without special
passenger front air bag will not deploy only if child seat installed
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 47
Occupant safety 47
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or Seat belts

twice, the 45 indicator lamp comes
on for approximately 6 seconds and then Safety notes
goes out. The use of seat belts and infant and child
If the 45 indicator lamp should not restraint systems is required by law in all 50
Safety and security

come on or is continuously lit, the system is states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.
not functioning. You must see an authorized territories and all Canadian provinces.
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
child on the front passenger seat. More occupants should have their seat belts
information can be found in the Practical fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
hints section (Y page 297).
i See Children in the vehicle
G Warning! (Y page 53) for information on
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile Rinfants and children traveling with you in
phones, electronic tags such as those used in the vehicle
ski passes and like electronic devices on the Rrestraint systems for infants and children
front passenger seat. Signals from such
devices may interfere with the BabySmart G Warning!
air bag deactivation system. Such signal Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
interference may cause the 45 Always make sure all of your passengers are
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test. properly restrained. You and your passengers
The SRS indicator lamp 6 and/or the should always wear seat belts.
45 indicator lamp could be Failure to wear and properly fasten and
continuously lit, indicating that the system is position your seat belt greatly increases your
not functioning. The front passenger front air risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
bag could deploy inadvertently or fail to accident.
deploy in an accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
G Warning! be considerably more severe without your
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
The BabySmart air bag deactivation system
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
will ONLY work with a special child seat
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
designed to operate with it. It will not work
it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
with child seats which are not BabySmart
compatible. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
Never place anything between seat cushion
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
as intended if the occupants are properly
the effectiveness off the BabySmart air bag
wearing their seat belts.
deactivation system. The bottom of the child
seat must make full contact with the front G Warning!
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
child in case of an accident, instead of
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
protecting the child.
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
Follow the manufacturers instructions for it, the seat belt would apply force at the
installation of special child seats. abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 48
48 Occupant safety
seat belt provide the best restraint when the SRS (driver front air bag, front passenger
wearer is in a position that is as upright as front air bag, side impact air bags, window
possible and the seat belt is properly curtain air bags for door windows),
positioned on the body. Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs),
seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee
G Warning!
Safety and security
bolsters.
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than The system is designed to enhance the
there are seat belts available. Make sure protection offered to properly belted
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags,
use a seat belt for more than one person at a window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts
time. which exceed preset deployment
thresholds and in certain rollovers (window
G Warning! curtain air bags and ETDs).
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
been subjected to stress in an accident must
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.
be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
In a frontal crash, your body would move
points must be checked.
too far forward. That would increase the
Only use seat belts which have been approved chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
by Mercedes-Benz. belt would also apply too much force to the
Do not make any modifications to the seat ribs or abdomen, which could severely
belts. This can lead to unintended activation injure internal organs such as your liver or
of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when spleen.
necessary. Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may section is located as close as possible to
severely weaken them. In a crash they may the middle of the shoulder. It should not
not be able to provide adequate protection. touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
Have all work carried out only by qualified portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
technicians. Contact an authorized this purpose, you can adjust the height of
Mercedes-Benz Center. the seat belt outlet.
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
Proper use of seat belts your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your
G Warning! abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY a crash.
RSeat belts can only protect when used RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other breakable objects in or on your clothing,
way than as described in this section, as such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
that could result in serious injuries in case these might cause injuries.
of an accident.
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
REach occupant should wear their seat belt snugly. Take special care of this when
at all times, because seat belts help reduce wearing loose clothing.
the likelihood of and potential severity of
RNever use a seat belt for more than one
injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
The integrated restraint system includes
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 49
Occupant safety 49
around a person and another person or children 12 years old and under must be
other objects at the same time. seated and properly secured in an
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
crash, you would not have the full width of restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the seat belt to distribute impact forces. the size and weight of the child. For additional
Safety and security

The twisted seat belt against your body information, see Children in the vehicle.
could cause injuries. A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
RPregnant women should also always use a
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
or the child is not properly secured in the child
should be positioned as low as possible on
restraint.
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen. G Warning!
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is Vehicles with BabySmart air bag
as upright as possible. deactivation system, Canada only: Children
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make 12 years old and under must never ride in the
sure it is properly positioned. front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmart compatible child
RNever place your feet on the instrument seat, which operates with the BabySmart
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always system installed in the vehicle to deactivate
keep both feet on the floor in front of the the front passenger front air bag when it is
seat. installed properly. Otherwise they will be
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
booster seats, always follow the child seat will result.
manufacturers instructions.
G Warning!
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the seat belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to seat
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
the seat belts.
Fastening the seat belts

G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that of seat belt outlet :.
children be placed in the rear seats whenever X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
possible. Regardless of seating position, across the top of your shoulder and the lap
portion across your hips.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 50
50 Occupant safety
X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it belt outlet in the seat backrest and release
clicks. it.
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the The seat belt is retracted and unblocked.
correct height (Y page 50).
X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a Seat belt outlet height adjustment
Safety and security
snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up. You can adjust the height of the seat belt
All lap/shoulder belts except the drivers seat outlet for the drivers and front passenger
belt have special seat belt retractors to seat.
secure child restraints properly. For more
information on special seat belt retractors,
see Infant and child restraint systems
(Y page 54).
To release the seat belt with seat belt release
button ?, see (Y page 50).
Releasing the seat belts

X Press seat belt release button ?
(Y page 49).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind
the seat belt by guiding latch plate ; X Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet height
(Y page 49). adjuster upward.
The seat belt outlet height adjuster
! Make sure the seat belt retracts engages in different positions.
completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
X Lowering: Press and hold release
latch plate could get caught or pinched in
button :.
the door or in the seat mechanism. This can
damage the seat belt and impair its X Slide the seat belt outlet height adjuster
effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the downward.
door and/or door trim panel. Such damage X Release release button : and make sure
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz the seat belt outlet height adjuster engages
Limited Warranty. into place.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Enhanced seat belt reminder system
Center.
When the engine is started, the seat belt
Rear center seat belt telltale 7 will always illuminate for
6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
The seat belt of the rear center seat may be to fasten your seat belts.
blocked when the left rear seat backrest is If the drivers seat belt is not fastened when
folded forward and back (Y page 189). The the engine is started, an additional warning
seat belt can then not be pulled out. chime will sound. The warning chime goes out
X Unblocking the seat belt of the rear after approximately 6 seconds or once the
center seat: Pull the center seat belt drivers seat belt is fastened.
approximately 1 in (25 mm) out of the seat
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 51
Occupant safety 51
If after these 6 seconds the drivers or the The ETDs are designed to activate in the
front passengers seat belt (with the front following cases:
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
front doors closed, the systems preset deployment threshold
Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains Rin side impacts exceeding the systems
Safety and security

illuminated for as long as either the drivers preset deployment threshold on the far
or front passengers seat belt is not side of the impact
fastened.
Rin certain vehicle rollovers
Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds
Rif the restraint systems are operational and
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale
7 starts flashing and a warning chime functioning correctly, see SRS indicator
sounds with increasing intensity for a lamp (Y page 36)
maximum of 60 seconds or until the The ETDs for the front seats will only activate
drivers and front passengers seat belt are if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate
fastened. properly inserted into buckle).
If you and/or your passenger release the The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
seat belt during driving, the seat belt with or without the respective seat belts
telltale 7 starts flashing and the fastened.
warning chime sounds as described before. In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the
If the drivers or the front passengers seat seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds, more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
the warning chime stops sounding, the seat limiters, when activated, are employed to
belt telltale 7 stops flashing but help reduce the peak force exerted by the
continues to be illuminated. seat belts on occupants during a crash.
After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
is reactivated and the seat belt telltale position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed The ETDs do not pull occupants back
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). toward the seat backrest.
The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if
G Warning!
both the drivers and the front passengers
seat belt (with the front passenger seat Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is replaced.
standing still and a front door is opened. For your safety, when disposing of the
For more information, see Practical hints pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
(Y page 292). instructions. These are available at any
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
NECK-PRO active front head
The seat belts for the front seats and rear restraints
outer seats are equipped with ETDs and seat
belt force limiters. The NECK-PRO active front head restraints
are intended to offer the driver and front
passenger increased protection from
whiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rear-
end collision, the NECK-PRO active front head
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 52
52 Occupant safety
restraints on the front seats are designed to head restraint supports the back of the head
move forward in the direction of travel. They at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
thus provide the head with increased support injury to the head and neck in the event of an
earlier on in the collision sequence. The accident or similar situation.
NECK-PRO active front head restraints will
move forward whether the seats are occupied For information on head restraint adjustment,
Safety and security
or not. see Head restraint height (Y page 79), or

see Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
G Warning! (Y page 80).
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the
head restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECK-
PRO active front head restraints may not be Correct driver seat adjustment
able to function properly or offer the intended
degree of protection they were designed for G Warning!
in the event of a rear-end collision. In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the
G Warning! vehicle is put into motion:
Only use seat or head restraint covers which Rseat adjustment
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Rhead restraint adjustment
Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers may Rsteering wheel adjustment
interfere with or prevent the activation of the Rrear view mirror adjustment
NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/
Rfastening of seat belts
or the deployment of the front side impact air
bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
When the NECK-PRO active front head

restraints have been triggered in an accident,
the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
must be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO
active front head restraints cannot offer any
additional protection in the event of another
rear-end collision.
For information on resetting the activated
NECK-PRO active front head restraints, see
Resetting activated head restraints
(Y page 301).
You cannot remove the NECK-PRO active
front head restraints.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 53
Occupant safety 53
Steering wheel RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can

correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 82.
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
XPosition steering wheel : properly. See is as nearly upright as possible.
(Y page 82) for manual adjustment and
RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front
(Y page 82) for electrical adjustment.
Safety and security

edge of the seat cushion lightly supports
Make sure:
your legs.
RYou can reach the steering wheel with your
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
arms slightly bent at the elbows.
close to the head as possible and the
RYou can move your legs freely. center of the head restraint supports the
RAll displays (including malfunction and back of the head at eye level.
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster RNever place hands under the seat or near
are clearly visible. any moving parts while the seat is being
adjusted.
Seat belt
G Observe Safety notes, see page 47. Children in the vehicle
XFasten and position your seat belt ;
correctly (Y page 49). Safety notes
Make sure: If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly. vehicle:
X Secure the child using an infant or child
RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
restraint appropriate to the age and size of
section is located as close as possible to
the child.
the middle of the shoulder.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly
RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low
secured at all times while the vehicle is in
as possible on your hips. motion.
Seat and head restraint

XPosition seat = and head restraint
properly. See (Y page 79) for seat and
head restraint adjustment.
Observe the following points:
RAlways be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in the steering wheel as
possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls.
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 54
54 Occupant safety
G Warning! Infant and child restraint systems

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the G Observe Safety notes, see page 53.
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
We recommend all infants and children be
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
vehicle is in motion.
Safety and security
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child

restraint system, or with access to an Canada only:
unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised Only use a BabySmart compatible child
access to a vehicle could result in an accident restraint for the front passenger seat in this
and/or serious personal injury. The children vehicle.
could All lap/shoulder belts except the drivers seat
Rinjure
belt have special seat belt retractors for
themselves on parts of the vehicle
secure fastening of child restraints.
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold restraint manufacturers instructions for
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with mounting.
vehicle equipment that can be operated To activate the special seat belt retractor:
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and
starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel let it retract.
adjustment, or the memory function During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting
sound can be heard to indicate that the
If children open a door, they could injure other
special seat belt retractor is activated.
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
The seat belt is now locked.
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
X Push down on child restraint to take up any
Do not expose the child restraint system to
slack.
direct sunlight. The child restraint systems
metal parts, for example, could become very To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
hot, and the child could be burned by these X Release the seat belt buckle and let the
parts. seat belt retract completely.
The seat belt can then again be used in the
G Warning! usual manner.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor
passenger or cargo compartment unless they
for the front passenger seat, the front
are firmly secured in place.
passenger seat must be in the most backward
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo position.
increases a childs risk of injury in the event
of G Warning!
Rstrong braking maneuvers Never release the seat belt buckle while the
Rsudden changes of direction vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
retractor will be deactivated.
Ran accident
i Information on child seats with mounting
fittings for tether anchorages
(Y page 56).
For information on LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child seat anchors (Y page 57).
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 55
Occupant safety 55
The use of infant or child restraints is required restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
by law in all 50 states, the District of recommended for the size and weight of the
Columbia, the U.S. territories and all child.
Canadian provinces. Children can be killed or seriously injured by
Infants and small children should be seated an inflating air bag. Note the following
Safety and security

in an appropriate infant or child restraint important information when circumstances
system. They must be properly secured in require you to place a child in the front
accordance with the manufacturers passenger seat:
instructions for the child restraint. All infant RUSA only: Your vehicle is equipped with air
or child restraint systems must comply with
bag technology designed to deactivate the
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
front passenger front air bag in your vehicle
213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
typical 12-month-old child or less along
A statement by the child restraint with the weight of a standard appropriate
manufacturer of compliance with these child restraint on the front passenger seat.
standards can be found on the instruction
RUSA only: For children larger than the
label on the restraint and in the instruction
manual provided with the restraint. typical 12-month-old child, the front
passenger front air bag may or may not be
When using any infant restraint, toddler
activated. Always make sure the
restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
carefully read and follow all manufacturers
indicating that the front passenger front air
instructions for installation and use.
bag is deactivated.
Please read and observe warning labels
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
infant or child restraints. under must never ride in the front seat,
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
G Warning! BabySmart compatible child seat, which
According to accident statistics, children are operates with the BabySmart system
safer when properly restrained in the rear installed in the vehicle to deactivate the
seating positions than in the front seating front passenger front air bag when it is
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that installed properly. Otherwise they will be
children be placed in the rear seats whenever struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
possible. Regardless of seating position, crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
children 12 years old and under must be will result.
seated and properly secured in an appropriate RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster front passenger seat will be seriously
seat recommended for the size and weight of injured or even killed if the front passenger
the child. front air bag inflates in a collision which
The infant or child restraint must be properly could occur under some circumstances,
secured with the vehicles seat belt, the seat even with the air bag technology installed
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and in your vehicle. The only means to
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the completely eliminate this risk is to never
child seat manufacturers instructions. place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
Occupants, especially children, should always in the front seat. We therefore strongly
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt recommend that you always place a child
properly and use an appropriately sized infant in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 56
56 Occupant safety
RIf you must install a rear-facing child they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
restraint on the front passenger seat fits properly without a booster.
because circumstances require you to do When the child restraint is not in use, remove
so, make sure the 45 indicator lamp it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
is illuminated, indicating that the front belt to prevent the child restraint from
Safety and security
passenger front air bag is deactivated. becoming a projectile in the event of an

Should the 45 indicator lamp not accident.
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. Installation of infant and child restraint
Periodically check the 45 indicator systems
45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If G Observe Safety notes, see page 53.
G Warning!
remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has Always lock the seat backrests in their upright
been repaired. position when the rear seats are occupied by
passengers. Lock the seat backrests in their
upright position before installing top tether
straps or when the extended cargo
compartment is not in use. Make sure that
seat backrests are secured properly by
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If
facing child restraint on the front passenger a seat backrest is not locked properly, the
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, seat backrest could fold. The child seat would
use the proper child restraint no longer be supported properly or positioned
recommended for the age, size and weight to provide its intended benefit. That could
of the child, and secure child restraint with cause serious or even fatal injuries.
the vehicles seat belt according to the child
seat manufacturers instructions. This vehicle is equipped with tether
anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
G Warning! the rear seating positions.
Infants and small children should never share Top tether straps enable an additional
a seat belt with another occupant. During an connection to be made between child
accident, they could be crushed between the restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
occupant and seat belt. (ISOFIX) anchors and rear seats. This can
A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
further reduce the risk of injury.
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper seat belt
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 57
Occupant safety 57
X Move the respective head restraint : to Once hook ? is attached, the child restraint
its uppermost position (Y page 80). itself can be secured.
X Release the rear seat backrest X Install the child restraint system and
(Y page 189). tighten top tether strap A according to the
X Fold the rear seat backrest slightly forward. child restraint manufacturers instructions.
Safety and security

Child seat anchors LATCH-type
(ISOFIX)
G Warning!
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
X Guide top tether strap A between head proper seat belt positioning for children over
restraint : and top of the seat backrest. 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
X Securely fasten hook ?, which is part of a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
top tether strap A, to anchorage ring =. booster.
Make sure Install child seat according to manufacturers
instructions.
Rhook ? is attached to anchorage ring =
The child seat must be firmly attached to both
beyond the safety catch, as illustrated
anchors.
Rtop tether strap A is not twisted An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
Rhead restraint : is installed and loose during an accident which could result in
positioned such that top tether strap A serious injury or death to the child.
can pass freely between head restraint : Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
and top of the seat backrest child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Rtop tether strap A is positioned between Each rear outer seat has two LATCH-type
the seat backrest and cargo compartment (ISOFIX) anchors for the installation of a
cover blind ; (if installed) LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat with matching
X
mounting fittings.
Swing the rear seat backrest to the rear
until it engages. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
The red indicator is no longer visible. also be used and can be installed using the
X Check the rear seat backrest to be locked
vehicles seat belt system. Install child seat
according to the manufacturers instructions.
in its upright position (Y page 190).
The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) anchors are located
G Observe Safety notes, see page 190. between the seat cushion and the backrest.
X Lower head restraint : if necessary
(Y page 81).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 58
58
Safety and security Occupant safety
Information sign : indicates the position of X Securing: Press the lever up in direction of
anchor ;. arrow :.
X Install a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat X Check to make sure the child safety locks
according to the manufacturers are working properly.
instructions.
X Releasing: Press the lever down in
A rigid connection between the child seat
and the body of the vehicle is established. direction of arrow ;.
X Make sure that the seat belt for the rear Override switch
center seat can operate freely with a child G Observe Safety notes, see page 53.
seat installed.
With the override switch you can disable the
rear door window switches in the rear door
Child safety panels. This can be useful, for instance, when
you have children riding in the rear passenger
Child safety locks
compartment.
G Warning!
G Warning! Activate the override switch when children
Children could open a rear door from the are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
inside. This may cause serious personal injury children may otherwise injure themselves,
or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
doors with the child safety locks whenever window opening.
children are riding in the back seats of the
vehicle.
The child safety locks on the rear doors

enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is
unlocked.
X Activating: Press override switch :.

Indicator lamp ; comes on.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 59
Driving safety systems 59
The rear door windows can no longer be i USA only:

operated using the respective switch This device complies with Part 15 of the
located in the rear doors. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
You can still operate the rear door windows following two conditions:
using the switches located on the door 1. This device may not cause harmful
Safety and security

control panel of the drivers door. interference, and
X Deactivating: Press override switch :
2. this device must accept any
again. interference received, including
The rear door windows can be operated interference that may cause undesired
again using the respective switch located operation.
in the rear doors.
Any unauthorized modification to this
For more information on power windows, see
device could void the users authority to
the Controls in detail section
operate the equipment.
(Y page 95).
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Panic alarm Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
X Activating: Press and hold !

button : for at least 1 second. Driving safety systems
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate. Introduction
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again. This section contains information about the
or following driving safety systems:
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch. RABS (Antilock Brake System)
or RBAS (Brake Assist System)
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be RESP (Electronic Stability Program)
inside the vehicle.
i In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of most of the driving
systems described in this section is only
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 60
60 Driving safety systems
achieved with winter tires, or snow chains X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
as required. the emergency braking situation is over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
Safety notes locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
G Warning!
Safety and security
function again as normal. The BAS is then

The following factors increase the risk of deactivated.
accidents:
RExcessive
G Warning!
speed, especially in turns
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
RWet and slippery road surfaces functions, but without the additional brake
RFollowing another vehicle too closely boost available that the BAS would normally
provide in an emergency braking maneuver.
The driving safety systems described in this
Therefore, the braking distance may increase.
section cannot reduce these risks or prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by BAS
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires G Observe Safety notes, see page 60.
or the traction afforded.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
prevent accidents. very quickly, the BAS provides full brake
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the boost automatically, thereby potentially
driving safety systems described in this reducing the braking distance.
section must never be exploited in a reckless X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the emergency braking situation is over.
the users safety or the safety of others. The ABS will prevent the wheels from
Always adjust your driving style to the locking.
prevailing road and weather conditions and When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
keep a safe distance to other road users and function again as normal. The BAS is then
objects on the street. deactivated.
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
safety systems may also switch off. Observe G Warning!
indicator and warning lamps that may come If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
on as well as messages in the multifunction functions, but without the additional brake
display that may appear. boost available that the BAS would normally
provide in an emergency braking maneuver.
Therefore, the braking distance may increase.
ABS
G Observe Safety notes, see page 60. EBP
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes G Observe Safety notes, see page 60.
very quickly, the BAS provides full brake The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
boost automatically, thereby potentially enhances braking effectiveness by allowing
reducing the braking distance. the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 61
Driving safety systems 61
of the braking effort in straight-line braking G Warning!

without a loss of vehicle stability. Never switch off the ESP when you see the
G Warning! ESP warning lamp d flashing in the
If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system will instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
still function with full brake boost. However, follows:
Safety and security

the rear wheels could lock up during RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as
emergency braking situations, for example. possible.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
cause an accident.
pedal.
Adapt your driving style to the changed
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
driving characteristics.
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
ESP cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP cannot
prevent accidents resulting from excessive
G Observe Safety notes, see page 60. speed.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
operational as soon as the engine is running. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
It monitors the vehicles traction (force of Only conduct operational or performance
adhesive friction between the tires and the tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
road surface) and handling. tests are necessary, contact an authorized
The ESP recognizes that the vehicle deviates Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
from the direction of travel as intended by the otherwise seriously damage the brake
driver. By applying brakes to individual system or the transfer case which is not
wheels and by limiting the engine output, the covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
ESP works to stabilize the vehicle. The Warranty.
ESP is especially useful while driving off and
! Because the ESP operates
on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and automatically, the engine and ignition must
steering maneuvers. be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
The ESP warning lamp d in the button in position 0 or 1) when
instrument cluster comes on when you switch
Rthe parking brake is being tested on a
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
is running. brake test dynamometer
Rtowing the vehicle with the front or rear
The ESP warning lamp d in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP is axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
engaged. with 4MATIC)
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! The ESP will only function properly if you

use wheels of the recommended tire size
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 62
62 Driving safety systems
as specified in the Technical data section anymore. Otherwise the ESP will not
of this Operators Manual. stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid
or a wheel is spinning.
i The cruise control switches off
automatically when the ESP engages. When you switch off the ESP,
Safety and security
Rthe ESP does not stabilize the vehicle

Electronic Traction System
Rthe engine output is not limited, which
(ETS/4-ETS)
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
G Observe Safety notes, see page 60. into surfaces for better grip
The ETS (Electronic Traction System) and Rthe ETS/4-ETS will still apply the brakes to
4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction a spinning wheel
System, vehicles with 4MATIC only) are
components of the ESP. The ETS/4-ETS
Rthe ESP continues to operate when you
improves the vehicles ability to utilize are braking
available traction, especially under slippery Rthe cruise control cannot be activated
road conditions by applying the brakes to a Rthe cruise control switches off if activated
spinning wheel. Vehicles with 4MATIC also
transfer more power to the wheel(s) with i When the ESP is switched off and one or
traction. more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP
When you switch off the ESP, the warning lamp d in the instrument
ETS/4-ETS is still enabled. cluster flashes. However, the ESP will
then not stabilize the vehicle.
Switching off the ESP
G Warning!
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the
circumstances described below. Disabling
the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESP when a spare
wheel is mounted.
To improve the vehicles traction, switch off

the ESP. This allows the drive wheels to spin X With the engine running, press ESP
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for switch : until the ESP warning lamp
example d in the instrument cluster comes on.
Rwhen driving with snow chains The ESP is switched off.
Rin deep snow G Warning!
Rin sand or gravel When the ESP warning lamp d is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
G Warning! switched off or is not operational due to a
Switch on the ESP immediately if the malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
aforementioned circumstances do not apply driving maneuvers is reduced.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 63
Anti-theft systems 63
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing Anti-theft systems

road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an persons from starting your vehicle.
Safety and security

extended period with the ESP switched When leaving the vehicle, always take the
off. This may cause serious damage to the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
drivetrain which is not covered by the engine can be started by anyone with a valid
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
Switching on the ESP Activating

X Press ESP switch : until the ESP X With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey
warning lamp d in the instrument from the starter switch.
cluster goes out. X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
You are now again in normal driving mode open the drivers door.
with the ESP switched on.
Deactivating
ESP trailer stabilization X Switch on the ignition.
If the trailer you are towing should begin to i Starting the engine will also deactivate
sway, the rig can only be stabilized by
the immobilizer.
immediately applying the brakes hard.
Steering during this maneuver will not help to In the event that the engine cannot be
stabilize the rig. started (yet the vehicles battery is
charged), the system is not operational.
The ESP will assist you in such situations. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The ESP recognizes when the trailer starts Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
swaying.It will apply the brakes and limit USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
engine output and thus allow the vehicle-
trailer combination to stabilize.
The ESP trailer stabilization is functional at Anti-theft alarm system
vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
(65 km/h) when the ESP is switched on. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
G Warning! someone opens
The system will not be able to assist when the Ra door
trailer jackknifes Rthe tailgate
Rif the ESP has switched off due to a Rthe hood
malfunction
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
Ron wet or icy roads element, a door, for example, is closed
Ron roads with slippery surface immediately.
Rin sand or gravel The alarm system will also be triggered when
Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
over before the system recognizes swaying of key
the trailer. Ra door is opened from the inside
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 64
64 Anti-theft systems
To cancel the alarm after it has been i Unless you open a door or the tailgate
triggered, see Canceling the alarm within approximately 40 seconds after
(Y page 64). unlocking the vehicle:
i If the alarm stays on for more than RThe vehicle will be locked again.
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
Safety and security
call to the Customer Assistance Center rearmed.

automatically. The Tele Aid system will
initiate the call provided that
Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid Canceling the alarm
service
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
properly
X Press button % or & on the
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power SmartKey.
supply and GPS coverage are available
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of
the vehicle.
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the

SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash three times and
an acoustic warning sounds three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
system is armed.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times and the acoustic warning does not
sound three times, a door or the tailgate
may not be properly closed.
Close the respective element.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once and an
acoustic warning sounds once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 65
65
Vehicle equipment .............................. 66

Locking and unlocking ....................... 66
Starter switch positions ..................... 76
Seats .................................................... 78
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 82
Mirrors ................................................. 83
Memory function ................................. 86
Controls in detail
Lighting ................................................ 87
Wipers .................................................. 93
Power windows ................................... 95
Driving and parking ............................ 98
Automatic transmission ................... 103
Transfer case .................................... 108
Instrument cluster ............................ 108
Control system .................................. 110
Audio system .................................... 125
Driving systems ................................ 168
Climate control system .................... 177
Rear window defroster ..................... 184
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ...................................... 184
Loading and storing .......................... 187
Useful features ................................. 195
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 66
66 Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle

(Y page 299).
i This Operators Manual describes all X Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
features, standard or optional, potentially battery connections checked at an
available for your vehicle at the time of authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
purchase. Please be aware that your If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
vehicle might not be equipped with all Roadside Assistance or an authorized
features described in this manual. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking SmartKey

Notes Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
G Observe Safety notes, see page 53. removable mechanical key.
When unlocking or locking the vehicle with The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
Rthe doors
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If
you wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust Rthe tailgate
its signal volume, contact an authorized Rthe fuel filler flap
Mercedes-Benz Center.
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. An acoustic signal sounds
once, and the locking knobs in the doors
move up. The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. An acoustic signal sounds
three times, and the locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm
system is armed.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed. : & Lock button
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with ; F Unlock button for tailgate
the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey = % Unlock button
are discharged, the SmartKey is
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is i USA only:
drained. This device complies with Part 15 of the
X Check the batteries in the SmartKey FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
(Y page 69) and replace them if following two conditions:
necessary. 1. This device may not cause harmful
X Use the mechanical key to unlock the interference, and
drivers door (Y page 299). 2. this device must accept any
operation.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 67
Any unauthorized modification to this X Unlocking drivers door and fuel filler
device could void the users authority to flap: Press button % once.
operate the equipment. X Global unlocking: Press button %
twice.
i Canada only:
X Global locking: Press button &.
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
KEYLESS-GO
Controls in detail
and Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
2. this device must accept any with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
interference received, including with remote control and a removable
interference that may cause undesired mechanical key.
operation of the device. The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
Any unauthorized modification to this checked every time you grasp an outside door
device could void the users authority to handle.
When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle
unlocks
Factory setting
Rthe doors
X Global unlocking: Press button %.
Rthe tailgate
Unless you open a door or the tailgate within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking Rthe fuel filler flap
the vehicle:
i USA only:
RThe vehicle will be locked again. This device complies with Part 15 of the
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
rearmed. following two conditions:
X Global locking: Press button &. 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
Selective setting 2. this device must accept any
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish interference that may cause undesired
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing operation.
button % will then only unlock the drivers
door and the fuel filler flap.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons operate the equipment.
% and & simultaneously for
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 69) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 68
i Canada only: cannot be locked or the engine started via

This device complies with RSS-210 of the KEYLESS-GO system.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
the following two conditions: (e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with
1. This device may not cause interference, the SmartKey)
and - when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
2. this device must accept any stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
with the outside door handle the
Controls in detail

interference that may cause undesired message Key Not Detected appears in
operation of the device. the multifunction display
Any unauthorized modification to this - with the engine running, the red message
device could void the users authority to Key Not Detected appears in the
operate the equipment. multifunction display while driving off
Find the SmartKey or change its present
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO location immediately (e.g. place it on the
RYou
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
can also use the SmartKey with
pocket).
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(Y page 66). RIf you have started the engine with the
RYou
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
turn it off again by
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
with button &). button
RAlways carry the SmartKey with you. - inserting the SmartKey into the starter
switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
RNever store the SmartKey together with and the automatic transmission is in park
- electronic items such as a mobile phone position P
or another SmartKey
RThe vehicle could be inadvertently
- metallic objects such as coins or metal unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
foil of the vehicle and
Doing so could impair the function of the - an outside door handle is splashed with
KEYLESS-GO system. water
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey or
must be located outside the vehicle within - you attempt to clean an outside door
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
handle
tailgate.
RRemember that the engine can be started
RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more
than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
deactivated. Pull an outside door handle inside the vehicle.
and switch on the ignition once to activate Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
the KEYLESS-GO function. one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away If you leave the SmartKey behind when
from the vehicle, the system may no longer exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle appears in the multifunction display.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 69
Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle, X Unlocking drivers door and fuel filler
no SmartKey outside the vehicle): flap: Grasp the drivers outside door
When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, handle.
the message Key Detected in Vehicle X Global unlocking: Grasp any outside door
appears in the multifunction display. The handle other than the drivers outside door
vehicle will not be locked. handle.
X Global locking: Touch outside of a door
Factory setting handle :.
Controls in detail
X Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
handle.
Checking SmartKey batteries
Unless you open a door or the tailgate within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
rearmed.
X Press button & or % on the

SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
X Global locking: Touch outside of a door briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
handle :. are discharged.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 302).
Selective setting
i You can obtain the required batteries at
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
to reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping the
drivers outside door handle will then only i If the batteries are checked within signal
unlock the drivers door and the fuel filler flap. range of the vehicle, pressing button
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons & or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
% and & simultaneously for accordingly.
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 69) flashes twice.
Loss of the SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows:
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 70
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a door from the inside even
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
when it is locked unless it is secured with the
mechanical key to your car insurance
child safety lock (Y page 58).
company immediately.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
do so.
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
Controls in detail
glad to supply you with a replacement. For

information on replacing the SmartKey, see
Replacing the SmartKey (Y page 70).
Replacing the SmartKey

Only you, or someone authorized by you can
order a replacement key from any Mercedes-
Benz Center. In order to do so, the Mercedes-
Benz Center will require proof of identity and Example illustration drivers door
vehicle ownership with original documents, If the vehicle has previously been locked with
including the following: the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
If you are the current owner of the vehicle: a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
Rthe vehicles current state registration theft alarm system.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 64).
license X Front doors: Pull on inside door
handle ; on the respective front door.
If you are an authorized person:
If the door was locked, locking knob : will
Rthe vehicles current state registration move up.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
license for the authorized individual respective rear door to unlock door.
Rsigned and dated authorization from the X Pull on the inside door handle on the
owner of the vehicle for which the key is respective rear door.
being requested
i Duplicated or photocopied
documentation will not be accepted. Automatic central locking
The doors and the tailgate lock automatically
Activating the key when the vehicle is set into motion.
Once you, or an authorized person, has You can open a locked front door from the
provided the appropriate documents, the inside. Open door only when conditions are
Mercedes-Benz Center will need to safe to do so.
synchronize the key to your vehicle before it The doors are designed to unlock
can be used. In order to do so, the Mercedes- automatically after an accident if the force of
Benz Center need access to your vehicle. the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 71
turning at a vehicle speed of above 9 mph

(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is
on a test stand.
Controls in detail
X Locking: Close the front passenger door.
X Press central locking switch ;.
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
switch :.
X Switching off: Press and hold central
unlocking switch : until an acoustic signal You can open a locked front door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions are
sounds.
safe to do so.
X Switching on: Press and hold central
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
locking switch ; until an acoustic signal
central locking switch
sounds.
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
i If you press and hold either switch and no the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
acoustic signal sounds, the respective front door is opened from the inside
setting has already been selected. Rand the SmartKey is set to selective
i You can also switch on or off the settings, only the front door opened from
automatic central locking using the control the inside is unlocked
system (Y page 124). If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will not
unlock using the central unlocking switch.
Locking and unlocking from the inside
G Observe Safety notes, see page 53. Tailgate
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the
inside using the central locking or unlocking G Warning!
switch. This can be useful, for example, if you Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
want to lock the vehicle before starting to engine is running and while driving. Among
drive. other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
The central locking or unlocking switch does gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. unconsciousness and death.
! The tailgate swings up and beyond the

rear bumper when opening. Therefore,
make sure there is sufficient clearance
above and behind the vehicle.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 72
A minimum height clearance of 6.90 ft X Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on

(2.10 m) is required to open the tailgate. handles :.
X Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it.
Opening the tailgate from the outside Once the tailgate touches the latch, the
tailgate will pull itself shut automatically.
Power tailgate
Controls in detail
G Warning!
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
X Pull on handle :.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
make sure there is sufficient clearance
X Pull tailgate upwards to open. above and behind the vehicle.
A minimum height clearance of 6.90 ft
Closing the tailgate from the outside (2.10 m) is required to open the tailgate.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 53. In vehicles with power tailgate, you can
Ropen and close the tailgate from the inside
G Warning!
and the outside electrically
To prevent possible personal injury, always
Rlimit the opening height of the tailgate
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
compartment opening when closing the Rinterrupt the opening/closing procedure at
tailgate. Be especially careful when small any time by
children are around. - pressing or pulling the door-mounted
remote tailgate opening/closing switch
- pulling the outside handle on the tailgate
- pressing the tailgate closing switch
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO locking/
closing switch
Notes for operating the tailgate with the
SmartKey:
You can also open, close, and stop the
tailgate by pressing button F on the
SmartKey.
The prerequisites for this are:
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 73
RNo SmartKey is inserted in the starter Do not leave the SmartKey in the vehicle. You
switch. may lock yourself out.
RKEYLESS-GO: The vehicles on-board If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
electronics must have status 0 with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the
(Y page 76). tailgate will lock automatically when it is
closed. The turn signal lamps flash three
times to confirm locking.
Opening the tailgate from the outside
Controls in detail
You can unlock and open the tailgate
simultaneously from the outside when the
vehicle is stationary.
X Press and hold button F on the
SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and
begins to open.
An acoustic warning sounds when the
tailgate begins to open.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Pull on the
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
handle (Y page 72).
X Press tailgate closing switch : or press
Closing the tailgate from the outside and hold button F on the SmartKey until
the tailgate begins to close.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 53. If the tailgate comes into contact with an
G Warning! object while closing, the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
make sure no one is in danger of being
example.
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
cargo compartment opening when closing the Closing the tailgate and locking the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
children are around. To stop the closing KEYLESS-GO)
procedure, do one of the following: G Observe Safety notes, see page 53.
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
closing switch on the drivers door. G Warning!
RPress the tailgate closing switch.
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
switch. always keep hands and fingers away from the
RPull outside handle on the tailgate. cargo compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
children are around. To stop the closing
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make procedure, do one of the following:
sure the vehicles on-board electronics
have status 0): Press button F on the
SmartKey.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 74
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/ The closing process is stopped if the system
closing switch on the drivers door. cannot recognize a SmartKey with KEYLESS-
RPress
GO anymore. Make sure the SmartKey with
the tailgate closing switch.
KEYLESS-GO is within approximately 3 ft
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing (1 m) of the tailgate. Repeat the closing
switch. procedure if necessary.
RPull outside handle on the tailgate. The tailgate remains unlocked when a
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized
Controls in detail
inside the vehicle to prevent a possible

switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
inadvertent lockout. In this case, the turn
sure the vehicles on-board electronics
signals will not flash and the anti-theft alarm
have status 0): Press button F on the
will be triggered when the tailgate is opened.
SmartKey.
You can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle Opening/closing the tailgate from the
simultaneously from the outside using the inside
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
Opening
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
Monitor the opening procedure carefully to
injured.
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
X Make sure you have the SmartKey with you. When the SmartKey is not inserted in the
X Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
switch : briefly. Make sure the vehicles on-board electronics
The tailgate closes. have status 0): Press button F on the
Once the tailgate and all doors are closed: SmartKey.
RThe vehicle locks.
You can unlock and open the tailgate
RThe turn signals flash three times to simultaneously from the drivers seat when
confirm locking. the vehicle is stationary.
RThe locking knobs in the doors move
down.
RThe anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing, the closing procedure is
example.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 75
Limiting opening height of tailgate

You can limit the opening height of the
tailgate. The tailgate can be set to stop at a
point that is between half open and
approximately 8 in (20 cm) before fully open.
This can be useful, for example, when the
space above the tailgate is not sufficient.
Controls in detail
! Make sure there is sufficient space to
open the tailgate when limiting the opening
height. Otherwise the tailgate could be
X Pull remote tailgate opening/closing damaged. To avoid damage, limit the
switch : until the tailgate begins to open. opening height outdoors.
An acoustic warning sounds when the
Activating
tailgate begins to open.
X Open the tailgate: Pull on handle
Closing (Y page 72) or press and hold button
G Observe Safety notes, see page 53. F on the SmartKey until the tailgate
opens.
G Warning! X Stop opening procedure: When the
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of tailgate is in the desired position, press
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with tailgate closing switch (Y page 73) or pull
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch. on handle once more.
X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
injured. in the tailgate (Y page 73) until you hear a
short acoustic signal.
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or
The opening height of the tailgate is limited.
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
The tailgate will now stop at the stored
If the tailgate comes into contact with an position when opened.
object while closing, the closing procedure is
i Pull on the tailgate handle once more
after the tailgate has stopped automatically
to open the tailgate completely. The limited
example.
opening height remains stored.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2. Deactivating
X Press remote tailgate opening/closing X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
switch : until the tailgate begins to close. in the tailgate (Y page 73) until you hear
An acoustic warning sounds when the two short, consecutive acoustic signals.
tailgate begins to close.
X Interrupting the closing procedure:
Press or pull remote tailgate opening/
closing switch :.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 76
76 Starter switch positions
Starter switch positions X Always remove the SmartKey from the

starter switch when the engine is not in
SmartKey operation.
This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle
battery discharge or a completely
discharged vehicle battery.
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be
Controls in detail
sufficiently charged.
X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if
necessary (Y page 319).
or
X Get a jump start (Y page 319).
i If the SmartKey does not belong to the

Starter switch vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the
g For removing SmartKey (gear selector starter switch. However, the ignition does
lever must be in park position P) not switch on and the engine does not start.
1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, e.g. wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical KEYLESS-GO
consumers) and driving position G Observe Safety notes, see page 53.
3 Starting position
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
the instrument cluster come on. The low- integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beam removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be
indicator lamps, and the indicator lamps for inserted in the starter switch and the
the fog lamps will only come on if activated. SmartKey present in the vehicle.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
come on when the ignition is switched on, without depressing the brake pedal
have it checked and replaced if necessary. If corresponds to the various starter switch
a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on positions (Y page 76).
after starting the engine or comes on while
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
driving, refer to Lamps in instrument cluster
with the brake pedal firmly depressed will
(Y page 288).
start the engine (Y page 98).
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
pulled out of the starter switch easily. You can
can no longer be turned in the starter switch.
then insert the SmartKey into the starter
In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
switch.
remove SmartKey from the starter switch and
reinsert. i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
The steering is locked when the SmartKey is not need to be removed from the starter
removed from the starter switch. switch when you leave the vehicle.
However, always take the SmartKey with
you when you leave the vehicle. As long as
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 77
Starter switch positions 77
the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicles Position 0

electrical systems can be switched on or
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
the engine can be started using the
button, the vehicles on-board electronics
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
Position 1
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Controls in detail
once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, e.g. wipers.
i When you now open the drivers door, the
power supply is switched off.
Ignition (or position 2)

: KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
; Starter switch X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
twice.
X Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button This supplies power for all electrical
into the starter switch (if not inserted consumers.
already). When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
i Allow for 2 seconds until the system has in the instrument cluster come on. The low-
detected the KEYLESS-GO start/stop beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beam
button. headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal
indicator lamps, and the indicator lamps for
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in the fog lamps will only come on if activated.
park position P. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
X Do not depress the brake pedal. come on when the ignition is switched on,
have it checked and replaced if necessary.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains
on after starting the engine or comes on
while driving, refer to Lamps in instrument
cluster (Y page 288).
i When you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once and the drivers
door is open, the power supply is switched
off.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

= USA only
? Canada only
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 78
78 Seats
Seats RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as

close to the head as possible. The center of
Safety notes the head restraint must support the back of
G Warning! the head at eye level.
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle RNever place hands under the seat or near
control the following must be done before the any moving parts while a seat is being
vehicle is put into motion: adjusted.
Controls in detail
Rseat adjustment Failure to do so could result in an accident

Rhead
and/or serious personal injury.
restraint adjustment
Rsteering wheel adjustment G Warning!
Rrear view mirror adjustment The power seats can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
Rfastening of seat belts
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A childs unsupervised access to a
G Warning! vehicle could result in an accident and/or
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. serious personal injury.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. G Warning!
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat According to accident statistics, children are
backrest in an excessively reclined position as safer when properly restrained in the rear
this can be dangerous. You could slide under seating positions than in the front seating
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
it, the seat belt would apply force at the children be placed in the rear seats whenever
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious possible. Regardless of seating position,
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat children 12 years old and under must be
belts provide the best restraint when the seated and properly secured in an
wearer is in a position that is as upright as appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
possible and seat belts are properly restraint, or booster seat recommended for
positioned on the body. the size and weight of the child. For additional
information, see Children in the vehicle.
G Warning! A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can significantly increased if the child restraints
correctly fasten your seat belt. are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
Observe the following points: or the child is not properly secured in the child
RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are restraint.
slightly angled when holding the steering
wheel. G Warning!
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating positioned head restraints.
position that still allows you to reach the
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
to the head as possible and the center of the
position should be as far back as possible
head restraint supports the back of the head
with the driver still able to operate the
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
controls properly.
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 79
Seats 79
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head

restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
Seat adjustment
! When moving the seats, make sure there
Controls in detail
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and/or the items.
Vehicles without memory function
Power seats
The seat adjustment switch is located on the
entry side of each front seat base. The seat
adjustment switches for vehicles with
memory function are located on the front
doors.
i Vehicles without memory function:
The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes
after either front door has been opened.
The counter resets each time
Ryou
Vehicles with memory function
open or close a front door
Ryou X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch switch forward or backward in direction of
arrow =.
Ryou remove the SmartKey from the
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
starter switch
forward or backward in direction of
Ryou switch the ignition on or off arrow ?.
Just like in vehicles with memory function, X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
the power seats can be operated at any in direction of arrow ;.
time when the ignition is switched on. X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or
i Vehicles with memory function: down in direction of arrow : until your

upper legs are lightly supported.
The memory function (Y page 86) lets you
X Head restraint height (vehicles with
store the settings for the seat position
together with the settings for the steering memory function): Press the switch up or
wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors. down in direction of arrow A.
Head restraint height adjustment,

manual
This feature is only available in vehicles
without memory function.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 80
80 Seats
Vehicles without memory function

Controls in detail
X Raising: Adjust the height of the head

restraint by pulling it upward.
X Move adjustment lever : in direction of
X Lowering: Press release button : and
the arrows until you have reached a
push down on the head restraint. comfortable seating position.
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
Vehicles with memory function
X Push or pull on the lower edge of the head

restraint cushion to the desired position. X Curvature position: Use button : to
move the curvature up and button = to
move it down.
Lumbar support X Degree of curvature: Use button ; to
You can adjust the contour of the front seats lessen the curvature and button ? to
lumbar support to help enhance support to increase it.
your spine.
Rear seat head restraints

G Warning!
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the back
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 81
Seats 81
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the X Adjust the head restraint to the desired
potential for injury to the head and neck in the position by pushing or pulling on the upper
event of an accident or similar situation. edge of the head restraint cushion.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the Rear seat head restraints, removing
lowest non-use position and have the and installing
occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
Controls in detail
restraints installed when the rear seats are
occupied. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
Rear seat head restraint height

adjustment
X Removing: Pull the head restraint to its

uppermost position.
X Press release button : and pull out the
head restraint.
X Installing: Insert the head restraint into
openings on the seat backrest.
X Push the head restraint down until it
audibly engages.
X Raising: Pull head restraint upward to the X Press release button : and adjust the
desired position.
head restraint to the desired position.
X Lowering: Press release button : and
push down on head restraint.
Seat heating
Rear seat head restraint fore and aft
adjustment
The red indicator lamps in seat heating

switch : come on to show which heating
level you have selected.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 82
82 Multifunction steering wheel
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high) Make sure

to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes. Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level arms slightly bent at the elbows
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes. Ryou can move your legs freely
After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the
Rall displays (including malfunction and
seat heating switches off automatically.
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
X Switch on the ignition.
are clearly visible
Controls in detail
X Switching on: Press seat heating

switch :.
Three red indicator lamps in seat heating Steering wheel adjustment, manual
switch : come on.
X Press seat heating switch : repeatedly
until the desired seat heating level is set.
X Switching off: Press seat heating
switch : repeatedly until all indicator
lamps go out.
If there is insufficient voltage the seat heating
switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
X Unlocking: Pull release handle : out to
its stop limit.
Multifunction steering wheel X Move steering wheel to the desired
position.
Safety notes
X Locking: Push release handle : all the
G Warning! way up until it engages.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. X Make sure the steering wheel is securely
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or locked by trying to move it up and down as
driving without the steering wheel adjustment well as in and out before driving off.
feature locked could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment Steering wheel adjustment, electrical
feature can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A childs unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 83
Mirrors 83
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down: the position is stored in memory

Move stalk in direction of arrows :. (Y page 87).
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
stalk in direction of arrows ;. the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
i The memory function (Y page 86) lets The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
you store the settings for the steering you open the drivers door with the SmartKey
wheel together with the settings for the in starter switch position 0 or 1.
Controls in detail
seat position and the exterior rear view
mirrors. i When the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
steering wheel will no longer be able to
Easy-entry/exit feature move upward when the easy-entry/exit
feature is activated.
This feature allows the driver an easier entry
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering The adjustment procedure is briefly
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is interrupted when the engine is started.
in its uppermost position. G Warning!
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated Let the system complete the adjustment
or deactivated in the Convenience submenu procedure before setting the vehicle in
of the control system (Y page 124). motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
G Warning!
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
You must make sure no one can become still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
trapped or injured by the moving steering control of the vehicle.
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
Crash-responsive exit aid
To stop steering wheel movement, move
steering wheel adjustment stalk or press one When you open the drivers door after an
of the memory position buttons. accident has occurred, the steering column
Do not leave children unattended in the moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. starter switch is insignificant. This function
Children could open the drivers door and facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit occupants.
feature, which could result in an accident The crash-responsive exit aid can only be
and/or serious personal injury. triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated via the control system.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the drivers door with Mirrors
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when Notes
you insert the SmartKey into the starter Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
switch. mirrors before driving so that you have a good
i The last set steering wheel position is view of the road and traffic conditions.
stored when the ignition is switched off or
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 84
84 Mirrors
Interior rear view mirror X Switch on the ignition.

X Press button : for the drivers side
X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually. exterior rear view mirror or button ; for
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare The indicator lamp in the respective button
position comes on.
If you do not make adjustments to the
Controls in detail
selected exterior rear view mirror within

15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
You will then have to select the desired
exterior rear view mirror again before
adjustments can be made. Adjustments
can only be made with the indicator lamp
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
button illuminated.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.
X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by
moving lever : towards the windshield. ! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed. hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
Exterior rear view mirrors i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

rear view mirrors will be heated
G Warning! automatically.
Exercise care when using the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are The exterior rear view mirror on the drivers
closer than they appear. Check your interior side and the interior rear view mirror will
rear view mirror and glance over your respond automatically to glare when the
shoulder before changing lanes. ignition is switched on and incoming light
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the
interior rear view mirror.
The rear view mirrors will not react if the
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear
R or the interior lighting is switched on.
G Warning!
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors
in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the drivers side do not
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 85
Mirrors 85
react, for example, when transporting cargo X Switch on the ignition.

which covers the rear window. X Press button ;, to select the passenger-
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles side exterior rear view mirror.
(incident light) could blind you. As a result, X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
you may not be able to observe traffic view mirror with adjustment button = so
conditions and could cause an accident. that you see the rear wheel and the road
curb.
X Press memory button M ? and within
Controls in detail
Exterior rear view mirror parking 3 seconds, press one of the arrows of
position adjustment button =.
To assist during parking maneuvers, you can The parking position is stored if the exterior
set the passenger-side exterior rear view rear view mirror does not move.
mirror so that you can see the rear wheel and
i If the exterior rear view mirror does move,
the road curb.
repeat the above steps. After the setting is
stored, you can move the exterior rear view
Setting and storing the parking position mirror again.
Calling up the parking position

X Press button ;, to select the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror moves to the stored parking
position.
X Switch on the ignition. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
X Press button ;, to select the passenger-
returns to its previously stored driving
position
side exterior rear view mirror.
R10 seconds after you have put the gear
reverse gear R. selector lever out of reverse gear R
The passenger-side exterior rear view Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a
mirror moves to the preset parking speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
position. Rimmediately when you press button : to
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
select the drivers side exterior rear view
view mirror with adjustment button = so mirror
that you see the rear wheel and the road
curb.
The exterior rear view mirror parking Power-folding exterior rear view
position is stored. mirrors
Vehicles with memory function: You can also
store the parking position using the memory This feature is only available in Canada
button M ?: vehicles.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 86
86 Memory function
! Before you drive the vehicle through an X Folding in: Briefly press button :.
automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
view mirrors. Otherwise they may get
damaged. i At speeds above approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h), you will not be able to fold the
Folding in and out automatically exterior mirrors in.
X Folding out: Briefly press button :.
The function must be activated in the
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
Convenience submenu (Y page 124).
Controls in detail
The exterior rear view mirrors fold in ! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
automatically as soon as the vehicle is locked forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear),
from the outside. reposition it manually by applying firm
The exterior rear view mirrors fold out pressure until it snaps back into place.
automatically as soon as the vehicle is If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
unlocked and the drivers or front passenger forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the
door is subsequently opened. front), press button : to fold mirrors in.
Then press button : again to fold mirrors
Resetting the automatic exterior rear out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
view mirror fold-in function may damage the adjustment mechanism.
You need to reset the automatic exterior rear The mirror housing is then properly
view mirror fold-in function whenever the positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
battery was disconnected or discharged. the usual manner.
Memory function
Notes
With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations per front
seat.
Each memory position button on the drivers
side can store all of the following settings:
RSeat position
X Switch on the ignition. RSteering wheel position
X Briefly press button :. RExterior rear view mirrors position
i You need to manually fold in the mirrors G Warning!
once, so that the automatic fold-in function
Do not activate the memory function while
will work, see Setting fold-in function for
driving. Activating the memory function while
exterior rear view mirrors (Y page 124).
driving could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
Folding in and out manually
Each memory position button on the front
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
passenger side can store the setting of the
they are not folded out completely.
seat position.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 87
Lighting 87
Relevant information can be obtained at

any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon

headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase
usable illumination over conventional
headlamps because they follow the
Controls in detail
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to
either side according to the vehicles
steering angle and speed.
Storing positions into memory
X Adjust the seats. Exterior lamp switch
X On the drivers side, also adjust the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button M once and within
3 seconds press memory position button
1, 2 or 3.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
1 W Standing lamps, left

Recalling positions from memory
2 X Standing lamps, right
X Press and hold desired memory position 3 $ Off
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved Daytime running lamp mode
to the stored position completely. On the
4 c Automatic headlamp mode
drivers side, also wait for the steering
Daytime running lamp mode
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to
5 T Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
move to the stored position.
license plate lamps, side marker
i Releasing the memory position button lamps and instrument panel lamps)
stops movement to the stored positions 6 L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
immediately. headlamps
7 N Front fog lamps
8 R Rear fog lamp
Lighting
Notes i The exterior lamps (except standing
lamps or parking lamps) go out
i If you drive in countries with left-hand automatically when you remove the
driving, you must have the headlamps SmartKey from the starter switch or open
modified for symmetrical low beams. the drivers door with the ignition switched
off.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 88
88 Lighting
When the parking lamps or the rear fog RLicense plate lamps
lamp are switched on and you remove the RSide marker lamps
SmartKey from the starter switch and open
the drivers door, an acoustic signal G Warning!
sounds. If the exterior lamp switch is set to c, the
In addition the message Switch Off headlamps will not automatically come on
Lights appears in the multifunction under foggy conditions.
display. To minimize risk to you and to others, activate
Controls in detail
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to
lamp manually. L when driving or when traffic and/or
ambient lighting conditions require you to do
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps so.
when leaving the vehicle may result in a
In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch
discharged battery.
from position c to L with the vehicle
at a standstill in a safe location. Switching
Low-beam headlamps from c to L will briefly switch off the
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
and off with the exterior lamp switch. ambient lighting conditions may result in an
X Switch on the ignition. accident.
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
switch to position L. to the driver. The driver is responsible for the
The following lamps come on: operation of the vehicles lights at all times.
RLow-beam headlamps
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
RTail lamps switch to position c.
RParking lamps The following lamps come on and go out
RLicense plate lamps depending on the brightness of the ambient
light with the SmartKey in starter switch
RSide marker lamps position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
RInstrument panel lamps button pressed once:
RGreen indicator lamp L in the RTail lamps
instrument cluster RParking lamps
X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp RLicense plate lamps
switch to position $. RSide marker lamps
When the engine is running, the low-beam
Automatic headlamp mode
headlamps will also come on and turn off
The following lamps come on and go out automatically.
automatically depending on the brightness of Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only
the ambient light: available in low ambient lighting conditions.
RLow-beam headlamps
RTail lamps Daytime running lamp mode
RParking lamps In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 89
Lighting 89
In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
is deactivated by default. When the engine is running, and you turn the
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode exterior lamp switch to position T or
using the control system, see Switching L, the manual headlamp mode has
daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
only) (Y page 122). The corresponding exterior lamps come on
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position (Y page 87).
$ or c.
Controls in detail
When the engine is running, the low-beam Fog lamps
headlamps come on.
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
In low ambient lighting conditions, the exterior lamp switch in position c.
following lamps will come on additionally:
RTail lamps G Warning!
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
RParking lamps only switch from position c to L with
RLicense plate lamps the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
RSide marker lamps Switching from c to L will briefly
With the daytime running lamp mode switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
activated and the engine running, you cannot driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually. result in an accident.
Canada only Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps
and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
You can only switch on the high-beam
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
The high-beam flasher is available at all times. Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
When the engine is running, and you regarding permissible lamp operation.
Rshift from a driving position to park X Switch on the ignition.
position P with the vehicle at a standstill, X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
the low-beam headlamps will go out with a T or L (Y page 87).
delay of 3 minutes X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position exterior lamp switch to first stop.
T, the low-beam headlamps, the tail The green indicator lamp N in the
and parking lamps, the license plate lamps instrument cluster comes on.
and the side marker lamps come on X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position exterior lamp switch to second stop.
L, the manual headlamp mode has The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
priority over the daytime running lamp green N and the yellow indicator lamp
mode R in the instrument cluster come on.
The corresponding exterior lamps come on X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
(Y page 87). lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
its stop.
USA only
You can only switch on the high-beam
headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 90
90 Lighting
Locator lighting i Also note the information on high-beam

headlamps with activated automatic
The locator lighting is described in the
headlamp mode (Y page 88) or the daytime
Control system section, see Switching
running lamp mode (Y page 88).
locator lighting on or off (Y page 122).
High-beam flasher
Combination switch X Switching on: Pull the combination switch
briefly in direction of arrow =.
Controls in detail
Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher can be switched
on at all times, even with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch.
The hazard warning flasher comes on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
Turn signals
X Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp ! or # in the instrument
cluster flashes.
The combination switch resets automatically
after major steering wheel movements.
To signal minor directional changes: X Switching on: Press hazard warning
X Press the combination switch only to the flasher switch :.
point of resistance in direction of All turn signal lamps are flashing.
arrow ; or ? and release.
The corresponding turn signal lamps will i With the hazard warning flasher activated
flash three times. and the combination switch set for either
left or right turn, only the respective left or
right turn signals will operate when the
High beam ignition is switched on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position X Switching off: Press hazard warning
L (Y page 87). flasher switch : again.
X Switching on: Push the combination
switch in direction of arrow :. i If the hazard warning flasher has been
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp activated automatically, press hazard
K in the instrument cluster comes on. warning flasher switch : to switch it off.
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
in direction of arrow = to its original
position.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 91
Lighting 91
Headlamp cleaning system illuminating lamp comes on on the side of

the turn signal.
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-
or
pressure water jet automatically when the
X Turn steering wheel in desired direction.
engine is running and you have
Driving forward: The corner-illuminating
Rswitched on the headlamps lamp on the side of your steering direction
and comes on.
Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the Driving in reverse: The corner-illuminating
Controls in detail
windshield with washer fluid for the first lamp opposite to your steering direction
time comes on.
The headlamps are cleaned every tenth time The corner-illuminating lamps will come on
the windshield is washed with washer fluid. automatically depending on the steering
The counter resets when you switch off the angle, even if you did not switch on either turn
ignition. signal. If the corner-illuminating lamps came
on automatically, they will also go out
For information on filling up the washer
automatically depending on the steering
reservoir, see Washer system and headlamp
angle and vehicle speed.
cleaning system (Y page 217).
The corner-illuminating lamps temporarily
come on on both sides of the vehicle if you
Corner-illuminating lamps turn the steering wheel in one direction and
then again in the other direction shortly
The corner-illuminating lamps improve thereafter.
illumination of the area in the direction into The corner-illuminating lamp remains lit for a
which you are turning. short time only. It then goes out
The corner-illuminating lamps will only automatically.
operate in low ambient lighting conditions.
If you are driving faster than 25 mph Switching off
(40 km/h) the corner-illuminating function is
X Switch off the left or right turn signal.
not available.
or
Switching on X Steer straight ahead.
The corner-illuminating lamp goes out.
X Make sure the engine is running.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position i There may be a brief delay before the
L or c (Y page 87). corner-illuminating lamps go out.
or
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
(Y page 88).
X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
depending on whether you are turning left
or right.
The respective corner-illuminating lamp
comes on. If you have switched on the turn
signal for one side but turn the steering
wheel in the other direction, the corner-
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 92
92 Lighting
Interior lighting in the front Manual control

! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
Controls in detail
X Switching front interior lighting on/

off: Press switch c.
X Switching rear interior lighting on/off:
Press switch v.
X Switching front reading lamps on/off:
Press respective button p.
Emergency lighting
: v Rear interior lighting on/off
When the interior lighting is set to automatic
; ~ Automatic control on/off mode, the interior lighting comes on
= p Right front reading lamp on/off automatically if the vehicle is involved in an
? c Front interior lighting on/off accident.
A p Left front reading lamp on/off Switching off:
B Front reading lamps X Press hazard warning flasher switch
C Front interior lighting (Y page 90).
or
Automatic control X Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
X Activating: Press button ~.
Button ~ disengages and sits flush with
Interior lighting in the rear
the other buttons.
The interior lighting comes on, when you ! An interior lamp switched on manually
Runlock the vehicle does not go out automatically.
Rremove the SmartKey from the starter Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
switch (Interior Lighting Delay: extended period of time with the engine
must be switched on (Y page 123)) turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
Ropen a door
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps

go out automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
X Deactivating: Press button ~.
Button ~ engages.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 93
Wipers 93
Switching on/off
Controls in detail
: p Right rear reading lamp on/off
; p Left rear reading lamp on/off Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wipers off
2 Slow intermittent wiping5
Wipers
3 Fast intermittent wiping6
Notes
4 Slow continuous wiping
! Do not operate the wipers when the 5 Fast continuous wiping
windshield/rear window is dry. Dust that B Single wipe/ Wiping with
accumulates on a windshield/rear window washer fluid
might scratch the glass and/or damage the
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry X Switch on the ignition.
windshield/rear window. If it is necessary X Turn the combination switch to the desired
to operate the wipers in dry weather position, depending on the intensity of the
conditions, always operate the wipers with rain.
washer fluid.
i When the windshield wipers are switched
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on on and you stop the vehicle, the wipers
the windshield after the car has been driven operate more slowly.
through an automatic car wash, then wax
or other residue is on the windshield. Intermittent wiping
Shortly after washing the car in an
automatic car wash, clean the windshield Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
with washer fluid. weather conditions or in the presence of
precipitation.
! Vehicles with rain sensor: Do not leave
Windshield wipers windshield wipers on an intermittent
X Observe notes on page (Y page 93). setting when the vehicle is taken to an
automatic car wash or during windshield
cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in
the presence of water sprayed on the
windshield, and windshield wipers may be
damaged as a result.
5 Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.

6 Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 94
94 Wipers
! Vehicles with rain sensor: If you have set washer fluid every now and then even when
intermittent wiping, dirt on the surface of it is raining.
the rain sensor or optical effects may cause For information on filling up the washer
the windshield wipers to wipe in an reservoir, see Washer system and headlamp
undesired fashion. This could then damage cleaning system (Y page 217).
the windshield wiper blades or scratch the For information on cleaning the headlamps
windshield. You should therefore switch off with washer fluid, see Headlamp cleaning
the windshield wipers when weather system (Y page 91).
Controls in detail
conditions are dry.

Vehicles with rain sensor: Intermittent wiping
interval is dependent on the wetness of the Rear window wiper/washer
windshield. After the initial wipe, pauses X Observe notes on page (Y page 93).
between wipes are controlled by the rain
sensor automatically. The rear window wiper engages automatically
when the automatic transmission is shifted
X Turn the combination switch to position
into reverse gear R with the windshield wipers
or . switched on.
Intermittent wiping starts with selected
wiping interval.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or
out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
doors are closed and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
position D or reverse gear R
or
Combination switch
Rthe wiper setting is changed using the
: Rear window wiper switch
combination switch
2 Wiping rear window with washer
fluid
Single wipe
3 I Intermittent wiping
X Press the combination switch briefly in 4 0 Rear window wiper off
direction of arrow B to the resistance
5 Wiping rear window with washer
point.
fluid
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid. X Switch on the ignition.
X Turn rear window wiper switch : to the
Wiping with washer fluid desired position.
X Press the combination switch in direction A rear window wiper indicator appears in the
of arrow B past the resistance point. multifunction display when the rear window
The windshield wipers operate with washer wiper is activated.
fluid. For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see Washer system and headlamp
i To prevent smears on the windshield or cleaning system (Y page 217).
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 95
Power windows 95
Problems with wipers G Observe Safety notes, see page 53.

! If anything blocks the wipers (leaves, G Warning!
snow, etc.), switch them off immediately. When opening or closing the door windows,
For safety reasons, do the following before make sure there is no danger of anyone being
attempting to remove any blockage: harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
RStop the vehicle in a safe location. The door windows are equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
RRemove the SmartKey from the starter
Controls in detail
function. If in express operation mode a door
switch. window encounters an obstruction that
or blocks its path, the automatic reversal
RTurn off the engine by pressing the function will stop the door window and open
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and it slightly.
open the drivers door (with the drivers The door windows operate differently when
door open, starter switch is in position the switch is pulled and held. See the Closing
0, same as with SmartKey removed from when a door window is blocked section in
starter switch). this chapter for details.
REngage the parking brake. The closing of the door windows can be
RRemove
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
blockage.
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
RTurn the wipers on again. point and released, by either pressing or
If the windshield wipers fail to function at pulling the respective switch.
all with the combination switch in position If a door window encounters an obstruction
or , that blocks its path in a circumstance where
Rset
you are closing the door windows by pressing
the combination switch to the next
and holding button & on the SmartKey the
higher wiper speed
automatic reversal function will not operate.
Rhave the windshield wipers checked at Activate the override switch when children
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
Center children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window
opening.
Power windows
G Warning!
Opening and closing
Do not keep any part of your body up against
The door windows are opened and closed the window pane when opening a window. The
electrically. The switches for all door windows downward motion of the pane may pull that
are located on the drivers door control panel. part of your body down between the window
The switches for the respective door windows pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
are located on the front passenger door and there is a risk of entrapment, release the
on the rear doors. switch and pull it to close the window.
i Operating the rear door windows from
the rear is not possible when you activate i You can also open or close the door
the override switch (Y page 58). windows using the SmartKey, see
Summer opening feature (Y page 97)
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 96
96 Power windows
and Convenience closing feature If the upward movement of a door window is

(Y page 97). blocked during the closing procedure, the
door window will stop and open slightly.
i After switching off the ignition or
X Immediately after the door window has
removing the SmartKey from the starter
stopped because it was blocked, pull and
switch, you can operate the door windows
hold the respective switch upward until the
until you open the drivers or front
door window is fully closed.
passenger door. If no door was opened you
The door window closes with greater force.
Controls in detail
can operate the door windows for up to

5 minutes. If the door window is blocked again and opens
slightly:
X Immediately after the door window was
blocked, pull and hold the respective
switch upward until the door window is fully
closed.
The door window closes without automatic
reversal function.
G Warning!
Pulling and holding the switch to close the
door window immediately after it had been
blocked two times will cause the door window
X Switch on the ignition. to close without any reversal function for as
X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold long as you hold the switch.
switch : to ? to the resistance point.
The corresponding door window moves
downward or upward until you release the Synchronizing power windows
switch.
The door windows must be synchronized if
X Express operation: Press or pull they cannot be fully closed (express
switch : to ? past the resistance point operation).
and release. Each door window must be synchronized
The corresponding door window opens or separately.
closes completely.
X Close all doors.
X Stopping during express operation:
Press or pull the respective switch again.
X Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ?
(Y page 95) until the respective door
Closing when a door window is blocked
window is closed.
G Warning! The door window opens again slightly.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped X Pull and hold the respective switch once
and be seriously or even fatally injured when more immediately until the door window is
closing a door window with greater force or closed completely.
without automatic reversal function. X Hold the respective switch for
approximately 1 second.
The door window is synchronized.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 97
Power windows 97
Summer opening feature When roller sunblinds are retracted:

X Press and hold button % on the
When the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by SmartKey.
simultaneously The vehicle unlocks.
Ropening the door windows The windows and the tilt/sliding panel
opens after approximately 1 second.
Ropening the panorama roof with power tilt/
X Release button % on the SmartKey to
sliding panel and roller sunblinds
Controls in detail
interrupt the opening procedure.
The summer opening feature can only be
activated via the remote control of the
SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close Convenience closing feature
proximity to the drivers outside door handle.
When locking the vehicle, you can
X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
simultaneously close the door windows and
the drivers outside door handle.
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel.
Vehicles without panorama roof with Afterward, you can extend the roller
power tilt/sliding panel sunblinds of the panorama roof with power
X Press and hold button % on the tilt/sliding panel.
SmartKey until the windows have reached G Warning!
the desired position.
When closing the door windows and the
The vehicle unlocks. panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel,
X Release button % on the SmartKey to make sure there is no danger of anyone being
interrupt the opening procedure. harmed by the closing procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
Vehicles with panorama roof with RRelease button & to stop the closing
power tilt/sliding panel procedure. To open, press and hold button
When roller sunblinds are extended: %. To continue the closing procedure
X Press and hold button % on the after making sure that there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the closing
SmartKey.
procedure, press and hold button &.
The vehicle unlocks.
The windows open and the roller sunblinds
begin to retract after approximately With SmartKey
1 second. The SmartKey must be in close proximity to
X With the windows opened and the roller the drivers outside door handle.
sunblinds fully retracted, press and hold X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
button % on the SmartKey again. drivers outside door handle.
The tilt/sliding panel opens.
X Press and hold button & on the
X Release button % on the SmartKey to
SmartKey until the door windows and the
interrupt the opening procedure. panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel are closed completely.
X Release button & on the SmartKey to
interrupt the closing procedure.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 98
98 Driving and parking
X Vehicles with panorama roof with Driving and parking

power tilt/sliding panel: Press and hold
button & on the SmartKey once more. Safety notes
The roller sunblinds extend. G Warning!
X Release button & on the SmartKey to
Make sure absolutely no objects are
interrupt the extending procedure. obstructing the pedals range of movement.
Keep the drivers footwell clear of all
With KEYLESS-GO obstacles. If there are any floormats or
Controls in detail
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals

still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between or
under the pedals. You could then no longer
brake or accelerate. This could lead to
accidents and injury.
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be systems. In this case, it is important to keep
located outside the vehicle within in mind that a considerably higher degree of
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door. effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
X Close all doors.
X Touch and hold sensor surface : on an

outside door handle (Y page 69) until the Starting the engine
door windows and the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are closed G Warning!
completely. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
i Make sure you are only touching sensor monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
surface :. unconsciousness and possible death.
X Release sensor surface : on the outside Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
door handle to interrupt the closing as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
procedure. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
X Vehicles with panorama roof with entering the vehicle while driving, have the
power tilt/sliding panel: Touch and hold cause determined and corrected
sensor surface : on an outside door immediately. If you must drive under these
handle once more. conditions, drive only with at least one
The roller sunblinds extend. window fully open at all times.
X Release sensor surface : on the outside
door handle to interrupt the extending
procedure.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 99
Driving and parking 99
Automatic transmission You can start your vehicle without the

SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
j Park position with gear selector lever lock
k Reverse gear
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
i Neutral position
: USA only
h Drive position
; Canada only
For more information, see Automatic
transmission (Y page 103). X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in button is inserted in the starter switch
park position P. (Y page 76).
i To start the engine with the SmartKey
With SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO function,
X
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
from the starter switch. Proceed as
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to described in With SmartKey (Y page 99).
position 3 (Y page 76) and release it. X Depress the brake pedal during the starting
The engine starts automatically. procedure.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
With KEYLESS-GO
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
G Warning! once.
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the The engine starts automatically.
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave
children unattended in the vehicle, as they Starting difficulties
could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
! Remember that extended starting
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do attempts can drain the battery.
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, The engine does not start. You can hear
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A the starter.
childs unsupervised access to a vehicle could
There could be a malfunction in the engine
result in an accident and/or serious personal
electronics or in the fuel supply system.
injury.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 100
Carry out the following steps: Driving off

X If you are starting the engine with the
G Warning!
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
procedure. order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-
control. Your vehicles ABS will not prevent
GO: Close any doors that may be open to this type of loss of control.
allow for better detection of the SmartKey.
Controls in detail
or ! Do not run a cold engine at high engine

X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop speeds. Running a cold engine at high
button from the starter switch. engine speeds may shorten the service life
X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio of the engine. This is not covered by the
signals from another source may be Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.
X Repeat the starting procedure. ! If an acoustic warning sounds and the
message Release Parking Brake
If the engine does not start after several appears in the multifunction display when
starting attempts: driving off, you have forgotten to release
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz the parking brake.
Center or call Roadside Assistance. Release the parking brake.
The engine does not start. You cannot ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
hear the starter. cause serious damage to the drivetrain
The battery may not be charged sufficiently. which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
X Get a jump start (Y page 319). Limited Warranty.
If the engine will not start despite a jump ! Simultaneously depressing the
start: accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz reduces engine performance and causes
Center or call Roadside Assistance. premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
The starter has been exposed to excessive
Limited Warranty.
temperatures.
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes. i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
X Repeat the starting procedure. automatic central locking function engages
and the locking knobs in the doors move
If the engine does not start after several
down.
starting attempts:
The automatic central locking function can
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz be switched off (Y page 124).
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Automatic transmission
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 101
Driving and parking 101
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the X Give very little gas.
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate X Have the problem checked at an authorized
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the The coolant temperature is above
engine is idling normally and when your right 248 (120)
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
Controls in detail
! Only shift the automatic transmission into the engine.
reverse gear R or park position P when the X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the as possible.
automatic transmission could be damaged. X Turn off the engine immediately.
X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
X Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever lock is released. X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
necessary (Y page 216).
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
In case of accident
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed. X Do not start the engine under any
Only depressing the brake pedal releases circumstances.
the gear selector lever lock. X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
roadway.
X Wait for the gear selection process to X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion. If the extent of the damage cannot be
X If engaged, release the parking brake. determined:
X Release the brake pedal. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. Center or call Roadside Assistance.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission If no damage on major assemblies, fuel
shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows system, and engine mount can be
the catalytic converter to reach its operating determined:
temperature earlier. X Start the engine in the usual manner.
For more information on driving, see Driving
instructions (Y page 243).
Parking
Problems while driving G Warning!
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
The engine runs erratically and misfires combustible materials such as grass, hay or
RAn ignition cable may be damaged. leaves can come into contact with the hot
RThe
exhaust system. These materials could be
engine electronics may not be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
operating properly.
RUnburned gasoline may have entered the
catalytic converter and damaged it.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 102
Vehicle movement can cause serious

personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
the vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do
the following before turning off the engine and
leaving the vehicle:
RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
REngage the parking brake.
Controls in detail
RManual transmission: Shift the manual

transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear
R.
X Releasing: Pull on release handle :.
RAutomatic transmission: Shift the
automatic transmission into park position When the ignition is switched on or the
P. engine is running, the brake warning lamp
$ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in
RSlowly release the brake pedal. the instrument cluster goes out.
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the X Engaging: Step on parking brake
front wheels towards the road curb. pedal ; firmly.
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to When the engine is running, the brake
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from warning lamp $ (USA only) or J
the starter switch, or press the KEYLESS- (Canada only) in the instrument cluster
GO start/stop button. comes on.
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
Turning off the engine
Parking brake G Warning!
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
G Warning!
has come to a complete stop. With the engine
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle not running, there is no power assistance for
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock the brake and steering systems. In this case,
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and it is important to keep in mind that a
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicles considerably higher degree of effort is
brake lights do not light up when the parking necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
brake is engaged.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
G Warning! position P.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
X Engage the parking brake.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave i Always engage the parking brake in
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
addition to shifting the automatic
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
transmission into park position P.
release the parking brake and/or shift the
automatic transmission out of park position The SmartKey can only be removed from the
P, either of which could result in an accident starter switch with the automatic
and/or serious personal injury. transmission in park position P.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 103
Automatic transmission 103
With SmartKey G Warning!

X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to Make sure absolutely no objects are
position 0. obstructing the pedals range of movement.
Keep the drivers footwell clear of all
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter obstacles. If there are any floormats or
switch. carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
The SmartKey can only be removed from the still have sufficient clearance.
starter switch with the automatic During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
Controls in detail
transmission in park position P. the objects could get caught between or
under the pedals. You could then no longer
With KEYLESS-GO brake or accelerate. This could lead to
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. accidents and injury.
With the drivers door closed, the starter
switch is now in position 1. With the drivers ! Allow the engine to warm up under low
door opened, the starter switch is set to load use. Do not place full load on the
position 0, same as the SmartKey removed engine until the operating temperature has
from the starter switch (Y page 76). been reached.
If an acoustic warning sounds, you have tried Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
to turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO extended period when driving off on
start/stop button while the automatic slippery road surfaces.
transmission was not in park position P. This may cause serious damage to the
Read and observe messages that may appear engine and the drivetrain which is not
in the multifunction display (Y page 267). covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i In an emergency you can turn off the
engine while driving by pressing and i During the brief warm-up, transmission
holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button upshifting is delayed. This allows the
for approximately 3 seconds. catalytic converter to heat up more quickly
If you have started the engine with the to operating temperature.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
turn it off as described above:
Gear selector lever
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
The engine turns off. The starter switch is
in position 0 (Y page 76).
Automatic transmission
Introduction
For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see Driving and parking Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
(Y page 98). j Park position with gear selector lever lock
k Reverse gear
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 104
104 Automatic transmission
i Neutral position Rthe selected gear range (Y page 106)

h Drive position Rthe selected program mode C/S
(Y page 106)
G Warning!
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral Rthe vehicle speed
position N if the engine speed is higher than With drive position D selected, you can
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the influence transmission shifting by limiting or
Controls in detail
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate extending the gear range.
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the Transmission positions
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. The current transmission position appears in
the multifunction display.
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
automatic transmission could be damaged.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Only depressing the brake pedal releases
the gear selector lever lock.
i The current gear selector lever position : Transmission position indicator

corresponds with the current transmission
position.
The current transmission position P, R, N,
or D appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 104).
There are additional indicators on the cover
of the shifting gate showing the current gear
selector lever position.
The indicators come on when you insert the
SmartKey into the starter switch, and go out
when you remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch.
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual
gears automatically, depending on
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 105
Effect Effect
B Park position A Neutral position
Shift the automatic transmission No power is transmitted from the
into park position P only when the engine to the drive axle. When the
vehicle is stopped. The park position brakes are released, the vehicle can
is not intended to serve as a brake be moved freely (pushed or towed).
when the vehicle is parked. Rather, To avoid damage to the
Controls in detail
the driver should always engage the transmission, never shift the
parking brake in addition to shifting automatic transmission into neutral
the automatic transmission into position N while driving.
park position P to secure the
Exception: If the ESP is switched
vehicle. off or malfunctioning, shift the
The SmartKey can only be removed automatic transmission into neutral
from the starter switch with the gear position N if the vehicle is in danger
selector lever in park position P. of skidding.
With the SmartKey removed from
the starter switch, the gear selector ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
lever is locked in park position P. for any other reason with the
automatic transmission in neutral
If the vehicles electrical system is
position N can result in
malfunctioning, the gear selector
transmission damage that is not
lever could remain locked in park
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
position P. To unlock the gear
Limited Warranty.
selector lever manually, see
Manually unlocking the gear 7 Drive position
selector lever (Y page 301). The automatic transmission shifts
C Reverse gear automatically. All forward gears are
available.
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Driving tips
Kickdown
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X U.S. vehicles: Fully depress the
accelerator pedal.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
X Canada vehicles: Depress the accelerator
pedal past the point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 106
106 Automatic transmission
Working on the vehicle Effect

G Warning! = With this selection you can use the
When working on the vehicle, engage the braking effect of the engine.
parking brake and shift the automatic
transmission into park position P. Otherwise 5 Allows the use of the engines
the vehicle could roll away which could result braking effect when driving
in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Ron steep downgrades
Controls in detail
Rin mountainous regions

Towing a trailer Runder extreme operating
X When you tow a trailer, shift into a lower conditions
gear range manually if the automatic
4 For maximum use of the engines
transmission hunts between gears on
braking effect on very steep or
inclines.
lengthy downgrades.
A lower gear range and reduction of speed
reduces the potential to overload or to
overheat the engine.
Automatic shift program
For more information on trailer towing, see
Trailer towing (Y page 246).
Gear ranges
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range, see One-touch gearshifting
(Y page 107).
The current gear range appears in the
multifunction display.
Program mode selector switch
C Comfort For comfort driving

S Sport For sporty driving
: Gear range indicator

X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 107
The current program mode appears in the One-touch gearshifting

With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range using the gear selector lever.
Limiting gear range

G Warning!
Controls in detail
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
control. Your vehicles ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control.
: Program mode indicator
You should only change the program mode X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
when the automatic transmission is in park left in the D- direction.
position P. The automatic transmission will shift into
Automatic program mode S will not be stored. the next lower gear as permitted by the
When the engine is turned off with the shift program. This action simultaneously
automatic program mode S selected, the limits the gear range of the automatic
automatic transmission will go to the transmission.
automatic program mode C when the engine
i To avoid overrevving the engine when
is restarted.
downshifting, the automatic transmission
X Press the program mode selector switch will not shift into a lower gear if the engines
repeatedly until the letter of the desired maximum speed would be exceeded.
program mode appears in the multifunction
display. Extending gear range
Selecting program mode C means: X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both right in the D+ direction.
forward and reverse, except when driving The automatic transmission will shift into
off with full throttle. the next higher gear as permitted by the
RTraction and driving stability are improved shift program. This action simultaneously
on icy roads. extends the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give
more gas. The engine then operates at i If you press on the accelerator pedal
lower revolutions and the wheels are less when the engine has reached the
likely to spin. revolution limit of the current gear range,
Selecting program mode S means that the automatic transmission will upshift
upshifts occur later. beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit

X Press and hold the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction until the gear
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 108
108 Instrument cluster
range indicator disappears from the ! Only conduct operational or performance

multifunction display. tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
The automatic transmission will shift from tests are necessary, contact an authorized
the current gear range directly into drive Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
position D. otherwise seriously damage the brake
system or the transfer case which is not
Shifting into optimal gear range covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Controls in detail
X Press and hold the gear selector lever to

the left in the D- direction. ! Because the ESP operates
The automatic transmission will select the automatically, the engine and ignition must
gear range suited for optimal acceleration be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
and deceleration automatically. This will position 0 or 1) when
involve shifting down one or more gears. Rthe parking brake is being tested on a
brake test dynamometer
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode) axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
with 4MATIC)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less
responsive or sluggish or the automatic Active braking action through the ESP
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic may otherwise seriously damage the brake
transmission is most likely operating in limp- system which is not covered by the
home (emergency operation) mode. In this Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
mode only second gear and reverse gear R
can be selected.
Instrument cluster
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park Introduction
position P. For a full view illustration of the instrument
X Turn off the engine. cluster, see Instrument cluster
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting. (Y page 28).
X Restart the engine.
G Warning!
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive No messages will be displayed if either the
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear instrument cluster or the multifunction
R. display is inoperative.
X Have the automatic transmission checked As a result, you will not be able to see
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as information about your driving conditions,
soon as possible. such as
Rspeed
Routside temperature
Transfer case
Rwarning/indicator lamps
This section applies to vehicles equipped with Rmalfunction/warning messages
all-wheel drive (4MATIC) only. Both the front
Rfailure of any systems
and rear axles are powered at all times when
the vehicle is being operated. Driving characteristics may be impaired.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 109
Instrument cluster 109
If you must continue to drive, do so with added Coolant temperature gauge

caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
The coolant temperature gauge is located on
Benz Center as soon as possible.
the left side in the instrument cluster
The language setting for the multifunction (Y page 28).
display can be changed with the audio system G Warning!
(Y page 136) or with the COMAND system.
Driving when your engine is overheated can
Vehicles with COMAND system: Refer to
cause some fluids which may have leaked into
Controls in detail
separate operating instructions.
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
could be seriously burned.
Activating the instrument cluster Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening
The instrument cluster is activated when you the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
Ropen the drivers door if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Rswitch on the ignition Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
Adjusting the instrument cluster
illumination During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-
and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248 (120), i.e close to the
red zone of the temperature gauge.
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.
The engine should not be operated with a
coolant temperature above 248 (120),
i.e. in the red zone of the coolant
temperature gauge. Doing so may cause
serious engine damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
X To brighten illumination: Turn Warranty.
dimmer : clockwise.
X To dim illumination: Turn dimmer :
counterclockwise. Tachometer
i The instrument cluster illumination is The red marking on the tachometer
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit (Y page 28) denotes excessive engine speed.
ambient light conditions. ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
The instrument cluster illumination will also as it may result in serious engine damage
be adjusted automatically when you switch that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
on the vehicles exterior lamps. Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
interrupted if the engine is operated within
the red marking.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 110
110 Control system
Outside temperature indicator driver when traffic and road conditions permit
it to be done safely.
The outside temperature indicator is
displayed in the multifunction display Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(Y page 112). (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
G Warning! 14 m) every second.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device The control system relays information to the
Controls in detail
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. multifunction display.

Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
Multifunction steering wheel
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The displays in the multifunction display and
the settings in the control system are
controlled by using the buttons on the
Fuel gauge multifunction steering wheel.
The fuel gauge is on the left-hand side of the

instrument cluster (Y page 28). Once the fuel
level has fallen below the reserve mark, the
yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp 8
for the fuel reserve comes on.
Control system
Introduction
The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 2.
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to call up statistical
data on your vehicle, and much more. : Multifunction display
G Warning! ; Press button
A drivers attention to the road and traffic ~ to end a call
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving. to reject an incoming call
6 to answer a call
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction to dial7
steering wheel should only be done by the to redial7
8 to mute

X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 111
Control system 111
Press button Press and hold button

W to set the volume 9 within Audio menu to select a
X : track or scene with quick
search or to select previous or
= Press button next station in station list or
? to activate the Voice Control wave band
System8 within Tel menu to start the
Controls in detail
quick search in the phone book
? Press button briefly
% to cancel the Voice Control Press button
System8 a to confirm selection or
to go back messages
to confirm messages
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
Press and hold button the buttons on the multifunction steering
% to select the standard display wheel will alter what appears in the
A Press button The information available in the multifunction
; to call up line for menus and to display is arranged in menus and
= select menus accompanying functions and submenus.
The individual functions are then found within
Press button briefly the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
9 to select submenu or scroll under Audio, for example). These functions
: through lists serve to call up relevant information or to
within Audio menu to select customize the settings for your vehicle.
previous or next track, scene or It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
stored station functions within each menu, as being
within Tel menu to switch to arranged in a circular pattern.
the phone book and select a In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
name or number you will find a number of submenus for calling
up and changing settings. For instructions on
using these submenus, see Settings menu
(Y page 119).
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.
Using the control system

X To select a menu: Press button =
or ;.
X To select a submenu: Press button :
or 9.
instructions.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 112
112 Control system
X To go to the next higher menu level: = Outside temperature indicator

Press button %. ? Automatic transmission program mode
X To select the standard display: Press indicator
button % repeatedly until the standard A Transmission position/gear range
display featuring the odometer and indicator
speedometer appears. B Digital clock
or
Settings, functions, submenus as well as any
X Press and hold button % until the
Controls in detail
malfunctions appear in the text field.

standard display featuring the trip
For more information on menus displayed in
odometer and the main odometer appears.
the multifunction display, see Menus and
X To confirm selection: Press button a.
submenus (Y page 113).
X To confirm display message: Press
button a or %.
The control system saves certain display
messages. Calling up display messages
(Y page 118).
For information about warning and
malfunction messages appearing in the
multifunction display (Y page 262).
Multifunction display
: Text field
; Line for main menus
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 113
Control system 113
Menus and submenus
Controls in detail
RRemaining driving range and current fuel
Function
consumption (Y page 114)
: Trip menu (Y page 113) RDigital Speedometer (Y page 115)
; Navi menu (Y page 115)
Standard display
= Audio menu (Y page 115)
? Tel menu (Y page 117)
A Service menu (Y page 118)
B Settings menu (Y page 119)
Trip menu In the standard display, the trip

In the Trip menu, you can show an additional odometer : and the main odometer ;
display for the speedometer and call up or appear in the multifunction display.
reset your vehicles statistical data. If another display appears instead of the
The following information is available: standard display:
X Press button = or ; to select the
RStandard display (Y page 113)
Trip menu.
RFuel consumption statistics since start
or
(Y page 114)
X Press button % repeatedly until the
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
standard display appears.
(Y page 114)
RResetting values (Y page 114)
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 114
114 Control system
or = Average speed since last reset

X Press and hold button % until the ? Average fuel consumption since last reset
standard display appears.
Resetting values
Fuel consumption statistics since start
You can reset the values for the following
X Press button = or ; to select the functions:
Trip menu. RTrip odometer
Controls in detail
X Press button : or 9 to select From

RFuel consumption statistics since start
Start.
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset

Trip menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the
function you wish to reset.
X Press button a.
: Distance driven since start

; Time elapsed since start
= Average speed since start
? Average fuel consumption since start
All statistics stored since the last engine start
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to Example illustration: Reset fuel consumption
statistics since start
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the X Press button : to select Yes.
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this X Press button a to confirm.
time period.
Remaining driving range and current
Fuel consumption statistics since last fuel consumption
reset
Trip menu.
Trip menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select From
estimated remaining driving range and
Reset. current fuel consumption display.
Note that the values are calculated based
on the current fuel tank level and the
current driving style. Make sure to refuel in
time.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
vehicle at the fuel pump C appears
instead of the estimated remaining driving
: Distance driven since last reset range.
; Time elapsed since last reset
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 115
Control system 115
Audio menu
The functions in the Audio menu operate the
audio equipment which you have currently
switched on.
The following functions are available:
RSelecting radio station (Y page 115)
: Current fuel consumption
ROperating audio devices/audio media
Controls in detail
; Estimated remaining driving range
(Y page 116)
Digital speedometer ROperating video DVD (Y page 116)
X
If the audio system or the COMAND system
Press button = or ; to select the
is currently switched off, the message Audio
Trip menu.
Off appears in the multifunction display.
X To adjust the volume: Press button
digital speedometer.
W or X on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Selecting radio station

i The SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio is treated
as a radio application.
Additional optional satellite radio
equipment and a subscription to a satellite
radio service provider are required for
Navi menu
satellite radio operation. Contact an
The Navi menu contains the functions authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
needed to operate your navigation system. details and availability for your vehicle.
X Press button = or ; to select the For more information on satellite radio
Navi menu. operation, see Satellite radio
The message shown in the multifunction (Y page 140).
display depends on the status of the Vehicles with COMAND system:
navigation system: Refer to separate COMAND system
RWith the COMAND system switched on operating instructions.
or off and route guidance not activated, X Switch on the audio system (Y page 132)
the direction of travel and, if applicable,
and select radio mode.
the name of the street currently traveled
on appear in the multifunction display. Vehicles with COMAND system:
Refer to separate COMAND system
RWith the COMAND system switched on operating instructions.
and route guidance activated, maneuver X Press button = or ; to select the
instructions appear in the multifunction
Audio menu.
display.
The currently tuned station appears in the
Please refer to separate COMAND system multifunction display.
operating instructions for instructions on how
to activate the route guidance system.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 116
116 Control system
Example illustration for FM radio Example illustration

Controls in detail
: Stored memory position : Disc number

; Station frequency ; Current track
= Wave band setting
X Selecting next or previous track: Press
X Selecting next or previous stored button : or 9 briefly.
station: Press button : or 9 briefly X Selecting a track from the track list
to select a stored station. (quick search): Press and hold
X Selecting next or previous station in button : or 9.
wave band: Press and hold button : or The current track does not appear during
9 to select a station. Audio AUX mode operation.
You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio Operating video DVD
(Y page 139). This function is only available if your vehicle
Vehicles with COMAND system: is equipped with the COMAND system.
Refer to separate COMAND system operating X Switch on the COMAND system and select
instructions.
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
You can also operate the radio in the usual system operating instructions.
manner. X Press button = or ; to select the
Audio menu.
Operating audio devices/audio media
X Switch on the audio system and select the
CD or MP3 mode (Y page 146).
Vehicles with COMAND system:
Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
Audio menu. The settings for the currently : Disc number
being played audio device/audio media ; Current scene
appear in the multifunction display.
X Selecting next or previous scene: Press
button : or 9 briefly.
X Selecting a scene from the scene list
(quick search): Press and hold
button : or 9.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 117
Control system 117
Tel menu Answering a call
G Warning! When your telephone is ready to receive calls,

you can answer a call at any time. In the
A drivers attention to the road must always
multifunction display you will then see the
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
following message:
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
Controls in detail
telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the hands-
free device and only use the telephone when
weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
Example illustration
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph X Press button 6.
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is You have answered the call.
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately The callers number appears only if it is
14 m) every second. transmitted.
You can connect your telephone to the audio The callers name appears only if the number
system (Y page 155) or to the COMAND and the name are stored in the phone book.
system via Bluetooth, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions. Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
X Switch on the audio system (Y page 132)
call
or the COMAND system, see separate X Press button ~.
COMAND system operating instructions.
X Press button = or ; to select the Dialing a number from the phone book
Tel menu.
One of the following messages will appear When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
in the multifunction display: you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
RNo Service: No network is available.
RReady
i To use the phone book of the audio
for Bluetooth Telephony...:
system you can import business cards
The telephone has not been connected
to the audio system or COMAND system (vCards) from external Bluetooth phones
into your audio systems phone book
via Bluetooth yet.
(Y page 162). Vehicles with COMAND, see
X Connect the telephone to the audio
separate operating instructions.
system or COMAND system via
Bluetooth. X Press button = or ; to select the
Tel menu.
RPhone READY or name of the network
X Press button : or 9 or a to
provider (if available): The telephone has
found a network and is ready for use. You switch to the phone book.
can operate it using the control system. The stored names are displayed in
ascending alphabetical order.
desired entry.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 118
118 Control system
If you press and hold button : or Redialing

9 the system scrolls rapidly through the
The control system stores the most recently
list of names (quick search). After holding dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
button : or 9 for a short while the need to search through your entire phone
scrolling speed increases. Release the book.
button to stop the quick search. The search
stops automatically at the end of the list.
Tel menu.
Controls in detail
X Press button 6.
desired number or name.
X Press button 6 or a.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
: Selected name from the phone book
Service menu
X If the Symbol G appears on the right-hand
side of the name several entries are In the Service menu the following functions
present for the same name: Press button are available:
6 or a and select the desired entry. RVehicle status message memory
(Y page 118)
X Press button 6 or a.
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
The control system dials the selected
phone number. system (Canada only) (Y page 223)
If the connection is successful and this RChecking tire inflation pressure
feature is supported by your network electronically with the Advanced TPMS
provider, the name of the party (if stored in (USA only) (Y page 224)
your phone book) you are calling will RCalling up the maintenance service
appear in the multifunction display. indicator display (Y page 251)
The control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory. Vehicle status message memory
or
X
Use the vehicle status message memory
Press button ~ or % if you do not
function to scan malfunction and warning
want to make the call.
messages that may be stored in the system.
Such messages appear in the multifunction
display and are based on conditions or
system status the vehicles system has
recorded.
G Warning!
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
malfunction and warning messages are
simply a reminder with respect to the
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 119
Control system 119
operation of certain systems. They do not collection of submenus (Y page 119) with
replace the owners and/or drivers which you can make individual settings for
responsibility to maintain the vehicles your vehicle.
operating safety. Have all required
maintenance and safety checks performed on Resetting to factory settings
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized
You can reset most of the settings of the
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
submenus to the factory settings.
malfunction and warning messages.
Controls in detail
For safety reasons, the function Daytime
X Press button = or ; to select the Running Lamps in the Lights submenu
Service menu. cannot be reset while driving.
If conditions have occurred causing status X Press button = or ; to select the
messages to be recorded, the number of Settings menu.
messages appears in the multifunction X Press button : or 9 to select the
display:
Factory Setting function.
X Press button a.
The function Reset All Settings?
appears in the multifunction display.

messages function.
X Press button a to confirm.
The stored messages will now be displayed X Press button : or 9 to select Yes or
in the order in which they have occurred.
No. Select Yes if you want to reset to
For malfunction and warning messages, factory settings.
see Vehicle status messages in the
X Press button a to confirm.
The confirmation message appears in the
X Use button : or 9 to scroll through
the messages.
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
Submenus in the Settings menu
to position 0 and then back to position 2, all
messages will be deleted from the message X Press button = or ; to select the
memory. Settings menu.
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu there are two
functions: The function Factory Setting
(Y page 119), with which you can reset the
settings to the original factory settings and a
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 120
120 Control system
X Press button : or 9 to select a Instrument cluster submenu

submenu.
Access the Instr. Cluster submenu via
Scroll down with button :, scroll up with the Settings menu. Use the Instr.
button 9. Cluster submenu to change the instrument
With the selection marker on the desired cluster display settings.
submenu, use the button a to access the The following functions are available:
individual functions within that submenu. RSelecting speedometer display mode
Once within the submenu, you can use button
Controls in detail
(Y page 120)
9 to move to the next function or
RPermanent display (speed display or
button : to move to the previous function
within that submenu. outside temperature) (Y page 121)
The following lists show what settings can be Selecting speedometer display mode
changed within the various menus. Detailed
X Press = or ; to select the
instructions on making individual settings can
be found on the following pages. Settings menu.
Instrument cluster submenu Instr. Cluster submenu.
RSelecting speedometer display mode
X Press button a.
(Y page 120)
RPermanent display (speed display or Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
outside temperature) (Y page 121) function.
The current setting is shown.
Time/Date submenu
RSetting the time (Y page 121)
RSetting the date (Y page 121)
Lights submenu
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only) (Y page 122)
RSwitching locator lighting on or off X Press button a to change the setting.
(Y page 122)
Depending on the previous setting the
RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: will be
on or off (Y page 123) set to miles or km.
The selected display unit is valid for:
Vehicle submenu
RSwitching automatic central locking on or ROdometer and trip odometer
off (Y page 124) RTrip computer
RDigital speedometer in the trip menu
Convenience submenu
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature RCruise control
(Y page 124) RNavigation displays
RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors on or off (Y page 124)
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 121
Control system 121
Permanent display For information on setting the time in the

You can use the Permanent Display: COMAND system, refer to the separate
function to choose to display either the COMAND system operating instructions.
outside temperature or the speed in X Press button = or ; to select the
kilometers (USA) or miles (Canada) Settings menu.
permanently. X Press button : or 9 to select the
X Press button = or ; to select the Time/date submenu.
Settings menu.
Controls in detail
X Press button a.
X Press button : or 9 to select the X Press button : or 9 to select the
Instr. Cluster submenu. Time function.
X Press button a. X Press button a.
X Press button : or 9 to select the The current time appears in the
Permanent Display: function. multifunction display.
The current setting is shown. X To set a new time press button a again.
setting you wish to change: hours or
minutes.
X Press button a to change the current

status.
Depending on the previous status, the
Permanent Display: will be switched X Press button : or 9 to change the
between Outside temperature or
setting which is highlighted.
Speedometer (km/h) (USA)/
X Press button a to store the entry.
Speedometer (miles) (Canada).
Setting the date
Time/Date submenu
This function is not available if your vehicle is
Access the Time/Date submenu via the equipped with the COMAND system and
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date navigation module.
submenu to change the time and date display Vehicles with COMAND system:
settings. For information on setting the date in the
The following functions are available: COMAND system, refer to the separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
RSetting the time (Y page 121)
RSetting the date (Y page 121)
Settings menu.
Setting the time X Press button : or 9 to select the
This function is not available if your vehicle is Time/date submenu.

equipped with the COMAND system and X Press button a.
navigation module. X Press button : or 9 to select the
Vehicles with COMAND system: Date function.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 122
122 Control system
X Press button a.
The current date appears in the
X To set a new date press button a again.
setting you wish to change: month, day or
year.
Controls in detail
status.
Daytime Running Lamps: mode will be
Enabled or Disabled.
With Daytime Running Lamps mode
enabled and the exterior lamp switch at
position $ or c, the low-beam
X Press button : or 9 to change the headlamps are switched on when the engine
setting which is highlighted. is running.
X Press button a to store the entry. In low ambient light conditions the following
lamps will come on additionally:
Lights submenu RParking lamps
Access the Lights submenu via the RTail lamps
Settings menu. Use the Lights submenu to RLicense plate lamps
change the lamp and lighting settings on your
RSide marker lamps
vehicle.
The following functions are available: For more information on the daytime running
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on lamp mode, see (Y page 88).
or off (USA only) (Y page 122) i Make sure the exterior lamp switch is set
RSwitching locator lighting function on or off to M or c when you switch off the
(Y page 122) daytime running lamps while driving at
night.
RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
on or off (Y page 123) For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
of all submenus to the factory settings while
Switching daytime running lamp mode on driving (Y page 119) will not deactivate the
or off (USA only) daytime running lamp mode.
X Press button = or ; to select the The following message appears in the
Settings menu. multifunction display:
Cannot Be Completely Reset to
Factory Settings while Driving..
Lights submenu.
X Press button a. Switching locator lighting on or off
X Press button : or 9 to select the With the Locator Lighting: function
Daytime Running Lamps: function. activated and the exterior lamp switch in
The current setting Enabled or Disabled position c
is shown.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 123
Control system 123
Rthe exterior lamps will come on during You can temporarily deactivate the
darkness when the vehicle is unlocked with headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
the SmartKey. X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
The lamps will go out when the drivers door SmartKey in the starter switch to
is opened. position 0.
If you do not open the drivers door after X Then turn it to position 2 and back to
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, position 0.
the lamps will go out automatically after The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
Controls in detail
approximately 40 seconds. deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as
Rthe exterior lamps will remain on for you start the engine.
15 seconds during darkness after exiting
the vehicle and closing all doors. Switching interior lighting delayed shut-
off on or off
If, after turning off the engine, you do not
open or close a door, the lamps will Use this function to set whether you would
automatically go out after 60 seconds. like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have
The following lamps will come on removed the SmartKey from the starter
RParking lamps switch.
RTail lamps X Press button = or ; to select the
RLicense plate lamps Settings menu.
RSide marker lamps
Lights submenu.
RFront fog lamps X Press button a.
X Press button = or ; to select the X Press button : or 9 to select the
Settings menu. Interior Lighting Delay: function.
X Press button : or 9 to select the The current setting Enabled or Disabled
Lights submenu. is shown.
X Press button a.
Locator Lighting: function.
The current setting Enabled or Disabled
is shown.

status.
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
will be Enabled or Disabled.
status. Vehicle submenu
Depending on the previous status, the Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Locator Lighting: function will be Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
Enabled or Disabled. to set the automatic central locking.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 124
124 Control system
Switching automatic central locking on or wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is

off activated.
Use this function to switch the automatic To stop steering wheel movement, move
central locking on or off. With the automatic steering wheel adjustment stalk or press one
central locking activated, the vehicle is of the memory position buttons.
locked centrally at a vehicle speed of Do not leave children unattended in the
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
X Press button = or ; to select the Children could open the drivers door and
Controls in detail
Settings menu. unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit

X Press button : or 9 to select the feature, which could result in an accident
Vehicle submenu. and/or serious personal injury.
X Press button a.
Settings menu.
Automatic Door Lock: function. X Press button : or 9 to select the
Convenience submenu.
is shown.
X Press button a.
Easy Entry/Exit: function.
is shown.

status.
Automatic Door Lock: feature will be
Enabled or Disabled.
Convenience submenu status.
Access the Convenience submenu via the Easy Entry/Exit: feature will be
Settings menu. Use the Convenience Enabled or Disabled.
submenu to activate the easy-entry/exit
feature (Y page 124), or to set the fold-in Switching fold-in function for exterior
function for exterior rear view mirrors rear view mirrors on or off
(Y page 124). This feature is only available in Canada
vehicles.
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to set the exterior rear view
Use this function to activate and deactivate
mirrors to be folded in automatically when
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 83).
you lock your vehicle.
G Warning! With this function set to Enabled and the
You must make sure no one can become exterior rear view mirrors folded in using the
trapped or injured by the moving steering button on the door control panel
(Y page 85), the exterior rear view mirrors will
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 125
Audio system 125
not fold out when you switch on the ignition. traffic conditions first before operating
You will then have to fold out the exterior rear system controls while driving.
view mirrors using the button on the door Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
control panel (Y page 85). (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
folded out completely before driving off. 14 m) every second.
Settings menu.
Controls in detail
X Press button : or 9 to select the Audio system overview
Convenience submenu.
X Press a.
Fold Mirrors in when Locking:
function.
is shown.

status.
automatic fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors will be Enabled or Disabled. Item
: Audio display (Y page 128)
Audio system ; Audio control unit (Y page 126)
Audio and telephone operation

These instructions are intended to help you
become familiar with your Mercedes-Benz
audio system. They contain useful tips and a
detailed description of the user functions.
G Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could lead
to an accident, the driver should enter system
settings with the vehicle at a standstill and
operate the system only when road and traffic
conditions permit. Always pay full attention to
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 126
126 Audio system
Item The audio system consists of the following:

RAudio control unit
= Clear button (Y page 130)
RAudio display
? Audio controller (Y page 129) RAudio controller with buttons k and
A Back button (Y page 129) 2
In addition, the audio system can also be
operated with the multifunction steering
Controls in detail
Operating safety wheel (Y page 110).

G Warning! In these instructions, the keypad (right side
of audio control unit) and the function buttons
Any alterations made to electronic
are referred to as buttons.
components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer, satellite
Audio control unit
radio, and telephone are interconnected.
When one of the components is not With the audio control unit you can
operational or has not been removed/ Rswitch the audio system on/off
replaced properly, the function of other
Radjust the volume
components may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the Rselect the operating modes
operating safety of your vehicle. Renter telephone numbers and accept,
We recommend that you have any service reject, initiate and end telephone calls
work on electronic components carried out at Rload and eject CDs
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Audio system components

With the audio system you can operate the
following main functions:
RAudio function with the radio, Satellite
radio, disc (CD audio or MP3 mode) and
Audio AUX
Rthe mobile phone with the phone book
Rvarious system settings
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 127
Audio system 127
Audio control unit overview
Controls in detail
Item B Keypad
: Switching to radio mode Tuning to a station via the station
(Y page 137) memory (Y page 138)
Calling up wave bands Storing stations manually
(Y page 137) (Y page 139)
Switching on Sat mode Entering a passcode (Y page 159)
(Y page 142) Entering a phone number
(Y page 165)
; Switching to CD audio or MP3 mode Sending DTMF tones (Y page 168)
(Y page 146)
CD changer: Selecting a CD
= Disc slot (Y page 150)
CD: Entering a track number directly
? Load/eject button (Y page 149)
(Y page 152)
A Clear button for deleting digits or
C Tuning to a station via station search
entire entries (Y page 166)
(Y page 138)
Entering a passcode (Y page 159)
Fast forward (Y page 153)
Entering a telephone number
Skipping forwards to a track
(Y page 165)
(Y page 153)
D Switching audio system on/off
(Y page 132)
E Adjusting the volume (Y page 133)
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 128
128 Audio system
F Tuning to a station via station search

(Y page 138)
Fast rewind (Y page 153)
Skipping backwards to a track
(Y page 153)
G Confirming a passcode
(Y page 159)
Controls in detail
Accepting a call (Y page 167) Example illustration: Radio selected

Initiating a call (Y page 165) Status line = displays the time and the
Redial (Y page 166) current settings for radio and telephone
mode.
H Rejecting a call (Y page 167) You can request the required function using
Ending an active call (Y page 167) menu bar :.
I Opening system settings menu The selection is made using the audio
(Y page 135) controller.
Mobile phone readiness is indicated by
J Switching sound on/off additional information being shown in the
(Y page 133) status line:
Switching hands-free microphone RIn the telephone main menu: Name of the
on/off (Y page 167)
Bluetooth device (calls made and
K Switching to telephone mode received via the Bluetooth interface)
(Y page 155) (Y page 160).
L Sound settings (Y page 133) RMobile phone network signal strength
r. This information will only be shown
Audio display with suitable mobile phones.
RThe receiver symbol indicates whether a
! Avoid touching the audio display at all call is active or not.
times. The display has a very sensitive high- No active call
gloss surface, there is a risk of it being Active call
scratched. Do not press directly in the
display face. Otherwise, the audio display In this example, the audio main function is set
will be damaged. to the FM radio mode and main area ; is
active.
i For information about cleaning and care
i The layout of the menus may vary
of the audio display, see Audio or
depending on your vehicles equipment.
COMAND display (Y page 256).
This manual shows the menus for a fully
Display equipped vehicle.
The currently selected mode and the
associated menus are shown on the audio Instrument cluster multifunction
display. The audio display is divided into display
several areas. Please refer to the Control system section
of this manual (Y page 110) for function
descriptions and operation of the instrument
cluster multifunction display and
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 129
Audio system 129
multifunction steering wheel buttons as they Symbol How to use the audio
relate to audio functions described in this controller
section.
W X Press briefly
Audio controller Rto confirm the selection of a
menu item or list entry
XPress and hold until the
Controls in detail
selected action has been
carried out
Rto save a station
cVd X Rotate
Rto move through vertical or
horizontal menus or through
lists
The menu functions are selected on the audio Rto select program settings
display using audio controller :. For this
ZV X Slide
purpose, a selected item is highlighted.
Rto move through vertical
In this way, you can open menus or lists, move
within menus or lists, and quit menus or lists. menus or lists
Rto exit horizontal menus
XVY X Slide
Rto move through horizontal
menus
Rto exit vertical menus
X Slide and hold
Rfor fast forward or reverse for
audio CD playback
Operating audio controller

Back button
Audio controller : features the following
options:
Rpress briefly or press and hold W
Rrotate to the left or right cVd
Rslide to the left or right XVY
Rslide up or down ZV
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 130
130 Audio system
X Switching to the next highest menu: Button Mode/Menu

Press button k briefly.
The audio system switches to the next Presets (Y page 139)
highest menu level within the currently
Sound (Y page 133)
active mode.
h Disc mode
i You can also exit a menu or list by sliding
the audio controller XVY or ZV. CD/MP3 (Y page 146)
Controls in detail
X Switching to the main menu: Press and Track list/folder list

hold button k. (Y page 153)
The audio system switches to the basic CD Changer (Y page 150)
menu of the currently active mode.
Sound (Y page 133)
Clear button % Telephone mode
Telephone (Y page 155)
Name (Y page 162)
Call lists (Y page 164)
i System settings menu
System (Y page 135)
Display off (Y page 136)
Calling up an operating mode

X Deleting an individual digit: Briefly press
button 2. X Press the respective button ($, h,
%, or i) on the audio control unit.
X Deleting an entire entry: Press and hold
The basic menu of the selected mode
button 2 until the entry is deleted.
appears in the audio display. The main area
is active. The active area is highlighted.
Menu i The following screens show the audio
displays day design. The appearance of the
The table below shows the structure of the
highlighted items in the menu will vary
modes and their menus. Each mode has a
depending on the display design.
basic menu. Each menu item in turn has
several submenu items.
Button Mode/Menu
$ Radio mode
Radio (FM/AM) (Y page 136)
Weather Band (Y page 137)
Satellite radio (Y page 140)
Illustration: Radio function basic menu
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 131
Audio system 131
X Moving to the menu bar: Slide V. Example of how to use the audio system
Example: direct frequency input,
Horizontal menus FM 104.5 MHz.
$ Q Radio Q Enter Frequency
The individual steps for the above-mentioned
example are described below.
X Press button $ on audio control unit
Controls in detail
repeatedly until desired wave band FM has
been selected.
X Switching to the menu bar: Slide V.
X Moving through the menu bar: Slide

XVY or rotate cVd.
The currently selected item is highlighted.
X Confirming the selected menu item:
Press W.
X Exiting the menu bar without
confirming a selection: Slide ZV in the
opposite direction of the list orientation.
X Selecting Radio in the menu bar: Slide
or
X Press button k.
XV or rotate cVd.
Vertical submenus
X Confirming selection: Press W.

The Radio menu is selected and a list of
submenus appears.
X Moving through the submenu: Slide
ZV or rotate cVd.
The currently selected item is highlighted.
X Confirming the selected submenu
item: Press W.
X Exiting the submenu without
confirming a selection: Slide XVY in the
opposite direction of the list orientation.
or
X Enter Frequency is selected.
X Press button k.
X Confirming selection: Press W.
The Enter Frequency submenu appears.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 132
132 Audio system
Switching audio system on or off

Controls in detail
i It is not possible to enter a frequency in

the respective wave band which is outside
the frequency range. Frequencies within
the current frequency range, but outside
the current frequency step width are X Switching on: Press push button q.
rounded to the next lower allowed or
frequency. X If the audio system was on as you switched
X Enter 1045 with the keypad on the audio off the ignition, turn the SmartKey in the
control unit. starter switch to position 1.
The audio system tunes in to the frequency The audio system will come back on with
entered. the last selected function.
i If the audio system is switched on without
the SmartKey in the starter switch, it will
Operation automatically switch off again after
In the following description, an operation step approximately 30 minutes.
is described as in the example below. X Switching off: Press push button q.
X $ Q Radio Q Enter Frequency or
is the short for X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
X Press button $ on audio control unit position 0 and remove SmartKey from
repeatedly until desired wave band has starter switch.
been selected.
i Should excessively high temperatures
X Slide V.
occur while the audio system is being
X Slide XV or rotate cVd the audio operated, Temperature Too High -
controller to select Radio. Device switching off now. will appear
X Press the audio controller W. in the audio display, after which the audio
The Radio menu is selected and a list of system will be switched off for a cooling-
submenus appears. down period.
X Slide ZV or rotate cVd the audio
i When you switch off the audio system,
controller to select Enter Frequency. you also switch off the currently playing
X Press the audio controller W. audio source. Also, telephone operation via
The Enter Frequency submenu appears the audio control unit is not possible.
in the audio display.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 133
Audio system 133
Adjusting volume particular Sound menu can be opened from

the basic menu for the desired operating
mode, or by pressing the button J on the
audio control unit.
Example:
$ Q Sound Q Bass
Adjusting bass or treble
Controls in detail
X Press button J and select Bass or
Treble.
or
X Select Sound Q Bass or Treble.
X Adjusting: Turn rotary control :. A longer and brighter bar indicates the
The volume will increase or decrease previously stored setting. The red pointer
depending on the direction turned. indicates the currently selected setting.
Adjusting volume for telephone calls

In hands-free mode, you can adjust the
volume of a telephone call while the call is
currently active.
During a telephone call:
X Turn rotary control :.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned. Example for adjusting bass
i The volume of the audio system or a X Changing setting: Slide VZ or rotate

telephone call can also be adjusted by cVd until desired treble or bass setting is
pressing the button W or X on the reached.
multifunction steering wheel (Y page 110). X Exiting menu: Press button k or slide
XVY.
Sound The setting is stored.
X Switching on/off: Press button 8 on
Adjusting balance or fader
the audio control unit (Y page 127).
The sound of the current audio source is Balance is used to determine whether the
switched on or off. sound focus should be shifted toward the
drivers side or the passenger side.
i When the sound is switched off, the Fader is used to determine whether the sound
symbol 8 appears in the status line. focus should be shifted toward the front or
If you change the audio source, or alter the rear of the vehicle.
volume, the sound is automatically X Press button J repeatedly until Bal/
switched on again. Fad appears in the audio display.
or
Selecting sound settings X Select Sound Q Bal/Fad.
You can select different bass and treble The current setting is indicated by a red
settings for each individual audio source. The cross hair symbol.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 134
134
Controls in detail Audio system
Adjusting balance and fader A dot # indicates the current setting.

X Changing setting: Slide VZ or XVY until X Selecting setting: Slide VZ or rotate
desired balance/fader setting is achieved. cVd.
X Exiting menu: Press W or button k. X Saving setting: Press W.
The balance/fader setting is stored for all The setting is stored and the menu is
audio sources. exited.
X Exiting menu without saving: Press
Surround sound button k or slide XVY.
If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/ i Balance and fader will be set to the default
kardon Logic 7 Surround Sound system, you value (0/0) automatically by activating or
can choose between Logic7 On and deactivating Logic 7.
Logic7 Off for surround sound.
harman/kardon Logic 7 Surround Sound is i Please note the following:
available for the following operating modes: RFor an optimal sound experience from all
RRadio (FM only) seats, the balance and fader should be
adjusted to the center of the passenger
RSatellite radio
compartment with Logic 7 switched on.
RCD audio RThe best sound results are achieved
RMP3 when playing high-quality audio CDs.
RAUX RFor MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at
least 128 kbit/s.
i By selecting Logic7
Off, all compatible
RSurround playback cannot be activated
formats are played back as they are
present on the medium. in mono-signal sources as AM or
Weatherband. It will not function for
Adjusting surround sound mono-signal sources as, e.g. mono audio
With surround sound, you can choose tracks on some specific audio CDs.
between Logic7 On and Logic7 Off. RIn the case of poor radio reception
X Press button J repeatedly until Sound quality, e.g. during long tunnel passages,
appears in the audio display. Logic 7 should be switched off, as
or otherwise a dynamic switchover from
X Select Sound Q Sound.
stereo to mono and thus temporary
sound characteristic shifts can occur.
RWith certain stereo recordings, the
resulting sound characteristic may
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 135
Audio system 135
deviate from conventional stereo Bluetooth settings

playback.
General information about Bluetooth
Bluetooth technology is the standard for
SYS menu short-range wireless technologies, suitable
for transmitting voice and data. It is possible
System settings menu overview
to connect Bluetooth devices wirelessly.
Menu Bluetooth can be used to exchange vCards
Controls in detail
or to make calls using a hands-free device.
System Bluetooth technology uses the freely
Display (Y page 135) available ISM (Industrial Scientific Medical)
wave band that works at 2.45 GHz.
Brightness Bluetooth works within a range of up to 33 ft
Day Mode (10 m).
Night Mode Activate or deactivate Bluetooth

X i Q System Q Activate
Automatic
Bluetooth.
Language (Y page 136)
Activate Bluetooth
(Y page 135)
Reset (Y page 135)
Display off (Y page 136)
Display settings
You have activated or deactivated
You can adapt the brightness of the audio Bluetooth. A checkmark O appears when
display to the prevailing light conditions. Bluetooth is activated.
Setting the display design
X
Reset
i Q System Q Display.
X Select Brightness, Day Mode, Night i You can reset the audio system back to
Mode or Automatic. its factory settings. In this case, all personal
data (e.g. address book entries, call lists,
i When you select Brightness, a scale paired mobile phones, and presets) are
appears on which you can set the deleted. We recommend that you reset the
brightness manually. values before selling your vehicle.
In the Automatic setting, the audio system
analyzes the automatic vehicle light sensor
and switches between the display designs
automatically.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 136
136 Audio system
X i Q System Q Reset. or
A prompt appears asking whether you X Press any function button, e.g. button
really want to reset. h. The audio system will then switch to
X Select Yes or No. the respective function.
If you select Yes another prompt will
appear asking whether you really want to
reset. Radio operation
X Select Yes or No.
Controls in detail
If you select Yes, the audio system will be G Warning!

reset and restarted. Please devote your attention first and
foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
Setting the system language Before your journey, please familiarize
yourself with the radio functions.
X i Q System Q Language. Only use the audio system when road and
traffic conditions permit you to do so.
Otherwise you could be involved in an
accident in which you or others could be
injured.
! Do not attach metallic window tinting film

to the inside or outside of windows which
are fitted with an aerial. Obstructing the
metallic aerial structure on the window will
The language list appears. A dot # in front
interfere with radio reception. Cutting the
of an entry indicates the current setting. film on the window can permanently
X Changing setting: Slide VZ or rotate damage the aerial wires.
cVd and select desired language.
X Saving setting: Press W.
i The radio mode is interrupted by an
The setting is stored and the menu is incoming call on the mobile phone
exited. (Y page 155).
X Exiting menu without saving: Press
Menu overview
button k or slide XVY.
i The components and operating principles
i The language selected in the Audio of the audio system can be found on
system is also used for the displays and (Y page 126) and (Y page 131). Information
messages in the multifunction display. about sound settings can be found on
(Y page 133).
Switching display on/off
X
Menu Function
Switching display off: i Q
Display Off. Radio Enter frequency
X Switching display on: Press button k, (except Weather
Band/satellite Station information
press W, or slide VZ XVY. (in FM wave band
radio)
or only)
X Press button q.
The System menu appears.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 137
Audio system 137
Menu Function Station Info in the Radio menu is

activated.
Presets Autostore (except X $ Q Radio Q Show Station
(except Weather satellite radio) Info
Band)
List of stored In the WB wave band, the audio system
stations displays the channel number, e.g.
Channel 6, instead of the station names
Info Information menu (if and/or frequency.
Controls in detail
available)
Channel List of channels Information displayed in the status line
(only Weather Band) (example)
Sound Treble The following information is displayed in the
status line:
Bass
RTime (04:38)
Balance/Fader RStation name (WNYC)
Surround Sound Mobile phone readiness is indicated by
additional information being shown:
Switching to radio mode RMobile phone network signal strength
X Press button $ on audio control unit. r
The radio basic menu appears in the audio RReceiver symbol
display. The radio switches to the last
station you have listened to. Calling up wave bands
Weather Band will automatically tune to the
strongest station in the area. You can select FM, AM, and WB wave bands
as well as the Sat mode (Y page 140). When
you have selected the Sat mode, pressing
button $ will switch back to FM radio
mode.
Wave band Frequency
FM 87.7......107.9 MHz
AM 530.......1710 KHz
Illustration: Radio mode in FM wave band
WB (Weather Band) Weather channels
: Status line
; Station name or other information from Satellite radio Satellite radio
the station channels
= Station frequency and stored position
? Main area with wave band X Press button $ on audio control unit
repeatedly until the desired wave band has
i Station name or other information ;, been selected.
available for the FM wave band, can only be The FM, AM, and WB wave bands and the
seen when the station transmits the name satellite radio mode are called up one after
or other information and the function Show another.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 138
138 Audio system
The wave band currently selected appears system searches upward or downward and
in the main area of the audio display. The stops at the next station/channel.
last selected station in the selected wave or
band is heard. X Press button E or F on audio control
unit.
Selecting a station/channel Depending on the pressed button, the
The following functions are available: system searches downward or upward and
stops at the next station/channel.
Controls in detail
RStation search function

RChannel list (Weather Band/satellite radio) Selecting a station using station memory
RStation memory (except Weather Band) i This function is not available for Weather
RManual
Band.
frequency entry (except Weather
Band/satellite radio) X Press button $ on audio control unit
For using satellite radio see (Y page 140). repeatedly until desired wave band has
The station search proceeds in the following been selected.
frequency increments: X Select Presets.
R200 kHz in FM range or

X Press W when the main area is selected.
R10 kHz in AM range
The memory menu appears. The dot # in
Tuning to a station/channel via station/ front of a memory position indicates that
channel search function the currently selected station is saved
there.
i The search function searches for the next
X Select a station in the memory menu by
receivable station in the FM or AM wave
rotating cVd or sliding ZV and press
band. In Weather Band (WB) the search
W.
function switches to the next channel in the
channel list. For tuning to a station/ or
channel you can also use the buttons on X Press desired station button k to
the multifunction steering wheel, see x, with the keypad in audio control unit
Audio menu (Y page 115). briefly.
X Press button $ on audio control unit Tuning to a station by entering the
repeatedly until the FM/AM/WB wave frequency manually
band is selected.
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd when the main
i This function is not available for Weather
Band/satellite radio.
area in the basic menu is active.
Depending on the direction in which the X $ Q Radio Q Enter Frequency
controller is being slid or rotated, the The menu for manual frequency entry
appears.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 139
Audio system 139
Storing stations manually with keypad

X Tune in desired station.
The basic menu appears in the audio
display.
X Press and hold desired station button
k to x until a brief signal tone
sounds.
The station is stored.
Controls in detail
or
Storing stations manually with station
X Press button l on the keypad in audio memory menu
control unit briefly.
X Tune in desired station.
The Enter Frequency submenu appears.
The basic menu appears in the audio
display.
X Press W when the main area is active.
or
X Select Presets.
The station memory display appears in the
audio display.
X Entering frequency with keypad: Enter

desired frequency with buttons k to
x on the keypad in audio control unit.
The audio system tunes in to the frequency
entered.
i It is not possible to enter a frequency in
the respective wave band which is outside The dot # in front of a memory position
the frequency range. indicates that the currently tuned station is
X Exiting menu without making an entry: stored there.
Press button k in the center console X Selecting a memory position: Slide
(Y page 129). ZV or rotate cVd.
X Storing a station to a selected memory
Storing stations position: Press and hold W until a brief
signal tone sounds.
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in
the memory. or
X Press and hold desired station button
i If you select a memory preset which is k to x on keypad, until a brief signal
already in use, it will be overwritten by the
tone sounds.
new station.
The station is stored.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 140
140 Audio system
Autostore automatic station memory Satellite radio

i This function is not available for Weather G Warning!
Band/satellite radio. The autostore
Please devote your attention first and
function automatically assigns receivable
foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
stations to the memory. The stations are
sorted according to reception quality at the Before your journey, please familiarize
moment of performing the autostore. The yourself with the radio functions.
stations which were stored in the station Only use the audio system when road and
Controls in detail
memory manually are overwritten in this traffic conditions permit you to do so.
process. If less than ten stations are found, Otherwise you could be involved in an
the remaining entries are left empty. accident in which you or others could be
X Press button $ on audio control unit
injured.
repeatedly until desired wave band has
been selected. Submenu overview
The basic menu appears in the audio i The components and operating principles
display. of the audio system can be found on
X Press W when the main area is active. (Y page 126) and (Y page 131).
or
Menu Submenu
X Select Presets.
The station memory display appears in the Sat Channel List
audio display.
Enter Channel
X Slide ZV or rotate cVd to select
Autostore. Service
X Press W.
Presets Station presets
The audio system searches for receivable
stations. A corresponding message is Info Information menu (if
displayed. The available stations are available)
automatically stored in the station Category (Cat.) All channels
memory. The first received station will be
automatically played. Select category
X Canceling storage procedure: Select
Sound Treble
Cancel and press W while the message
Rewriting Memory... is being displayed. Bass
Balance/Fader
Displaying information
Surround Sound
You can display program information or other
additional information when provided by the
radio station you are listening to.
Satellite radio
X $ Q Info (if available). i Additional satellite radio equipment and a
The available information appears. The subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio
content and scope of the information service provider are required for the
depends on the radio station. satellite radio operation described in this
X Closing screen: Slide XVY, rotate cVd, chapter.
press W or press button k.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 141
Audio system 141
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz The following conditions are possible:

Center for details and availability for your RSatellite radio service is not activated
vehicle. (only the preview channel is displayed).
SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio provides over RSatellite radio service is activated.
130 channels of digital-quality radio,
including 100 % commercial-free music, i If a satellite receiver is not installed or not
sports, news and entertainment. SIRIUS XM properly installed:
Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-power The message Device Unavailable will
Controls in detail
satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day, appear.
coast to coast, in the contiguous U. S. and If the satellite radio service is not activated,
Canada. the SIRIUS Preview display appears.
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming
is available for a monthly subscription fee. Satellite radio service is not activated
For more information and service availability The telephone number of the SIRIUS XM
call the SIRIUS XM Service Center at Service Center and the twelve-digit electronic
1-888-539-7474 (Y page 145), or visit serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular
www.sirius.com (USA) or receiver are required when calling the SIRIUS
www.siriuscanada.ca (Canada). XM Service Center for an activation request.
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Sat
i Note that categories and channels shown
in illustrations are dependent on Q Service.
programming content delivered by the
service provider. Programming content is
subject to change. Therefore, channels and
categories shown in illustrations and
descriptions contained in this manual may
differ from the channels and categories
delivered by the service provider.
i Satellite radio service may be unavailable

or interrupted from time to time for a X Closing screen: Press W or button k
variety of reasons, such as environmental or slide XVY.
or topographic conditions and other things X Activating satellite radio service:
we cannot control. Service might also not
Contact satellite radio service provider at
be available in certain places (e.g. in
the telephone number displayed in the
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees,
service display.
or within or next to buildings) or near other
obstructions. In such situations, the After the connection is made:
satellite radios main menu shows the No X Follow the instructions given by the
Service screen. At this point, the radios operator.
functions are restricted. The activation process may take up to
10 minutes. If it is successful, you will see
Subscribing to satellite radio the display with the message Updating
X Press button $ on audio control unit Channels... followed by the satellite
radio basic menu.
repeatedly until Sat is selected.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 142
142 Audio system
i Activating the satellite radio service might X Press button $ on audio control unit
not be available in certain places (e.g. in repeatedly until Sat is selected.
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees, The message No Service will appear when
or within or next to buildings). If a the signal is not available. After the audio
subscription is not included with system system acquires the signal, the satellite
purchase, credit card information is radio basic menu will appear. The last
required to activate your account. tuned station will begin to play.
The activation process takes
Controls in detail
approximately 5 to 10 minutes after calling Main satellite radio menu

the SIRIUS XM Service Center.
If a satellite receiver is not installed or not
properly installed: The message Device
Unavailable will appear.
i It is also possible to activate the satellite

radio service online. To do so please visit
SIRIUS XM Satellite Radios website at
www.sirius.com (USA) or : Main area with channel display
www.siriuscanada.ca (Canada). ; Selected program category
Preview Channel = Number of selected channel
? Selected channel
A Sound settings
B Selecting program category
C Current artist and title
D Channel information
E Preset options
F Satellite radio options
i If the satellite radio service has not been i Main area : displays only channels that
subscribed to, only the preview channel is you have subscribed to. Which channels
available. You cannot tune in another are shown depends on the selected
channel. If you try to do this, the message program category ;. Only the currently
Call SIRIUS to activate: appears. selected channel ? is displayed.
Note that categories and channels shown
Satellite radio service is activated
in illustrations are dependent on
The basic satellite radio menu appears. You programming content delivered by the
will hear the last tuned channel, provided that service provider. Programming content is
it can be received. subject to change.
Therefore, channel and categories shown
Switching on Sat mode in illustrations and descriptions contained
For important subscription information see in this manual may differ from the channels
Subscribing to satellite radio (Y page 141). and categories delivered by the service
provider.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 143
Audio system 143
Selecting program category Tuning in channels using channel search

function
i The channels are categorized. Categories
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd when the main
allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
a certain type of program. area in the basic menu is active.
Depending on the direction in which the
Satellite radio channels are split up into controller is being slid or rotated, the
categories such as News, Sports, Rock, or system searches upward or downward and
Country, if available. The category list is stops at the next subscribed channel.
Controls in detail
sorted alphabetically.
or
X Calling up category list: $
X Press button E or F on audio control
(repeatedly, if necessary) Q Cat. unit.
or Depending on the pressed button, the
X In Sat mode, slide XVY or rotate cVd until system searches upward or downward and
Cat. is highlighted and press W. stops at the next subscribed channel.
The category list appears.
i Which channels are available depends on
X Selecting a category: Slide ZV or rotate
which channels you have subscribed to and
cVd. the program category you have selected
X Setting the selected category: Press W. (Y page 143). For tuning in channels you
The selected program category can also use the buttons on the
(alphabetical order) will appear in the audio multifunction steering wheel, see Audio
display. The last tuned channel in the new menu (Y page 115).
category will begin to play.
Tuning in channels using manual channel
When searching, tuning in, or selecting number entry
from the channel list, the All Channels
option accesses all of your subscribed
channels. Q Enter Channel.
The menu for manual channel number entry
i When you select the category All appears.
Channels, you have access to all the or
channels you subscribed to, regardless of X In Sat mode, press button l on the
category.
keypad in audio control unit briefly.
X Channel number entry with keypad:
Tuning in channels
Enter desired channel number with buttons
You have the following selection options: k to x with the keypad in audio
Rthe channel search function control unit briefly.
Rthe manual channel number entry Further operation depends on whether the
selected channel number is valid or if the
Rthe channel list channel is included in your subscription.
Rthe channel presets X Exiting menu without making an entry:
Press button k in the center console
(Y page 129).
Channel number is valid and channel is
included in subscription: The audio system
tunes in the channel entered.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 144
144 Audio system
Channel number is invalid: The message

Invalid Channel appears in the audio
display.
X The message disappears automatically or
press W to close the message.
Channel number is valid, but channel is
not included in subscription: The message
Call SIRIUS to activate: appears
Controls in detail
(Y page 141). X Select station in memory by rotating cVd

X Press W to close the message in the audio or sliding ZV.
display. X Press W to confirm.
or
Tuning in channels using the satellite
X Press desired station button k to
radio channel list
x, with the keypad in audio control unit
briefly.
Q Channel List.
The audio system tunes in the corresponding
The channel list appears. The dot # in
channel as long as it is included in your
front of a list entry indicates the currently
subscription and is still available.
selected channel.
If the channel is not included in your
X Select channel by rotating cVd or sliding
subscription, the message Call SIRIUS to
ZV. activate: appears.
X Press W to confirm.
If the channel is no longer available, the
i The contents of the channel list depends message Invalid Channel appears.
on which channels are included in your X Closing message: Press W.
subscription and which program category
you have selected (Y page 143). The Storing channels
channel list contains only the preview
channel if the satellite radio service has not i There are ten preset positions available.
been subscribed to.
Tuning in channels using satellite radio or
channel presets X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Presets.
Presets. In both cases, the preset menu will appear in
or the audio display. The dot # in front of a
X Press W when the main area is selected in preset position indicates that the channel
Sat mode. currently selected is stored there.
The preset menu appears. The dot # in
front of a preset position indicates that this
is the channel currently selected and being
listened to.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 145
Audio system 145
X Closing screen manually: Slide XVY,

rotate cVd, press W or press button
k.
Calling SIRIUS XM Service Center

i It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS XM
Service Center if, for example:
Controls in detail
X Selecting a preset position: Slide ZV or RYou want to cancel the subscription or
rotate cVd. re-subscribe at a later date.
X Storing a preset position: Press and hold RYou have questions regarding billing.
W until you hear a signal. RYou sell the car.
The channel is stored.
or X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Sat
X Press and hold desired channel button Q Service.
k to x on keypad, until a brief signal The telephone number of the SIRIUS XM
tone sounds. Service Center and the twelve-digit
The channel is stored. electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the
particular receiver are displayed.
X Closing screen: Slide XVY, press W or
Displaying information
press button k.
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Info (if
available).
Channel update
i If the program provider does not offer any The service provider may conduct a channel
information, the Info menu item cannot be update.
selected. During the update, the message Updating
You will see a screen that may contain the Channels... will appear on the audio
following information: display.
Rthe selected program category The last tuned channel will be muted until the
update is completed. You cannot operate the
Rthe selected channel satellite radio during the update.
Rthe artist of the track currently being played After completion of the update, the satellite
Rthe name of the current track radio basic menu will appear. The last tuned
station will begin to play. If not available, the
i SIRIUS XM determines what information next subscribed channel starts beginning
is displayed on the screen. If the with channel 1.
information is too long, the audio system
shortens it. Sound settings
With the telephone keypad button m you For sound adjustment see:
can call up a popup screen, if provided by RVolume (Y page 133)
SIRIUS XM, that shows the artist and title of
the current track being played on the selected RBalance control and fader (Y page 133)
channel. RBass and treble control (Y page 133)
The popup screen disappears automatically. RSurround sound (Y page 134)
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 146
146 Audio system
CD and MP3 mode Safety precautions
Submenu overview G Warning!

The single CD player and the CD changer are
Menu Submenu classified as a Class 1 laser product. You must
not open the casing. There is a risk of
CD or MP3 Normal Track
exposure to invisible laser radiation if you
Sequence
open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or
Controls in detail
Random Tracks damaged.

The single CD player and the CD changer do
Random Folders
not contain any parts that you are able to
(MP3 mode only)
maintain yourself. For safety reasons, all
AUX maintenance work must be carried out by
qualified technicians.
Track list (Audio Select track (CD
CD) or Folder mode only) G Warning!
(MP3) In order to avoid distraction which could lead
Select folder and/or
tracks (MP3 mode to an accident, the driver should insert or
only) eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
operate the audio system only if permitted by
Changer Select medium road, weather and traffic conditions.
(with CD-changer Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
only) Eject all
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Fill empty slots covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
Sound Treble 14 m) every second.
Bass General notes

Balance/Fader i Audio CDs with copy protection are not
Surround sound compatible with the CD audio standard and
therefore may not be able to be played by
the single CD player and/or the CD
i The components and operating principles changer. There may be playback problems
of the audio system can be found on when playing copied discs.
(Y page 126) and (Y page 131). There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing
The audio system is fitted with either a single software and writers available. This variety
CD drive or a CD changer. means that there is no guarantee that the
The single CD player and the CD changer can system will be able to play discs that you
play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 or have written/copied yourself.
WMA files. There may be playback problems if you use
The available menu options will vary CD-R or CD-RW type discs you have
depending on the equipment and the type of compiled yourself with a storage capacity
CD. of more than 700 MB. These CDs are not
compatible with currently applicable
standards.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 147
Audio system 147
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the CDs, instead, wipe it in a straight line starting in
they can become warped due to the heat the center and moving outward. Do not use
that develops in the CD drive or CD solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for
changer. cleaning.
In certain situations, the CDs can then no RReplace the CD in its case after use.
longer be ejected and cause damage to the RProtect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.
drive. Such damage is not covered by the
Controls in detail
Notes about MP3 mode
! Your CD drive or CD changer has been
The single CD player and the CD changer can
designed to play CDs which correspond to play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3/
the IEC 60908 standard. You can therefore WMA files.
only use CDs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm. i Due to the branched data structure,
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. ones that playback of the first track may be delayed
have data on both sides (one side with DVD slightly.
data, the other side with audio data), they Permissible media for MP3/WMA files
cannot be ejected and will damage the
RCD-R
drive.
RCD-RW
Do not use CDs with a diameter of 8 cm.
Attempting to play CDs with a diameter of Permissible file systems
8 cm or playing such CDs with an adapter may
RISO9660/Joliet for CDs
cause damage to the CD drive. Such damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Multisession CDs
Warranty.
For multisession CDs, the first session type
Only use round discs with a diameter of of the CD determines how the audio system
12 cm. will process the CD.
Should excessively high or low temperatures For example, if the first session type is
occur while in CD changer mode, a message according to the audio CD standard and the
will appear in the display, and the CD will be second session type is according to the data
muted until the temperature has reached an CD standard containing MP3/WMA tracks,
acceptable level for the system to continue the audio system will treat the CD as a
operation. conventional audio CD. This means that it is
Tips on handling CDs only possible to access the audio CD tracks.
ROnly touch the CDs at the edges. Access to the MP3/WMA tracks is not
possible.
RHandle CDs carefully to prevent Similarly, if the first session type is according
interference during playback. to the data CD standard containing MP3/
RAvoid scratches, fingerprints and dust on WMA tracks and the second session type is
the CDs. according to the audio CD standard, the audio
RThe CDs must only be labeled using pens system will treat the CD as a data CD. This
specially designed for this purpose. means that it is only possible to access the
MP3/WMA tracks. Access to the audio CD
RClean CDs from time to time with a tracks is not possible.
commercially available cleaning cloth.
Never wipe the CD in a circular motion;
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 148
148 Audio system
File structure on a disc i The audio system does not support ID3
When you create an MP3/WMA disc, the tags.
MP3/WMA tracks can be organized in
Supported file formats
folders.
Supported file formats are:
A folder can also contain other folders.
RMP3
A disc can contain a maximum of 255 folders.
A folder can contain a maximum of 255 tracks RWMA
Controls in detail
and 255 subfolders.

i If music files of file formats other than
A data medium may contain a maximum of MP3 are stored together with MP3 files on
500 tracks. one disc, the loading process may take
The directory depth may not exceed a longer.
maximum of 8 levels. The system will ignore
files in lower levels. Permissible MP3 formats
The audio system supports the MPEG1 Audio
Track and folder names Layer 3 format.
When you create an MP3/WMA disc, you can
assign names to the MP3/WMA tracks and i This format is generally known as MP3.
folders. Permissible bit and sampling rates are:
The audio system uses these names for the Rfixed and variable bit rates up to
corresponding display in MP3 mode. Empty 320 kbit/s
folders or folders which contain data other
RSampling rates of 24 kHz 48 kHz
than MP3/WMA tracks are not displayed by
the audio system. i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of at
If MP3/WMA files are saved in the root least 128 kbit/s or higher and a sampling
directory itself (uppermost directory on rate of at least 44.1 kHz or higher. Smaller
storage medium), the root directory will also rates can cause a noticeable deterioration
be treated as a folder. The audio system will in sound quality. This is especially the case
then show the name of the root directory as if you have the surround sound function
the folder name. activated.
You must observe the following when
assigning track names: WMA (Windows Media Audio)
RTrack names must have at least one Windows Media Audio (WMA) is an audio
character. data compression technology developed by
Microsoft.
RTrack names must have the extension
mp3 or wma. The audio system supports the following
types of audio files:
RThere must be a period between the track Rfixed bit rates of 5 kbit/s up to
name and the extension. 384 kbit/s
Example of a correct track name: RSampling rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Track1.mp3
The audio system does not support the
The audio system is unable to recognize an following WMA files:
MP3/WMA track if RDRM (Digital Rights Management) coded
Rthere is no period between the track title files
and the extension Rvariable bit rates
Rthere is no extension
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 149
Audio system 149
RWMA Pro
R5.1 Surround
Notes on copyright
The music tracks that you create and play
back in the MP3 and WMA format are
generally subject to copyright protection in
accordance with the applicable international
Controls in detail
and national regulations. G Warning!
In many countries, reproductions are not In order to avoid distraction which could lead
permitted without the prior consent of the to an accident, the driver should insert or
copyright holder, not even for private use. eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
Make sure you know the applicable copyright operate the audio system only if permitted by
regulations and that you comply with these. road, weather and traffic conditions.
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
own compositions and recordings, or the (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
copyright holder has granted you permission, covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
these restrictions do not apply. 14 m) every second.
Operating the CD player ! If a CD is already loaded, it must be

ejected before inserting a new CD.
The single CD drive and the CD changer have
Inserting a second CD in the slot with
the same controls.
another CD still loaded will cause damage
to the CD drive which is not covered by the
X Ejecting a CD: Press load/eject
button ;.
The system ejects the CD.
The message Please Remove Disc
appears in the display.
X Remove CD from CD slot :.
The message NO Disc appears in the
display.
: CD slot
; Load/eject button i If you do not take the CD out of the CD
= Forward slot : within approximately 15 seconds,
? Rewind the system automatically pulls the CD back
in and plays it.
Single CD player If you change modes (e.g. Radio) when the
X Switching to CD mode: Press button CD is being ejected, the CD will be
h on the audio control unit. reinserted automatically as well.
The CD display appears when you switch to If a CD is pulled back in, press load/eject
CD mode. CDs start to play automatically button ; again; the CD will then be
when they are inserted. The following ejected.
message will appear if no CD is inserted.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 150
150 Audio system
i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this neither side is printed, the side to be played
side must face upwards when loaded. If must face downwards.
neither side is printed, the side to be played If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or
must face downwards. cannot be read, Disc Unreadable
If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or appears in the display.
cannot be read, Disc Unreadable
X Loading an individual magazine
compartment: Press load/eject
Controls in detail
X Loading a CD: Insert CD into CD slot :. button ;.

The system automatically pulls the CD into A menu indicates which magazine
the CD slot : and starts to play the audio compartments are currently loaded. The
CD if it has been inserted correctly and is first available magazine compartment is
permissible. indicated by a red number.
X Press desired button k to p in the
CD changer keypad to select a magazine compartment.
The CD changer can hold up to a total of six or
audio CDs.
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd to select a
X Switching to CD mode: Press button
magazine compartment.
h on the audio control unit. X Press W to confirm.
The CD changer display appears when you
The CD changer will switch to the selected
switch to CD changer mode. If there is a CD
magazine compartment. The message
in one of the magazine trays, it will start to
Please Wait... appears in the display.
play automatically. The following message
will appear if no CDs are inserted. i Only insert a CD after the audio system
has prompted you to do so with the
message Please Insert Disc <X>. Only
insert one CD per magazine compartment.
X Insert CD into CD slot : (Y page 149).
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD
into CD slot : and places it in the selected
Loading Disc <X> appears in the display.
G Warning!
i The loading process may take a while,
In order to avoid distraction which could lead depending on the type of disc. If you do not
to an accident, the driver should insert or insert a disc, the display will switch back to
eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and the CD changer menu after approximately
operate the audio system only if permitted by 20 seconds.
road, weather and traffic conditions.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
14 m) every second.
i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this

side must face upwards when loaded. If
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 151
Audio system 151
X Press button h, or load/eject compartment. The message Please

button ; (Y page 149) on the audio Insert Disc <X> appears in the display.
control unit to finish the loading process. X Repeat the steps until all compartments
The CD changer plays the disc if it has been have been loaded.
inserted correctly and is permissible. X Press load/eject button ; on the audio
X Interrupting loading procedure: Press control unit to finish the loading process.
load/eject button ; again. The CD changer plays the last loaded disc
or if it has been inserted correctly and is
Controls in detail
X Press button k in the center console permissible.
(Y page 129). X Interrupting loading procedure: Press
load/eject button ; again.
X Filling an empty magazine
compartment: Press load/eject or
button ;. X Press button k in the center console
A menu indicates which magazine (Y page 129).

compartments are currently loaded. The The loading process has not been
first available magazine compartment is completed, the audio system will play the
indicated by a red number. last inserted CD.
Ejecting CDs from CD changer

G Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could lead
to an accident, the driver should insert or
eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
operate the audio system only if permitted by
road, weather and traffic conditions.
X Slide V to select the menu bar. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd the audio (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
controller to select Fill Empty Slots.
14 m) every second.
X Press the audio controller W.
The message Please Insert Disc <X> i If you eject a CD while another is being
played, the audio system interrupts
i Only insert a CD after the audio system playback.
has prompted you to do so with the X Ejecting one CD: Press load/eject
message Please Insert Disc <X>. Only button ;.
insert one CD per magazine compartment.
The magazine menu with active main area
X Insert CD into CD slot :. appears in the audio display. The magazine
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD compartment with the current CD is
into CD slot : and places it in an empty highlighted.
Please Wait... appears in the display. If
the CD is loaded, the CD changer will
switch to the next empty magazine
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 152
152 Audio system
X Remove the CD from CD slot :.

The CD changer switches to the next
occupied magazine compartment and
ejects the CD.
If you do not remove the CD from CD
slot :, the CD changer will automatically
pull the CD back in after a short while.
Controls in detail
i If audio source is changed during eject

X Press desired button k to p in the procedure (e.g. pressing button $) the
keypad to select a magazine compartment. eject procedure will be aborted and any
or CDs being ejected will be drawn back into
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd the audio the unit.
controller to select the desired CD. X Repeat the last step until the magazine is
X Press W to confirm. empty.
The CD is ejected.
X Remove the CD from CD slot :. Selecting a CD
If you do not remove the CD from the CD
X h Q Changer
slot, the CD changer will automatically pull
the CD back in after a short while. The list with the magazine compartments
appears in the audio display. The magazine
i If audio source is changed during eject compartment with the current CD is
procedure (e.g. pressing button $) the highlighted.
eject procedure will be aborted and any X Slide ZV or rotate cVd the audio
CDs being ejected will be drawn back into controller to select the desired CD.
the unit. X Press W to confirm.
X Ejecting all CDs: Press load/eject
button ;. Playing CDs
The magazine menu with active main area
appears in the audio display. The magazine i The following section is valid for the single
compartment with the current CD is CD player and the CD changer. The
highlighted. illustrations show the audio display of the
CD changer.
Additional button functions
In CD mode, you can use two additional
buttons on the telephone keypad:
m displays information about the track, if
it has been saved with the track on the
CD.
l enables you to enter the track number
X Slide V to select the menu bar. directly.
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd the audio
controller to select Eject All.
The CDs are ejected one after the other.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 153
Audio system 153
Example display in audio CD mode Selecting a track

X Skipping forwards or backwards to a
track: Rotate cVd or slide XVY.
or
X Briefly press button E or F on audio
control unit.
i Skipping forwards through the tracks
Controls in detail
skips to the next track. Skipping backwards
: Track number through the tracks skips to the beginning
; Track name (only if saved on the disc) of the current track if the track has been
= Elapsed track time
playing for more than 8 seconds. If the
track has been playing for less than
? Disc name (only if saved on the disc) 8 seconds, it skips to the previous track. If
A Disc number (CD changer only) you have switched on the Random Tracks
B Disc type playback option, the order of the tracks is
random.
Example display in MP3 mode
X Selecting from the track list: h Q
Track List.
or
The track list appears. In MP3 mode, the
track list of the current folder appears. The
dot # indicates the current track.
X Select a track by rotating cVd or sliding
: Track number ZV.
; File name X Press W to confirm.
= Elapsed track time
? Current playback option (visible if
i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks
activated) in alphabetical order.
A Folder name (only if saved on the disc) Fast forward/rewind
B Disc number (CD changer only) X Select main area.
C Disc type X Slide and hold XVY until desired position
Pause function is reached.

or
X Pausing playback: Press button 8
X Press and hold button E or F on
briefly.
audio control unit.
X Continuing playback: Press button 8
again briefly. Selecting a folder
i This function is only available in audio
MP3 mode.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 154
154 Audio system
X h Q Folder. i The Normal Track Sequence option is

or automatically activated when you select a
X Press W when the main area is selected. different medium. If an option is activated,
it remains activated after the audio system
The track list of the current folder appears.
is switched on/off.
X Move to the superordinate folder: Select
the U symbol.
The display now shows the next higher Audio AUX mode
Controls in detail
folder level.
X Selecting a folder: Slide ZV or rotate
An external audio source can be connected
to the AUX socket of the audio system. Please
cVd the audio controller, to select the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
desired folder. for more information.
You will see the tracks in the folder.
i Due to the large amount of information on
an MP3 disc it may take a while before all
folder and track information becomes
available. During this time the folder list
may be unavailable or slow.
X Select a track by sliding ZV or rotating
cVd the audio controller.
The track is played and the corresponding AUX socket : is designed for a 3.5 mm
folder is now the active folder. stereo jack (3-pin), for devices with dedicated
analog audio output or connection via
Playback options headphone port, e.g. MP3 or tape player.
The following options are available:
G Warning!
RNormal Track Sequence
Operating an external audio source while the
Tracks playback in the order on the disc
vehicle is in motion will distract you. You may
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
not notice changing road and/or traffic
RRandom Tracks conditions which may cause an accident.
Tracks playback in a random order (e.g. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
track 3, 8, 5, etc.). (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
RRandom Folder (in MP3 mode only) covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
Tracks in the active folder and any 14 m) every second.
subfolders playback in random order. For your safety and the safety of others, pull
X Selecting an option: h Q CD/MP3. over to a safe location and stop before
operating an external audio source.
The option list appears. A dot # indicates
which option is switched on.
Calling up AUX mode
X Select an option and press W.
The option is switched on. For all options G Warning!
except Normal Track Sequence, you will Due to the different volumes of the external
see a corresponding indicator in the main audio sources, system messages of the
area.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 155
Audio system 155
vehicle may be much louder. You may need to X Select Volume in AUX mode.
disable these system messages or adjust the The selection list appears. The dot #
volume of these messages manually. indicates the currently selected setting.
X Selecting audio AUX mode:

Press button h repeatedly until the
main menu for AUX operation appears.
or
Controls in detail
X In CD mode: Select CD/MP3 Q Aux.
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium in
the external audio source is heard, provided
it is connected and switched to playback. : Default setting
i Please refer to the relevant operating ; Volume boost
guide for operation of the external audio
source. Switch back to CD mode
The following settings can be made in the X Press button h.
audio AUX mode: or
RVolume (Y page 133) X Select Back To Disc in the audio AUX
RBalance control and fader (Y page 133) menu.
RBass and treble control (Y page 133)
RSurround sound (Y page 134) Telephone
i The volume of external audio sources is Safety precautions
extremely variable. It is possible that a
device connected as an external audio G Warning!
source will sound quieter or louder in the Please do not forget that your primary
vehicle or that the usual maximum volume responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A drivers
cannot be achieved. On certain devices the attention to the road must always be his/her
volume can be set separately. In this case, primary focus when driving. For your safety
start at a moderate volume and increase it and the safety of others, we recommend that
slowly. In this way, you can determine you pull over to a safe location and stop
whether the system is capable of playback before placing or taking a telephone call.
without distortion, even at high volume. If you choose to use the mobile phone9 while
Volume adjustment for the audio device driving, please use the hands-free device and
only use the mobile phone when road,
You can increase the volume for the AUX weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
socket in case the internal volume of the jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
connected audio device is too low. Use the mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
setting Boost for such devices.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
You should set the system back to (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Standard before connecting a different audio covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
device to the AUX socket. 14 m) every second.
9 Observe all legal requirements.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 156
156 Audio system
i The functions and services available to With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the
you while using the mobile phone depend hands-free device and receive electronic
on your service provider and the type of business cards (vCards) via the Bluetooth
mobile phone you are using. Also see interface.
separate operating manual of your mobile
phone for instructions on how to use your Calls disconnected while the vehicle is in
mobile phone. motion
Interruptions to the connection may occur if
When the mobile phone is connected via the
Controls in detail
Rthere is insufficient mobile network

Bluetooth interface to the audio system, you
can operate the mobile phone using the coverage
following devices: Ryou move from one mobile network
RAudio system (Y page 165) transmitter/receiver area (mobile network
- Audio controller cell) into another and no channels are free
or the cell is full
- Audio control unit
Ryou are using a SIM card that is not
RButtons 6 and ~ on the compatible with the available network
multifunction steering wheel (Y page 110) Rwhen using a mobile phone with
RMobile phone keypad or similar input Twincard, the mobile phone is
device simultaneously logged into the network
Please note that these functions are only with the second SIM card
available with Mercedes-Benz approved Operating options
mobile phones.
i The components and operating principles
TEL Menu of the audio system can be found on
(Y page 126) and (Y page 131).
Menu Function When the mobile phone is connected via the
Telephone Bluetooth Phones Bluetooth interface to the audio system, you
can operate the mobile phone using the
Receive Business following devices:
Card(s) (vCards) RButtons 6 and ~ and keypad on
Delete external data audio control unit (Y page 127)
RAudio controller in center console
Name Phone book
(Y page 129)
Call lists Call Lists or Mic On/ RMultifunction steering wheel (Y page 110)
Microphone off/ Mic Off
on Please note that these functions are only
Delete Call Lists available with Mercedes-Benz approved
mobile phones. Please contact an authorized
General notes Mercedes-Benz Center for information on
features available for your mobile phone of
Making calls via Bluetooth interface choice.
The audio system telephone function via the i In order for the functions described in this
Bluetooth interface is available in
section to work correctly, the Bluetooth
conjunction with a Bluetooth enabled telephone must be linked to the audio
mobile phone.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 157
Audio system 157
system. Please make sure any other RIf the mobile phone is locked.
Bluetooth device linked with the mobile RIf the mobile phone has not yet acquired a
phone is switched off before you use the network signal.
telephone functions with the audio system.
The mobile phone automatically tries to log
Changes or modifications not expressly into a network. If no network is available,
approved by the party responsible for you will also not be able to make a 911
compliance could void the users authority to emergency call. If you attempt to make an
operate the equipment. outgoing call, the No Service message will
Controls in detail
The head unit internal Bluetooth transmitter appear for a short while.
must not be co-located or operated in RIf you switch off the audio system in the
conjunction with any other antenna or middle of a call, e.g. by switching off the
transmitter. ignition, that call will be cut off. You can
This equipment complies with FCC/IC prevent this from happening as follows:
radiation exposure limits set forth for - Switch the mobile phone to private
uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC mode before switching the audio
radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in system off (see mobile phone operating
Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the instructions).
IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that it is deemed to comply without testing of Activating the mobile phone
specific absorption ratio (SAR).
Prerequisites for the mobile phone
Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptions
For making calls using the audio system via
and illustrations in this section refer to the
the Bluetooth interface, you will need a
audio system.
Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
Caller ID Your mobile phone must support the
The audio system can display the telephone Bluetooth hands-free profile 1.0 or higher to
number and the name of the caller, e.g. for an make or receive calls (see mobile phone
incoming call and also in other menus or operating instructions).
displays.
i For further information on suitable mobile
For the telephone number to be displayed,
the caller must transmit their telephone phones and connecting Bluetooth-
number. Otherwise Unknown will be shown on enabled mobile phones to the audio system
the audio display. Rvisit www.mbusa-mobile.com
This is also the case for name displays. For Rcall the Mercedes-Benz Customer
this, the telephone number and the name of Assistance Center at
the caller must also be saved in the telephone 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
book. (1-800-367-6372) (in the USA)
Functional restrictions Rcall Customer Service at
You will not be able to use the mobile phone, 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
or you may have to wait a while, in the
following situations: Activating Bluetooth
RIf X Switch on the mobile phone (see mobile
the mobile phone is switched off.
phone operating instructions).
RIf the mobile phone is not connected via the
X Enter the PIN (not necessary with some
Bluetooth interface to the audio system.
mobile phones or network).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 158
158 Audio system
X Activate Bluetooth connection on the Searching for a mobile phone

mobile phone (see mobile phone operating X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones
instructions). Q Update.
X Press button % on the audio control unit The audio system searches for up to 10
to call up the telephone mode. suitable Bluetooth telephones within
range and enters them into the telephone
i On certain mobile phones, not only you
list.
will have to activate the Bluetooth
Authorized Bluetooth telephones will be
Controls in detail
function but in addition, your own device

must be made "visible" for other devices. identified by a telephone-symbol L in front
of the list entry once the telephone list has
Each Bluetooth device has a Bluetooth
been updated. The symbol will be grayed
device name. It is recommended to give
out if the authorized mobile phone is not
your mobile phone a personal name, by
which you can clearly recognize your located within the Bluetooth range.
mobile phone. i The duration of the search procedure
depends on the number and type of
i If the Bluetooth function on the audio
Bluetooth telephones. The search may
system is disabled, the message
take a few minutes.
Bluetooth not activated in system
settings appears. i If the telephone list is already full
X Activate Bluetooth connection on the (15 entries), you must de-authorize one of
audio system (Y page 135). the authorized devices (Y page 160), and
start the search again. Otherwise a new
X i Q System Q Activate
device you are looking for will not appear
Bluetooth. in the list.
You have activated or deactivated
If the audio system does not find your
Bluetooth. A checkmark appears when mobile phone, external authorization may
Bluetooth is activated. be necessary (Y page 159).
Registering a mobile phone Authorizing a Bluetooth device

(authorizing) X Select the desired unauthorized device
from the telephone list by pushing the
When you use your mobile phone in
audio controller.
conjunction with the audio system for the first
time, you must register (authorize) it. or
X Select Options Q Authorize.
It is possible to register up to 15 mobile
phones. The connection is always established The input menu for the passcode appears.
to the last activated mobile phones in signal
range. When you authorize a new mobile
phone, it is activated automatically. You can
switch between the authorized mobile
phones.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 159
Audio system 159
i The passcode is any one- to sixteen-digit X Enter the same passcode on the mobile
number, which you can set yourself. For the phone as you did on the audio system.
quality of coding of the connection it is
recommend to use a passcode of at least i You may need to confirm the authorizing
four digits. You must enter the same on the mobile phone. Check your mobile
passcode into the audio system and the phone display.
device to be authorized. Also refer to the If the message Authorization
operating instructions of the mobile phone. Procedure Unsuccessful appears on the
Controls in detail
audio system display, you may have
On the audio system, you can enter the
exceeded the preset period for
passcode via the digits in the on-screen menu
authorization. Repeat the process.
bar or via the telephone keypad in the audio
control unit. The device is authorized. You can now make
With the audio controller: calls via the audio system hands-free device
using the authorized mobile phone.
X Entering passcode: Select the digits in the
menu bar one by one, by sliding XVY or External authorization
rotating cVd the audio controller.
If the audio system cannot find your mobile
X Press W to confirm each digit.
phone, this may be due to special security
X Confirming passcode: Select in the settings on your mobile phone. In this case,
menu bar and press W to confirm. you can check whether, conversely, your
X Deleting digits: Select 2 in the menu mobile phone can find the audio system. The
bar and briefly press W to delete one digit, audio systems Bluetooth device name is
or press and hold W to delete all entered MB Bluetooth.
digits. X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones
X Canceling entry: Press button k in the Q Update Q Options Q External
center console (Y page 129). Authorization.
The message Ready for External
With keypad on audio control unit:
Authorization appears.
X Entering passcode: Press the desired X Start Bluetooth search procedure on the
numbers on the keypad.
mobile phone (see mobile phone operating
X Confirming passcode: Press button
instructions).
6 or button m in the audio control X Select the audio system (MB Bluetooth)
unit to confirm. at your mobile phone.
X Deleting digits: Briefly press button
X When prompted to do so, enter the
2 in the audio control unit to delete one passcode on the mobile phone and then on
number, or press and hold button 2 to the audio system.
delete all entered numbers.
X Canceling entry: Press button k in the
Displaying details on a mobile phone
center console (Y page 129).
X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones.
Entering passcode into the mobile phone X Select the mobile phone from the list.
If a Bluetooth connection is established
successfully, you will be prompted to enter a
code into the mobile phone (see mobile
phone operating instructions).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 160
160 Audio system
X Select Options Q Details. A dot # in front of the entry, indicates the

The details screen for the device is shown current active mobile phone in the phone
in the audio display. list.
X Closing details screen: Slide XVY, rotate
cVd or press W, or press button k. Receiving business cards
You can import business cards (vCards) into
De-authorizing a Bluetooth device the address book from external Bluetooth
Controls in detail
X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones. devices (Y page 162).

X Select authorized device.
TEL-Basic display
X Select Options Q De-Authorize.
X Press button % on the audio control unit
A prompt appears asking whether you
really want to de-authorize this device. to call up the telephone mode.
X Select Yes or No. When the connected mobile phone is ready
If you select Yes, the device will be de- for operation, the display will look similar like
authorized. this:
i If you de-authorize a device which has

been authorized in the past and which is not
detected in the search, this device will no
longer be displayed in the device list.
Devices which have been authorized in the
past but which are not detected in the
search are either not switched on or not in
the vehicle.
The following information is displayed in the
status bar:
Activating another mobile phone
RActual time: 04:38
If you have several authorized mobile phones,
RBluetooth device name of the connected
you can switch between the individual mobile
phones. mobile phone, in this case: blue_mobile.
RMobile phone network signal strength
i You cannot switch to another authorized
mobile phone during a call. r. This information will only be shown
with suitable mobile phones.
When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is
automatically activated. Only one mobile The bars indicate the current signal
phone can be active at a time. strength of the mobile phone network for
reception. Optimum reception is indicated
X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones.
by all bars full. All bars empty indicates very
X Select an authorized mobile phone from poor or no reception.
the list. RReceiver symbol 6 or ~. The
receiver symbol indicates whether a call is
The selected mobile phone will be searched being connected or is in progress:
for and connected if it is located in the ~ - not active
Bluetooth range and Bluetooth is
activated on the corresponding device.
The selected mobile phone is activated.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 161
Audio system 161
RREADY indicates that a call is possible. Consult the separate mobile phone operating
RNO SERVICE indicates that the mobile instructions that came with your mobile
network is not available. phone for information on how to place a
911 emergency call on the mobile phone.
The following conditions must be met for a
Setting transmit and receive volume
911 emergency call via the audio system:
i These settings should normally not be RMobile phone must be switched on.
changed as the factory settings are
Controls in detail
RThe corresponding mobile
matched to most mobile phones. Find out
about the optimum settings for your mobile communications network must be
phone at an authorized Mercedes-Benz available.
Center. i Emergency calls may not be possible with
all telephone networks or if certain network
i Changes may result in significant
services and/or telephone functions are
impairments to the transmission quality. active. Check with your local service
These settings may not be changed during providers and mobile phone instructions.
an active phone call.
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones. will have to initiate rescue measures yourself.
X Select a mobile phone from the list.
X Select Options Q Reception Volume or Placing a 911 emergency call using
Transmission Volume. audio control unit with the mobile
X Setting the volume: Slide ZV or rotate
phone unlocked
cVd the audio controller. X Press button % to switch to telephone
The volume bar moves up or down. mode.
X Exiting menu: Press W or slide XVY the X Enter 911 using the number keypad on the
audio controller or press button k. audio control unit.
X Press button 6.
or
Emergency calls 911 X Press W for dialing to begin.
i The 911 emergency call system is a Connecting... appears in the audio

public service. Using it without due cause display while the mobile phone establishes
is a criminal offense. the connection.
X Wait until the emergency call center
i This function places a call to the local answers, then describe the emergency.
911 provider. It does not initiate a Tele
Aid call. i Depending on the phone type, if no SIM
card is inserted in a GSM mobile phone or
The following describes how to dial a 911 if there is no service on a CDMA mobile
emergency call using the audio system head phone, NO SERVICE may appear in the
unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile audio display. In that case, you only can
phone is connected via the Bluetooth make an emergency call on the mobile
interface to the audio system. Unless phone itself, without the use of the audio
otherwise specified, the descriptions refer to control unit.
the audio system head unit.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 162
162 Audio system
Placing a 911 emergency call with the business cards (vCards), see the operating
mobile phone locked instructions of the mobile phone).
The audio system imports the data for the
i If the mobile phone is locked, you only can business cards and displays the number of
make an emergency call on the mobile business cards received.
phone itself, without the use of the audio
control unit. i Select Back or switch to a different mode
to abort reception.
Controls in detail
X Ending reception: Press W.

Phone book
or
You can save telephone numbers in the audio X Press button k in the center console
systems phone book.
(Y page 129).
i These entries are retained even if you use
the audio system with another mobile Deleting external Data
phone. You should delete these entries
X % Q Tel Q Delete External
before handing over or selling your vehicle.
Data.
Receiving business cards (vCards) A prompt appears asking whether the data
should be deleted.
You can import business cards (vCards) from X Select Yes or No.
external Bluetooth phones into your audio If you select Yes all personal data are then
systems phone book. To do this: deleted from the phone book.
RBluetooth must be activated on the audio
system and on the external Bluetooth Opening the phone book
phone (see the operating instructions of
X % Q Name.
the mobile phone).
Entries in the phone book are displayed in
RThe external Bluetooth phone must be alphabetical order. The search speller is
able to send vCards via Bluetooth (see the active when more multiple entries are
operating instructions of the mobile available. The search speller appears on
phone). the lower edge of the display.
RThe external Bluetooth phone in the You can use the search speller to reduce the
vehicle must be switched on and number of entries you need to make.
authorized.
i If you switch to a different mode while
vCards are being received (e.g., press
button $), reception of vCards will be
aborted.
X % Q Tel Q Receive Business
Card(s).
X Press W to confirm. Symbol G indicates that an entry contains
X Wait until the message Ready to more than one phone number. You can select
Receive - Received: 0 appears. these subentries (Y page 164).
X Importing: Start the data transfer on the
external Bluetooth phone (Export
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 163
Audio system 163
X Switching from the search speller to X Select the characters for the required entry
the list: Slide ZV repeatedly. one after another.
or As soon as the selection has been
X
narrowed down to a single entry, the audio
Select .
system will switch to the list automatically.
X Switching from the list to the search
X Deleting an individual character: Select
speller: Press button k.
2 and briefly press W.
or
Controls in detail
Selecting an entry
X Press button 2 next to the audio
Selecting via search speller controller.
X If necessary, switch from the list to the
After entering each character or after each
search speller. deletion of a character, the closest
matching entry is given at the top of the list.
X Switching search speller character
X Deleting an entire entry: Select 2 and
set: Select C.
Depending on the previous setting, this press and hold W until the entire entry has
switches the search speller to letters with been deleted.
special characters or numbers with special or
characters. X Press and hold button 2 until the entire
X Entering characters: Slide XVY or rotate entry has been deleted.
cVd the audio controller to select the X Ending search: Switch from the search
characters for the required entry. speller to the list.
The first letters you enter determine the The top list entry is highlighted
first letters of the name you are looking for. automatically.
Selecting via list
The first entry containing the selected
initial letters is highlighted in the list. If X If necessary, switch from the search speller
there are a number of similar entries, the to the list.
next different character is displayed.
Example:
Phone book list

Entries with symbol :G have additional
In the example, the first letters of the names options available, e.g. more phone numbers.
Fisher, Bob and Fisher, Kim are the X Slide ZV or rotate cVd the audio
same. The first possible distinct letter is the controller until the desired entry is
B or the K. highlighted.
Therefore, B and K are offered as possibilities. X Press W to confirm and a call will be
initiated.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 164
164 Audio system
Selecting subentries Displaying details on an entry

X Select an entry with the symbol G from The audio system can also fully display an
the list and press W. abbreviated entry.
Symbol G changes to I and the X Select entry.
subentries appear.
X Slide VY to select Options.
X Select Details.
Controls in detail
A popup screen with the details of the

selected entry appears.
X Closing popup screen: Slide ZV, XVY,
rotate cVd, press W, or press button
2 or k.
: Phone book entry with subentries
Deleting entry
X Slide ZV or rotate cVd the audio
controller until the desired subentry is X Select entry.
highlighted. X Slide VY to select Options.
X Press W to confirm and a call will be X Press W to confirm.
initiated. X Select Delete.
Depending on the mobile phone and the You will be prompted to confirm that you
entries in the mobile phone book, the phone really want to delete the entry.
numbers are assigned to categories. The X Select Yes or No.
categories are indicated by category If you select Yes the actual entry is deleted
symbols. from the phone book.
Number category Display
Not classified Call lists
Home @ The audio system displays the calls received
Work \ (including missed calls) or made during phone
mode in their own lists.
i The particular menu item can only be
Phone category Display
selected if calls have already been received
Not classified or made from audio system.
Displaying missed calls in the audio system
Mobile
display is not possible with all mobile
Car ^ phones.
The control system displays the list of
Pager
dialed numbers in the multifunction
display.
i The audio systems call lists are not

synchronized with the call lists on your
mobile phone. If you make a call from your
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 165
Audio system 165
mobile phone and only use the audio X In the phone main menu select Call
systems hands-free device, these calls will Lists.
not be listed. X Select Delete Call Lists.
You will be prompted to confirm that you
Calling up the list really want to delete the entry. The
X % Q Call Lists. question Do you want to delete the
call lists appears in the display.
X Select Calls Received or Calls
X Select Yes or No.
Controls in detail
Dialed.
The appropriate list appears.
If you select Yes both lists are deleted.
Making calls
X Press button % on the audio control unit
to call up the telephone mode.
When the mobile phone is ready for
operation, the display will look similar like
this:
i If there is a symbol with a telephone
receiver in front of the phone number or the
name, then you have missed this call (e.g.
in the highlighted line of the following
figure).
Initiating an outgoing call

Entering phone number via the audio
control unit
You can enter numbers and special
X Slide ZV or rotate cVd the audio characters via the telephone keypad.
controller until the desired entry is
X Entering: Use x to s, m and
highlighted.
l to enter characters.
X Initiating call: Press button W or 6.
You can enter the * character by pressing
X To close the lists: Press button k.
button l once. You can enter the +
character by pressing button l once
Deleting call lists and then again within approx. 1.5 seconds.
X Initiating a call: Press button 6.
i The saved call lists are retained in the
audio system, even if you use the audio X Deleting individual digits: Briefly press
system with another mobile phone. For this button 2 in the audio control unit.
reason you should delete any call lists
before handing over or selling the vehicle.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 166
166 Audio system
X Deleting an entire entry: Press and hold or

button 2 until the entire entry has been X Press button ~.
deleted. X Initiating a call: Slide XVY or rotate
or cVd the audio controller to select .
X Press button ~. X Press W to confirm.
Entering phone number via the audio or

controller X Press button 6.
Controls in detail
In addition to the actual menu bar, the

Initiating a call to a phone book entry
telephone main menu features a second bar
containing numbers, the number menu. X % Q Name.
When the bar is active (highlighted), you can X Select entry (Y page 163).
select elements. X Press button 6 or W.
Initiating a call to a call list entry

X % Q Call Lists.
X Select Calls Received or Calls
Dialed.
The appropriate list appears.
X Select entry (Y page 164).
X Press button 6 or W.
X Entering digits: Slide XVY or rotate
cVd the audio controller to select the Redialing
required digit.
X Repeat the procedure, until you have select
all digits for the necessary phone number.
X Deleting individual digits: Slide XVY or
rotate cVd to select 2 and briefly press
W.
or
X Press button 2 next to the audio i In order to use the redial function, no
controller. numbers may have been entered.
X Deleting entire phone number: Slide X Press button 6.
XVY or rotate cVd to select 2, press or
and hold W until the phone number has X Select and press W.
been deleted.
The dialed calls list appears. The call dialed
or last will be at the top of the list.
X Press and hold button 2 until the entire X Selecting a call: Slide ZV or rotate
entry has been deleted. cVd the audio controller until the desired
entry is highlighted.
X Initiating call: Press button 6 or W.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 167
Audio system 167
Aborting dial or ending a call X Rejecting: Press button ~ on audio

X
control unit.
% Q and press W.
or
or
X Slide XV or rotate cVd the audio
X Press button ~ on the audio control unit
controller to select Reject, and press W
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
to confirm.
The call is rejected.
Rejecting or accepting calls
Controls in detail
If you have accepted the call using the audio
You will be notified of an incoming call by the control unit, audio controller, or the
ringing tone and a message on the display. multifunction steering wheel, the call will be
conducted via the hands-free system. The
i Depending on the mobile phone you are
volume of the call can be adjusted
using, the audio systems ringing tone may
(Y page 133).
differ from the one you have set on your
mobile phone. You may hear Further operating functions can be found in
the Functions during a single-call section
Rthe ringing tone set on the mobile phone
(Y page 167).
Rthe audio systems preset ringing tone You can also accept a call if the audio display
Rthe audio systems preset ringing tone is showing a screen other than the telephone
and the ringing tone set on the mobile mode screen. After accepting the call, the
phone display switches to the phone display. Once
the call is over, the display for the previous
If the callers name and number are among mode will appear again.
the entries in the audio systems phone book
and the caller has not withheld this
information, it will appear on the display. If Functions during a single call
the caller withholds this information, you will
see: Switching hands-free microphone on or
off
The menu bar changes when you make or
receive a call. Instead of the Call Lists
menu item, Mic Off or Mic On will appear.
X Switching off: Select Mic Off.
The following message will flash up on the
display: The microphone is off.
When the microphone is switched off the
X Accepting: Press button 6 on audio symbol Q appears in the main area.
control unit or on the multifunction steering X Switching on: Select Mic On.
wheel. The following message will flash up on the
or display: The microphone is on.
X Press W. The microphone is switched on and the
symbol Q disappears in the main area.
i You can also switch the microphone on or
off by pressing button 8.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 168
168 Driving systems
Sending DTMF tones Cruise control

i This function is not possible with all The cruise control maintains the speed you
mobile phones. set for your vehicle automatically.
Answering machines or other devices can be The use of the cruise control is recommended
controlled via DTMF tones, e.g. for remote for driving at a constant speed for extended
query functions. periods of time.
X Transmitting individual characters:
Controls in detail
During a call select the required

characters.
or
X Press the corresponding button on the
audio control unit.
Every selected character is transmitted
immediately.
X Transmitting a phone number of a
phone book entry as a sequence of
characters: Select Name. The currently set speed or last set speed
X Select the desired phone book entry. (Resume function) appears in the
The entry is transmitted immediately as a multifunction display for approximately
sequence of characters. 5 seconds. The corresponding cruise control
X Switching back to call display: Select speed segments : from the selected speed
Back. to the vehicle maximum speed in the
multifunction display are illuminated.
i The cruise control should not be activated
Driving systems during off-road driving.
Introduction G Warning!
This section describes the following driving The cruise control is a convenience system
systems of your vehicle: designed to assist the driver during vehicle
RCruise
operation. The driver is and must always
control
remain responsible for the vehicles speed
RHill-start assist system and for safe brake operation.
RAll-wheel drive (4MATIC) Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
RParktronic system and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a constant speed.
RRear view camera RThe use of the cruise control can be
The driving safety systems ABS, Adaptive dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
Brake, BAS, EBP and ESP are described in traffic because conditions do not allow safe
the Safety and security section driving at a constant speed.
(Y page 59). RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 169
Driving systems 169
changes in tire traction can result in wheel Setting current speed

spin and loss of control. X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
RDeactivate the cruise control when driving speed.
in fog. X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
The Resume function should only be direction of arrow : or press in direction
operated if the driver is fully aware of the of arrow ;.
previously set speed and wishes to resume X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Controls in detail
this particular preset speed. pedal.
G Warning! i On uphill grades, the cruise control may

The cruise control brakes automatically so not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
that the set speed is not exceeded. the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicles brake system. In addition, on
longer downhill grades the automatic
transmission will downshift automatically.
Canceling cruise control

or
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
: Setting current or higher speed direction of arrow =.
; Setting current or lower speed The last set speed is stored for later use.
= Canceling the cruise control The last stored speed is deleted from memory
? Activating the cruise control or resuming when the engine is turned off.
to last set speed The cruise control switches off automatically
when you depress the brake pedal or you
Activating cruise control engage the parking brake. In this case, the
cruise control speed segments in the
You can activate the cruise control at a
multifunction display will go out.
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control also switches off
You cannot activate the cruise control
automatically when
Rwhen you brake Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake (30 km/h)
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park Rthe ESP is in operation
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
position N
Rthe ESP is switched off with the ESP
switch
Rthe ESP is switched off or has switched off
due to a malfunction
Rthe ESP has switched off due to a
malfunction
The vehicle speed displayed in the
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
setting for the cruise control system. neutral position N while driving
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 170
170 Driving systems
The cruise control speed segments in the X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
multifunction display goes out and an lever up to the resistance point in direction
acoustic warning will sound. Observe of arrow :.
additional messages in the multifunction X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
display that may appear. control lever down to the resistance point
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not in direction of arrow ;.
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief X Release the cruise control lever.
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Controls in detail
control will resume the last set speed. accelerate or decelerate.
Changing the set speed Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:

10 km/h) increments
G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment i The set speed value is increased or
until the vehicle has made the necessary decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
adjustments. increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down past the
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
resistance point.
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration lever up past the resistance point in
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ direction of arrow :.
or serious injury to you and others. X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
You can increase or decrease the set speed control lever down past the resistance
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in point in direction of arrow ;.
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments. X Release the cruise control lever.
When you use the cruise control lever to The new speed is set and the vehicle will
decelerate, the brake system will brake the accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
vehicle automatically if the engines braking it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. has reached the set speed.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:

Setting stored speed (Resume
1 km/h) increments
function)
i The set speed value is increased or
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) G Warning!
increments each time you lift or press the The set speed stored in memory should only
cruise control lever up or down to the be set again if prevailing road conditions and
resistance point. legal speed limits permit. Possible
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 171
Driving systems 171
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in All-wheel drive (4MATIC)

direction of arrow ?.
In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC),
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
both axles are powered at all times when the
set and stored.
vehicle is being operated. The 4MATIC
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
improves traction in conjunction with the
pedal.
ESP (Y page 61) and the Electronic Traction
The last stored speed is deleted from memory System (ETS/4-ETS) (Y page 62).
when the engine is turned off.
Controls in detail
G Warning!
If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient
Hill-start assist system traction:
On uphill grades, the hill-start assist system RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as
maintains the pressure in the brake system possible.
for approximately 1 second after you have RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can pedal.
start off smoothly without the vehicle moving
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
immediately after releasing the brake pedal.
prevailing road conditions.
G Warning! Failure to observe these guidelines could
The hill-start assist system is not designed to cause the vehicle to skid.
function as a parking brake. It does not
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents
prevent the vehicle from moving when parked
resulting from excessive speed.
on an incline.
Always engage the parking brake in addition ! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so
to shifting the automatic transmission into
could damage the transfer case, which is
park position P.
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the
ground. Observe instructions for towing the
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
position D or reverse gear R.
X Release the brake pedal. ! Only conduct operational or performance
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
The hill-start assist system is inactive tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
otherwise seriously damage the brake
grades system and/or the transfer case which is
Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
position N Warranty.
Rwith the parking brake engaged i In winter operation, the maximum
Rif the ESP has switched off due to a effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
malfunction achieved with winter tires (Y page 241) or
snow chains as required.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 172
172 Driving systems
Parktronic system (Parking Assist) G Warning!

The Parktronic system is an electronic The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
parking aid with ultrasonic sensors designed not intended to, nor does it replace, the need
to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. for extreme care. The responsibility during
The Parktronic system indicates the relative parking and other critical maneuvers always
distance between the vehicle and an obstacle remains with the driver.
visually and audibly.
G Warning!
Controls in detail
The Parktronic system is activated

Make sure no persons or animals are in or
automatically when
near the area in which you are parking/
Ryou switch on the ignition maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
and injured.
Ryou release the parking brake
! Special attention must be paid to objects
and
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
position D, reverse gear R, or neutral elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
position N objects may not be detected by the system
The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds and can damage the vehicle.
above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At During parking maneuvers, pay special
lower speeds, the Parktronic system attention to objects located above or below
activates again. the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
The Parktronic system also deactivates when painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
you shift the automatic transmission into Parktronic system will not detect such
park position P or engage the parking brake. objects at close range and damage to your
The Parktronic system monitors the vehicle or the object may result.
surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
rear bumper.
jackhammers) may impair the operation of
the Parktronic system.
Range of the sensors
Example illustration, sensors in the front bumper

To function properly, sensors : must be free
of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
sensors : regularly. Be careful not to
scratch or damage sensors :, see Cleaning
the driving systems sensors (Y page 254).
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 173
Driving systems 173
Controls in detail
Front area warning indicators
Front sensors
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) Rear area warning indicators
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for left
If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle side : and right side ; of the vehicle. The
in this range, all the distance warning Parktronic system is ready to measure when
segments illuminate and you hear a warning the yellow readiness indicators = are
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the illuminated.
minimum distance, the actual distance may The current transmission position determines
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic which warning indicator will be activated.
system.
Current Warning indicator
Warning indicators transmission
position
Visual signals indicate the relative distance
between the sensors and an obstacle. D Front area activated
R or N Front and rear area
activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one or

more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 174
174 Driving systems
RFront area: An intermittent acoustic electrical connection between your vehicle

warning will sound as the first red distance and the trailer you are about to tow.
segment illuminates and a constant ! The distance between the sensors in the
acoustic warning lasting a maximum of
bumpers and an obstacle is referred to as
2 seconds will sound for the second red
the minimum range of the Parktronic. A
distance segment. The signal is canceled
trailer hitch will reduce the distance to an
when the automatic transmission is shifted
obstacle. Keep this in mind to avoid any
into park position P or the parking brake is
damage.
Controls in detail
engaged.
RRear area: An intermittent acoustic Parktronic system malfunction
warning will sound as the first red distance
segment illuminates and a constant There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
acoustic warning lasting a maximum of system, if only the red distance segments
2 seconds will sound for the second red illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds.
distance segment. The signal is canceled The Parktronic system will switch off
when the automatic transmission is shifted automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
into drive position D, or park position P, or lamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.
the parking brake is engaged. X Have the Parktronic system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
Switching the Parktronic system on/ as possible.
off If only the red distance segments illuminate
and no acoustic warning sounds, the
The Parktronic system switches on Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,
automatically when the ignition is switched ice, snow and slush). Another cause could be
on. interference from other radio or ultrasonic
signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers). The Parktronic system will
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and
indicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch :
comes on.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(Y page 254).
or
X Switching off: Press Parktronic X Check the Parktronic system operation at
switch :. another location to rule out interference
Indicator lamp ; comes on. from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch :
again.
Rear view camera
Trailer towing The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
The area behind the vehicle appears in the
The rear Parktronic sensors will be
COMAND system display as a mirror image,
deactivated when you have established the
like in the rear view mirror.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 175
Driving systems 175
In addition, the rear view camera contains Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
guidelines to help you with driving in reverse. e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from
the cold (lens condensation)
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered
near the area in which you are parking/ Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be In this case, have the position and setting
injured. of the camera checked by a qualified
Controls in detail
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
G Warning!
recommends that you contact a Mercedes-
The rear view camera is only an aid and may Benz Center for this purpose.
display obstacles
Do not use the rear view camera in these
Rfrom a distorted perspective situations. Otherwise you could injure
Rinaccurately yourself or others and/or damage property
Rmay not display obstacles at all including your vehicle while parking/
maneuvering.
The rear view camera does not relieve you of
the responsibility to be cautious. Take care G Warning!
and pay careful attention. The rear view Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if
camera may not show objects which are you are color-blind or have impaired color
Rvery close to the rear bumper vision.
Runder the rear bumper Only use rear view camera if you can see and
distinguish all colored guidelines shown by
Rabove the tailgate handle rear view camera on the COMAND system
You are responsible for safety at all times and display.
must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
G Warning!
The rear view camera either will not function
or will not function to its full capability if
Rthe tailgate is open
Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy

Rit is night or you are parking/maneuvering Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice,
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark snow, and slush to function properly. Clean
Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white the camera lens regularly. Being careful not
light to scratch or damage the camera lens, see
Cleaning the rear view camera lens
Rthe immediate surroundings are (Y page 254).
illuminated with fluorescent light (the
display may flicker)
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 176
176 Driving systems
Switching on or off
X Switching on: Switch on the ignition.
X Make sure the rear view camera is switched
on in the COMAND system. For more
information refer to separate COMAND
X Switch on the COMAND system.
Controls in detail
X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse

gear R.
The COMAND system display will show the
area behind the vehicle with guidelines. Red guideline = indicates an approximate
distance of 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
G Warning! vehicle. Yellow guidelines ; indicate an
Please note that objects which do not touch approximate distance of 3 ft (1 m) from the
the ground may appear to be further away rear of the vehicle. Blue guidelines :
than they actually are, for example: indicate the approximate width required for
Rthe bumper of a vehicle parked behind you the vehicle.
Ra trailer hitch i The image from the rear view camera will
Rthe back of a truck
no longer be displayed if you select another
function on the COMAND system while
In such cases, you should not use the reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
guidelines to judge the distance. You may image again, disengage and reengage
misjudge the distance which increases the reverse gear R.
risk of impacting the objects.
X Switching off: Shift the automatic
Even when the object you approach is directly
on the ground do not approach the object any transmission into park position P, neutral
closer than the red guideline. position N, or drive position D.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 177
Climate control system 177
Climate control system

Control panel
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Controls in detail
Function Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature i Set the temperature to 72 (22). (Y page 180)
control, drivers side
; Climate control on/ i Switch on/off the climate control (Y page 179)
off system.
= on/off (USA (Y page 182)
only)
Adopting (Y page 183)
drivers side settings
for all zones (Canada
only)
? AC cooling on/off i Switch on/off the air conditioning. (Y page 179)
A Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the (Y page 182)
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
B Temperature i Set the temperature to 72 (22). (Y page 180)
control, passenger
side
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 178
178 Climate control system
Function Recommendation/Notes
C Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, (Y page 183)
e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows
can fog up due to lack of fresh air.
D Rear window (Y page 184)
defroster
Controls in detail
E Increasing air (Y page 182)

volume
F Decreasing air (Y page 182)
volume
G Display
H Air distribution (Y page 181)
I Air distribution and i Switch on the automatic mode. The (Y page 179)
air volume indicator lamp in button comes on.
(automatic mode)
Notes on climate control system The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 179) is
The climate control system is operational deactivated.
whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either G Warning!
the automatic or manual mode. The system Follow the recommended settings for heating
cools or heats the interior depending on the and cooling given on the following pages.
selected interior temperature. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
It can only function optimally when you are impairing visibility and endangering you and
driving with the windows and the tilt/sliding others.
panel closed.
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the windshield free of snow and debris.
passenger compartment through the air i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
distribution system. interior before driving off, see Summer
G Warning! opening feature (Y page 97). The climate
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) control will then adjust the interior
may require replacement of the filter before temperature to the set value much faster.
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 179
Deactivating the climate control Deactivating

system It is possible to deactivate the air
G Warning! conditioning. The interior air will then no
longer be cooled or dehumidified.
When the climate control system is
deactivated, the outside air supply and X Press button .
circulation are also deactivated. Only choose The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the The cooling function switches off after a
Controls in detail
windows could fog up, impairing visibility and short delay.
endangering you and others.
Activating
X Deactivating: Press button ^.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
X Reactivating: Press button ^. dehumidify the interior air with the air
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. conditioning.
The previous settings are once again in X Press button .
effect. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
or i The evaporator will be vented when the
X Press button . air conditioning has been in use.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. Approximately 1 hour after locking the
Air volume and air distribution are adjusted vehicle, the blower switches on
automatically. automatically. The blower will run for
30 minutes at its lowest level. The blower
noise is normal and not an indication of a
Air conditioning malfunction. When you unlock the vehicle
in the meantime, venting will be
The air conditioning is operational while the
interrupted. If the vehicle battery is low,
engine is running and cools the interior air to
automatic evaporator venting will not occur
the temperature set by the operator. In
in order to preserve the battery.
addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
Automatic mode
G Warning! When operating the climate control system in
If you deactivate the air conditioning, the automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
vehicle will not be cooled when weather air volume and air distribution are adjusted
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up automatically.
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
In automatic mode, cooling with
visibility and endanger you and others.
dehumidification is switched on. This function
can be switched off if necessary.
i Condensated water may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and G Warning!
not an indication of a malfunction. If you deactivate the air conditioning, the
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant vehicle will not be cooled when weather
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
are harmful to the ozone layer.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 180
more quickly. Window fogging may impair cold (depending on the set temperature). This
visibility and endanger you and others. may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
X Set the desired temperature Always keep sufficient distance between
(Y page 180). unprotected parts of the body and the air
X Activating: Press button . vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
Controls in detail
The air volume and air distribution are

area of unprotected skin.
adjusted automatically.
X Deactivating: Press button I, K or For best possible performance of the climate
_. control:
The indicator lamp in button goes out. X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
The automatic operation of air volume and windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
air distribution switches off. The symbols of any other debris.
air distribution or air volume appear in X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
display G (Y page 177). passenger compartment free from
X Adjust air distribution (Y page 181). obstruction.
X Adjust air volume (Y page 182).
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
Setting temperature
You can adjust the air temperature on each Center air vents
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting
in small increments, preferably starting at
72 (22).
You can adjust the air temperature on each

side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting
in small increments, preferably starting at
72 (22).
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature controls : and B : Left center air vent, adjustable
(Y page 177) slightly clockwise or ; Right center air vent, adjustable
counterclockwise. = Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable right center air vent
? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
Adjusting air vents adjustable left center air vent
G Warning! X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
When operating the climate control, the air and ? upward or downward.
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 181
Side air vents
Controls in detail
: Thumbwheel
Example illustration drivers side ; Air vent

: Left side defroster air vent, fixed X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel :
; Left side air vent, adjustable clockwise or counterclockwise.
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left side air vent Rear center console air vents
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel =
upward or downward.
Ventilated glove box

The glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents, when the climate control
system is activated. The level of airflow to the
glove box depends on the airflow and air
distribution settings. The temperature of the
air is approximately the same as that of the
air flowing from the center air vents. : Thumbwheel for air volume control for
rear center air vents
! Close the glove box air vent when heating
; Right rear center air vent, adjustable
the vehicle interior. Activate the air
conditioning (cooling function) when the = Left rear center air vent, adjustable
outside temperature is high. Otherwise,
temperature-sensitive items stored in the
glove box could be damaged. Adjusting air distribution
The symbols shown in display G
(Y page 177) on the climate control panel
represent the following functions:
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 182
Symbol Function i Keep this setting selected only until the

windshield or the front door windows are
Directs air through the clear again.
defroster air vents to the
X Activating: Press button .
windshield and front door
windows The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The climate control switches to the following
P Directs air through the center functions automatically:
and side air vents
Controls in detail
Rcooling on to dehumidify
O Directs air to the footwells Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
N Directs air through the center power, depending on outside temperature
and side air vents and to the Rair flows onto the windshield and the front
footwells door windows
_ Directs air into the entire Rthe air recirculation mode is switched off
vehicle interior (Canada only)
i You can adjust the air volume when the
b Directs air through the center, front defroster is switched on.
side and defroster air vents to X Deactivating: Press button again.
the windshield and front door
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
windows (Canada only)
The previous settings are once again in
a Directs air through the effect. The cooling remains switched on.
defroster air vents to the The air recirculation remains switched off.
windshield and front door or
windows and to the footwells X Press button .
The indicator lamp in button goes out.
X Press button _ repeatedly until you Air volume and air distribution are adjusted
have select the desired setting and the automatically.
corresponding symbol is shown in display i To deactivate defrosting, you can also
G.
press button ^ or turn temperature
controls.
Adjusting air volume Windshield fogged on the outside
X Decreasing/increasing: Press button X Switch the windshield wipers on
I or K.
(Y page 93).
If the automatic mode of the climate control
is switched off:
Front defroster
X Press button _ repeatedly until one of
You can use this setting to defrost the the following symbols appears in display
windshield, for example if it is iced up. G (Y page 177) P or O.
You can also defog the windshield and the
front door windows.
Maximum cooling MAX COOL
MAX COOL is only available in U.S. vehicles.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 183
MAX COOL is only operational when the i The air recirculation mode is activated
engine is running. automatically at high outside
You can use this setting to provide the fastest temperatures.
possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when The indicator lamp in button g is not lit
windows and tilt/sliding panel are closed). when the air recirculation mode is switched
X Activating: Press button . on automatically.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. A quantity of outside air is added after
The climate control switches automatically to approximately 30 minutes.
Controls in detail
the following functions: X Deactivating: Press button g again.
Rmaximum cooling The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Rmaximum blowing power i The manually selected air recirculation
Rthe air recirculation mode is switched on mode is deactivated automatically:
X Deactivating: Press button again. Rafter5 minutes if the outside
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. temperature is below approximately
The previous settings are once again in 41 (5)
effect. Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
i To switch the maximum cooling function turned off
off, you can also press button ^, Rafter30 minutes if the outside
or . temperature is above approximately
41 (5)
Air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
Using driver-side settings for
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
passenger side
from the outside (e. g. before driving through This feature is only available in Canada
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of vehicles.
outside air and recirculates the air in the You can use the settings of the drivers side,
passenger compartment. such as temperature, air volume and air
G Warning! distribution, for the passenger side.
Fogged windows impair visibility, X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air
endangering you and others. If the windows volume and air distribution.
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the X Press button .
air recirculation mode immediately should The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
clear interior window fogging. If interior The driver-side settings are used for the
window fogging persists, make sure the air passenger side.
conditioning is activated, or press button
X Deactivating: Press button again.
.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
X Activating: Press button g.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 184
184 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Rear window defroster procedure, the roller sunblinds will stop and
retract slightly.
G Warning! The extending of the roller sunblinds can be
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be immediately halted by releasing the roof panel
removed from the rear window before driving. switch or, if the roof panel switch was moved
Visibility could otherwise be impaired, past the resistance point and released, by
endangering you and others. moving the roof panel switch in any direction.
Controls in detail
The rear window defroster uses a large

amount of power. To keep the battery drain
to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is switched off automatically after
some time of operation depending on the
outside temperature.
X Switching on: Press button .
X Switching off: Press button again. Roof panel switch
: Retracting
The rear window defroster switches off when
the battery voltage is too low. Too many ; Retracting
electrical consumers may be operating = Extending
simultaneously.
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
needed if required. X Retracting/Extending: Move the roof
panel switch to the resistance point in the
required direction of arrow :, ; or =
Panorama roof with power tilt/ until the roller sunblinds have reached their
sliding panel desired position.
X Express operation: Move the roof panel
Extending and retracting the roller switch past the resistance point in
sunblinds direction of arrow :, ; or = and release.
The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt/ The roller sunblinds retract/extend
sliding panel closed. The front and rear roller completely.
sunblind cannot be operated individually. X Stopping during express operation:
G Warning! Move the roof panel switch in any direction.

When extending the roller sunblinds, make
sure no one is in danger of being injured by
the extending procedure.
The roller sunblinds are equipped with the
function. If the movement of the roller
sunblinds is blocked during the extending
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 185
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 185
Opening and closing the panorama ! Please keep in mind that weather
roof with power tilt/sliding panel conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding panel
G Observe Safety notes, see page 53. when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
G Warning! the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
could be damaged which is not covered by
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding panel,
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
make sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
Controls in detail
The tilt/sliding panel is equipped with the
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked during the closing procedure,
the tilt/sliding panel will stop and open
slightly.
The tilt/sliding panel operates differently
when the roof panel switch is pressed and
held. See the Closing when the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked section in this chapter for
Roof panel switch
details.
: Raising
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding panel can be immediately halted by ; Opening
releasing the roof panel switch or, if the roof = Closing
panel switch was moved past the resistance The tilt/sliding panel only operates with the
point and released, by moving the roof panel roller sunblinds retracted.
switch in any direction.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
G Warning! panel using the SmartKey, see Summer
The panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel is opening feature (Y page 97) or see
made out of glass. In the event of an accident, Convenience closing feature
the glass may shatter. This may result in an (Y page 97).
opening in the roof. X Switch on the ignition.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
Opening
opening also presents a potential for injury for X Opening manually: Press and hold the
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as roof panel switch to the resistance point in
entire body parts or portions of them may direction of arrow ;.
protrude from the passenger compartment. X Release the roof panel switch when the
desired position is reached.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not X Express operation: To open the tilt/
transport any objects with sharp edges sliding panel completely, press the roof
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding panel. panel switch past the resistance point in
Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is direction of arrow ; and release.
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result X Stopping during express operation:
in malfunctions.
Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 186
186 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
i When the tilt/sliding panel is open, closing the tilt/sliding panel without
resonance noises may result in addition to automatic reversal function.
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger If the movement of the tilt/sliding panel is
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
noises, change the position of the tilt/ ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding panel will stop
sliding panel or open a window slightly. and open slightly.
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel has
Controls in detail
Raising stopped and opened because it was

X Raising manually: Press and hold the roof blocked, pull and hold the roof panel switch
panel switch to the resistance point in in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
direction of arrow :. panel is fully closed.
X Release the roof panel switch when the If the tilt/sliding panel is blocked again and
desired position is reached. opens slightly:
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/ X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel was
sliding panel completely, press the roof blocked and has opened, pull and hold the
panel switch past the resistance point in roof panel switch in direction of arrow =
direction of arrow : and release. until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
X Stopping during express operation: The tilt sliding panel closes without
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. automatic reversal function.
i Express raising is not available when the G Warning!
tilt/sliding panel is open. The tilt/sliding Pulling and holding the roof panel switch to
panel must be closed first. close the tilt/sliding panel immediately after
it had been blocked two times will cause the
Closing tilt/sliding panel to close without any reversal
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the roof function for as long as you hold the roof panel
panel switch to the resistance point in switch.
direction of arrow =.
X Release the roof panel switch when the
desired position is reached.
Synchronizing
X Express operation: To close the tilt/ The tilt/sliding panel and front roller
sliding panel completely, pull the roof panel sunblinds must be synchronized after a
switch past the resistance point in malfunction or if the tilt/sliding panel does
direction of arrow = and release. not open smoothly.
X Stopping during express operation: ! Do not attempt to open the tilt/sliding
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. panel before the tilt/sliding panel is
properly synchronized. The tilt/sliding
Closing when the tilt/sliding panel is panel could otherwise lock-up in the open
blocked position.
G Warning! If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed or
Make sure that nobody can become trapped synchronized, contact an authorized
and be seriously or even fatally injured when Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
Assistance.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 187
Loading and storing 187
X Switch on the ignition. Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
X Push and hold the roof panel switch in Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
direction of arrow ; (Y page 184) until the enter vehicle interior resulting in
roller sunblinds are fully retracted. unconsciousness and death.
X Push and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow ; until the tilt/sliding Load distribution
panel is opened approximately 4 inch
(10 cm).
Controls in detail
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow = for approximately
1 second.
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow = (Y page 184) until the
roller sunblinds are fully extended.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the weight
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
of the vehicle including:
direction of arrow = for approximately Rfuel
1 second.
Rtools
X Check the express operation feature of the
Rspare wheel
tilt/sliding panel (Y page 185).
If the tilt/sliding panel opens completely, Rinstalled accessories
the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat Rpassengers
the above steps.
Rluggage/cargo
It must never exceed the load limit and the

Loading and storing Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle. The load limit and the GVWR are
Loading instructions specified on the placard located on the
G Warning! drivers door B-pillar (Y page 227).
Always fasten items being carried as securely In addition, the load must be distributed so
as possible using cargo tie-down rings and that the weight on each axle never exceeds
fastening materials appropriate for the weight the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
and size of the load. front and rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden your vehicle are indicated on the certification
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around label located on the drivers door B-pillar
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to (Y page 227).
vehicle occupants unless the items are For more information, see Tire and Loading
securely fastened in the vehicle. Information (Y page 228).
To help avoid personal injury during a collision The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when vehicle depend greatly on the load
transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or distribution. It is therefore recommended to
cargo higher than the seat backrests. load the vehicle according to the illustration
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 188
188 Loading and storing
shown. The heaviest items are to be placed Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
towards the front of the vehicle. fragile objects may not be transported in the
Please pay attention to and comply with the parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
following instructions when loading the braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
vehicle and transporting cargo: thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
RAlways place items being carried against injury to vehicle occupants.
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
them as securely as possible. in the event of an accident.
Controls in detail
RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should Parcel nets are located in the front passenger
always be kept as low as possible against footwell and on the left trunk side wall.
front or rear seat backrests.
Cargo tie-down rings

Roof rack Your vehicle is equipped with four cargo tie-
For information about further roof rack down rings.
equipment, contact an authorized Mercedes- Always follow loading instructions
Benz Center. (Y page 187).
G Warning!
Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage
to the vehicle.
Follow the manufacturers installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
attached roof rack system or its load could
become detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
165 lb (75 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof Cargo tie-down rings, cargo compartment
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicle without the roof rack loaded.
Make sure
Ryou can raise the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel completely
Ryou can open the tailgate completely
Parcel nets
Cargo tie down ring, second-row footwell (Canada
G Warning! only)
Parcel nets are intended for storing light- Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
weight items only, such as road maps, mail, on all cargo tie-down rings : with a rope of
etc. sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 189
Hooks G Warning!
Three hooks are located in the cargo Always lock the seat backrest in its upright
compartment. position when the rear seat bench is
occupied, or the extended cargo volume is not
Use the hooks to secure light-weight items
in use.
only. The maximum permissible weight per
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg). Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
Controls in detail
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
transporting cargo.
G Warning!
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
Coat hooks on the tailgate Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in
G Warning! unconsciousness and death.
The tailgate may close if too great a load is
placed on the coat hooks. Folding rear seat backrest forward
You and/or others could be trapped and
injured.
Only use the coat hooks for light clothing.
X Insert the rear seat head restraints fully

(Y page 80).
X Pull left and/or right release handle ; in
direction of arrow.
The respective seat backrest : is
Expanding cargo volume released.
To expand the cargo volume, you can fold the X Fold the respective seat backrest :
left and right rear seat backrests. forward.
The two sections can be folded separately to X If necessary, move the drivers and/or front
enlarge the cargo volume. passenger seat forward (Y page 79).
X Adjust the front seats to desired position.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 190
Setting up rear seat backrest Cargo compartment cover blind

G Warning! ! With the cargo compartment cover blind
If a red indicator is visible with the seat installed, do not pile luggage higher than
backrest up, then the seat backrest is not the lower edges of the rear side windows.
properly locked into position.
Always lock seat backrest in its upright
position when rear seat bench is occupied, or
Controls in detail
the expanded cargo volume is not in use.

Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision X Rolling out: Pull out cargo compartment
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when cover blind : and hook left and right-hand
transporting cargo. sides into holders.
X Rolling up: Unhook cargo compartment
cover blind : and guide it forward.
X If necessary, move the drivers and/or front

passenger seat forward (Y page 79).
X Removing: Roll up cargo compartment
! Make sure that the seat belt is not cover blind :.
pinched when folding rear seat backrest.
X Press bottom right-hand side of handle ;
X Fold the respective seat backrest : to the left.
rearward until it engages. X Installing: Position cargo compartment
Red indicator ; is no longer visible. cover blind : at bore hole on the left-hand
X Adjust the rear seat head restraints, if side.
necessary (Y page 79). X Press handle ; to the right.
X Adjust the front seats to the desired
X Let cargo compartment cover blind :
position.
engage in corresponding recess.
X Make sure cargo compartment cover
blind : is securely fastened.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 191
Cargo net (Canada only) tie-down rings in the cargo compartment

(Y page 188).
G Warning!
X Open the hook and loop fasteners on the
Make sure the cargo net is properly engaged
cargo net package.
at top and bottom position and the tightening
X Roll out the cargo net.
belts are securely fastened.
X Unfold the cargo net.
Never use a damaged cargo net.
X Engage the upper cargo net bar.
Always use cargo net when transporting
Controls in detail
cargo. This helps to avoid personal injury from The cargo net bar must engage audibly.
smaller objects being thrown around in the
occupant compartment during a collision or Installing the cargo net
sudden maneuver.
The cargo net cannot prevent the movement
of large, heavier objects into the passenger
compartment in an accident. Such items must
be properly secured using the cargo tie-down
rings in the cargo compartment floor.
Passenger use of seats behind installed cargo
net is restricted because of the footwell being
taken up by the net.
Use of the cargo net is a particularly

important safety factor when the vehicle is Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar
loaded higher than the top of the seat
X Hang cargo net bar ; on holder : as
backrests with smaller objects. For your
safety, always use the cargo net when indicated by the arrow.
transporting cargo. X Push cargo net bar ; forward into
The cargo net can be installed behind the holder : in direction of arrow.
B-pillar or the C-pillar. X Engage cargo net bar.
The cargo net bar must engage audibly.
Pulling the cargo net tight
RWith the cargo volume expanded

(Y page 189), use holders : behind
B-pillars and the cargo tie-down rings
behind the front seats (Y page 188). Belt hook attached behind the front seats
RWithout the cargo volume expanded, use
holders ; behind C-pillars and the cargo
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 192
X Hook belt hook : into cargo tie-down storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
ring ; in direction of arrow. cargo in the cargo compartment if possible.
X Pull tightening belt = by the loose end in Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
direction of arrow until the cargo net is seat backrests.
pulled tight. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
X After driving a short distance, make sure to prevent stored objects from being thrown
the cargo net is still tight and, if necessary, about and injuring vehicle occupants during
pull it tight again.
Controls in detail
Rbraking
Rvehicle maneuvers
Loosening the cargo net
Ran accident
Glove box
Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX
socket or a media interface is located in the
glove box. For information on Audio AUX
mode, see (Y page 154) or on media
interface, see separate COMAND system
The glove box can be ventilated
(Y page 181).
Belt hook attached behind the front seats
X Loosen the tightening belt by pulling
buckle : upward in direction of arrow.
X Remove belt hook ; from cargo tie-down
ring =.
Removing and storing the cargo net

X Take cargo net bar ; (Y page 191) out of
holder : (Y page 191).
X Press the red button on the upper and lower
cargo net bar. X Opening: Pull glove box lid release :.
X Fold the cargo net. X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
X Roll up the cargo net. until it engages.
X Close the hook and loop fasteners on the
cargo net package. You can lock the glove box, e.g. when the
vehicle is in the shop for service.
The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
Front storage compartments with the mechanical key.
G Warning!
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 193
G Warning!
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo in the cargo compartment if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
Controls in detail
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
1 Glove box unlocked Rbraking
2 Glove box locked Rvehicle maneuvers
Ran accident
Front armrest storage compartments
i There is a small and a large storage

Rear armrest storage compartment
compartment located underneath the
armrest. The small storage compartment ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
can be removed for the purpose of against the armrest when it is folded down,
emptying. as you could otherwise damage it.
X Opening storage compartments: Press ! Before storing the armrest in the seat
button : or ;. backrest, close the storage compartment
The armrest opens to the left and the right cover.
side automatically.
X Closing storage compartments: Swing X Fold rear armrest ; down.
the left and/or right armrest backward
until it engages.
Rear storage compartments

A storage compartment is located in the front
of the rear seats.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 194
194
Controls in detail Loading and storing
X Opening: Pull release catch and swing the X Release securing hook = (located below
storage compartment cover : upward in the cargo compartment floor) from holder.
direction of arrow.
Storage compartments under cargo

compartment floor
G Warning!
If items are stored in the compartment, make
sure compartment is securely closed.
maneuvers, they could be thrown around
inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle
occupants. X Engage securing hook = on upper cargo
compartment lip ?.
i The storage compartments A and B can
be used to store small, light, and flat
objects.
! To prevent damage, always disengage the

securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
X Closing: Disengage the securing hook =
X Opening: Roll up cargo compartment
cover blind (Y page 190) and fold visible from upper cargo compartment lip ?.
part upward. X Engage securing hook = on holder
X Push in floor handle : as indicated by (located below the cargo compartment

arrow. floor).
X Pull floor handle : and swing cargo X Lower the cargo compartment floor ;.
compartment floor ; upward.

X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 195
Useful features 195
Useful features Cup holder in rear armrest

X Opening: Open rear armrest storage
Cup holders
compartment (Y page 193).
G Warning!
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
only use containers that fit into the cup
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
Controls in detail
not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
X Press release button :.
Limited Warranty.
Cup holder ; swings out and opens
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you automatically.
or others when contacted during braking, X Close rear armrest storage compartment.
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. X Closing: Open rear armrest storage
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup compartment (Y page 193).
holder may come loose during braking, X Swing cup holder ; backward until it
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be engages.
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects X Close rear armrest storage compartment.
thrown around in the vehicle interior may
cause an accident and/or serious personal ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
injury. against the armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
Cup holder in front center console
A cup holder : is located in the front center
Sun visors
console.
G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 196
196 Useful features
X Flip sun visor down.

X Lift up vanity mirror cover A.
Vanity mirror lamp : comes on.
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Controls in detail
i A storage compartment is located under

the ashtray insert.
: Vanity mirror lamp
; Mounting ! The storage compartment is not heat-
= Holder, e.g. for gas cards
proof. When smoking always make sure the
ashtray insert is present and properly
? Vanity mirror inserted.
A Vanity mirror cover
Glare through the windshield

X Flip sun visor down when you experience
glare.
Glare through a door window

X Close vanity mirror cover A if opened.
X Disengage sun visor from mounting ;.
X Pivot sun visor to the side.
X Opening: Press cover : forward until it
engages.
X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
insert ; on the grooved side and pull it up
and out in the direction indicated by
arrows.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
insert ; back into the frame until it
engages.
X Closing: Tap front of cover :.
X Adjust sun visor by pushing or pulling.
Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror lamp only functions when
the sun visor is engaged in mounting ;.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 197
Useful features 197
Rear center console ashtray
Controls in detail
X Open cover : (Y page 196).
X Opening: Pull at top of cover ;.
X Push in cigarette lighter ;.
X Removing ashtray insert: Push button
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
= to disengage ashtray insert : and
automatically when hot.
remove it.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
insert : down into the retainer until it Power outlets
engages.
12V Power outlets
The power outlets can be used to
Cigarette lighter accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
G Observe Safety notes, see page 53. (e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)
up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).
G Warning! If the engine is off and the power outlets :
Never touch the heating element or sides of are being used extensively, the vehicle
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the battery may become discharged.
knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you do
not injure themselves or start a fire with the Power outlet in glove box
hot cigarette lighter. X Open glove box (Y page 192).
If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is

being used extensively, the vehicle battery
may become discharged.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 198
198 Useful features
Power outlet in rear passenger a plug from the 115V AC socket. Do not use
compartment a damaged connection cable. The 115V AC
socket may not be connected to another
115V AC power source. Do not use converters
to a grounding plug with the 115V AC socket.
This could cause serious personal injury to
you and/or others.
G Warning!
Controls in detail
If the 115V AC socket is damaged or torn out

of the trim, do not use or touch the 115V AC
socket. Using a 115V AC socket that is
damaged or torn out of the trim could cause
X
serious personal injury to you and/or others.
Pull at top of cover ;.
Power outlet in cargo compartment
The 115V AC socket : provides an

alternating current of 115 volts, which
115V AC Socket enables you to connect small electrical
devices with a combined received power of
G Warning! 150 W at most. You can connect small
The 115V AC socket operates at high voltage. devices such as game consoles, mobile
Use the 115V AC socket in the vehicle with phone chargers, laptops, etc.
the same caution and prudence that you Prerequisites for operation:
exercise when using power outlets at home. RThe 12V power outlets in the second-row
Keep any fluids away from the 115V AC footwell and cargo compartment
socket. Do not clean the socket with fluids or (Y page 197) are operational.
tapered objects. Keep the 115V AC socket
RThe plug of the small device must be
cover in the closed position, when not in use.
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock inserted fully into 115V AC socket :.
and be seriously or even fatally injured. RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is within
the permissible voltage range.
G Warning!
RThe specified wattage of the small device
A device that you connect must have a
is identical or lower than the maximum
suitable plug that complies with U.S.
permissible wattage (150 W) of the 115V
standards. Never pull on the cable to unplug
AC socket :.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 199
Useful features 199
X Operation: Open cover =. i In order to receive an accurate reading in

X Switch on the ignition. the interior rear view mirror :, the
X Insert the plug of the small device into compass must be calibrated and the
115V AC socket :. magnetic field zone set.
LED ; comes on. X Calling up the compass: Press button
If LED ; does not come on, refer to the = briefly.
section on possible nonoperation causes. The compass displays the direction into
Controls in detail
X Switching off: Pull the plug out of 115V AC which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
socket :. NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.
X Compass adjustment: Determine your
Do not pull on the cable.
X Close cover =.
location on the basis of the following zone
maps.
Possible nonoperation causes:
RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is not
within the permissible voltage range.
X Start the engine.
RThe temperature of the DC/AC inverter is

temporarily too high.
X Pull the plug of the small device out of
115V AC socket : and plug it in again
after waiting a few minutes.
RSome small devices have a continuous
power rating of less than 150 W but a very
high switch-on current. Such devices will
not operate. When connecting such a
device, 115V AC socket : will not provide
power.
Zone map North America
If LED ; still does not come on, contact an
Compass
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 200
200 Useful features
X Press button = approximately 6 seconds

until symbol C appears in compass
display ;.
X Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of
between 3 mph (5 km/h) and 6 mph
(10 km/h).
When calibration was successful, the
current direction appears in compass
Controls in detail
display ;.
Tele Aid
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated and
Zone map South America operational, please press Information
X Press button = approximately 3 seconds. button to perform the acquaintance
The currently selected zone appears in call. Failure to complete either of these
compass display ;. steps may result in a system that is not
activated.
X Selecting zone: Press button = until the
If you have any questions regarding
desired zone is selected.
activation, please call the Customer
Do not press the button again until the
Assistance Center at
direction is indicated.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
X Compass calibration: Make sure you are
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada
in an area where you can drive a full circle only).
with your vehicle without disturbing traffic
in order to calibrate the compass. Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
In order to calibrate the compass properly,
and password in the mail. You may use this
mind the following:
password to access the Tele Aid section in
RCalibrate the compass in open terrain. Owners Online at www.mbusa.com (USA
Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines and only). The My Tele Aid section will give you
large antenna masts, for example, could access to account information, remote door
impair compass calibration. unlock and more.
RSwitch off electrical consumers (e.g. The Tele Aid system is available if
climate control, windshield wipers, or rear Rit has been activated and is operational.
window defroster). Activation requires a subscription for
RClose all doors and the cargo monitoring services, connection and
compartment. cellular air time
X Start the engine. Rvehicle battery power is available
Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass the
information on to the Customer Assistance
Center
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 201
Useful features 201
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button,
possible if the vehicle is able to receive Roadside Assistance button F, or
signals from the GPS satellite network and Information button remains
pass the information on to the Customer illuminated constantly in red after the
Assistance Center. system self-test.
RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative or
The Tele Aid system
Tele Aid Not Activated appears in the
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) multifunction display after the system self-
Controls in detail
The Tele Aid system consists of three types test
of response: If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
RAutomatic and manual emergency the system may not operate as expected. In
case of an emergency, help will have to be
RRoadside Assistance
summoned by other means.
RInformation
Have the system checked at the nearest
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the
Aid call do the following: Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
X Press button W or X on the
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only)
multifunction steering wheel. as soon as possible.
or
X Use the rotary control on the audio system Emergency calls
(Y page 133).
Be sure to check Owners Online at ! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for more subscriber agreement must be completed.
information and a description of all available To ensure your system is activated and
features. operational, please press Information
button to perform the acquaintance
System self-test call. Failure to complete either of these
steps may result in a system that is not
The system performs a self-test after you activated.
have switched on the ignition. If you have any questions regarding
G Warning! activation, please call the Customer
A malfunction in the system has been Assistance Center at
detected if any or all of the following 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
conditions occur: (USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does only).
not come on during the system self-test. An emergency call is initiated automatically
RThe indicator lamp in the Roadside following an accident in which the Emergency
Assistance button F does not come on Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags have
during the system self-test. deployed.
RThe indicator lamp in the Information i An automatically initiated Tele Aid
button does not come on during the emergency call cannot be canceled.
system self-test. An emergency call can also be initiated
manually (Y page 202).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 202
202 Useful features
Once the emergency call is in progress, the Initiating an emergency call manually
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
flash. The message Connecting Call
appears in the multifunction display and the
COMAND system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message
Call Connected appears in the
Controls in detail
All information relevant to the emergency,

such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location
system), vehicle model, identification number
and color are generated. X Briefly press on cover : to open.
A voice connection between the Customer X Press SOS button ; briefly.
Assistance Center and the occupants of the
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; will
vehicle will be established automatically soon
after the emergency call has been initiated. flash until the emergency call is concluded.
The Customer Assistance Center will attempt X Wait for a voice connection to the
to determine the nature of the emergency Customer Assistance Center.

more precisely, provided they can speak to X Close cover : after the emergency call is
an occupant of the vehicle. concluded.
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an G Warning!
ambulance will be sent to the vehicle If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
immediately. vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
G Warning! vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is do not wait for voice contact after you have
flashing continuously and there was no voice pressed the emergency button. Carefully
connection to the Customer Assistance leave the vehicle and move to a safe location.
Center established, then the Tele Aid system The Customer Assistance Center will
could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the automatically contact local emergency
relevant cellular phone network is not officials with the vehicles approximate
available). location if they receive an automatic SOS
signal and cannot make voice contact with the
The message Call Failed appears in the
vehicle occupants.
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds. X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
Should this occur, assistance must be the multifunction steering wheel.
summoned by other means.
or
X Press the respective button for ending a
i The 911 emergency call system is a
telephone call on the audio system or the
public service. Using it without due cause
COMAND system.
is a criminal offense.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 203
Useful features 203
Roadside Assistance button Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as

labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for
more information.
Sign and Drive services (USA only):
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with
the vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at no
Controls in detail
charge.
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside
Assistance button : is flashing
continuously and there was no voice
X Press and hold Roadside Assistance connection to the Customer Assistance
button : for longer than 2 seconds. Center established, then the Tele Aid
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside system could not initiate a Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance phone network is not available). The
button : will flash while the call is in message Call Failed appears in the
progress. The message Connecting multifunction display.
Call will appear in the multifunction
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
display and the audio system or the
the multifunction steering wheel.
COMAND system is muted.
or
When the connection is established, the
X Press the respective button for ending a
message Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will telephone call on the audio system or the
transmit data generating the vehicle COMAND system.
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular and Information button
GPS signals).
i The audio system or COMAND system
display indicates that a Tele Aid call is in
progress. While the call is connected you
can change to the navigation menu by
pressing the NAVI button on the COMAND
system. Spoken commands are not
available.
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established.
X Press and hold Information button : for
X Describe the nature of the need for
assistance. longer than 2 seconds.
A call to the Customer Assistance Center
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
will be initiated. The indicator lamp in
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Information button : will flash while the
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
call is in progress. The message
your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Connecting Call will appear in the
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 204
204 Useful features
multifunction display and the COMAND initiated emergency calls can only be
system is muted. terminated by a Customer Assistance Center
representative. All other calls can be
i The audio system or COMAND system terminated by pressing button ~ on the
display indicates that a Tele Aid call is in multifunction steering wheel or the
progress. While the call is connected you respective button for ending a telephone call
can change to the navigation menu by on the audio system or the COMAND system.
pressing the NAVI button on the COMAND
system. Spoken commands are not i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
Controls in detail
available. the audio system or the COMAND system

is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
A voice connection between the Customer
connected to the COMAND system. If you
Assistance Center representative and the
must use this phone, we recommend that
occupants of the vehicle will be established.
you use it only with the vehicle at a
Information regarding the operation of your
standstill in a safe location.
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
and services is available to you. Search & Send
For more details concerning the Tele Aid Search & Send is a navigation destination
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA address entry service. For more information
only), log in to Owners Online and visit the on Search & Send, refer to separate
My Tele Aid section to learn more. COMAND system operating instructions.
i If the indicator lamp in Information
Remote door unlock
button : is flashing continuously and
there was no voice connection to the In case you have locked your vehicle
Customer Assistance Center established, unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate and the reserve SmartKey is not available:
an Information call (e.g. the relevant X Contact the Customer Assistance Center
cellular phone network is not available). at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
The message Call Failed appears in the (1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or
multifunction display. 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only).
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on You will be asked to provide your password.
X Then return to your vehicle at the time
the multifunction steering wheel.
arranged with the Customer Assistance
or
Center and pull the trunk lid handle for a
X Press the respective button for ending a minimum of 20 seconds until the indicator
telephone call on the audio system or the lamp in the SOS button is flashing.
COMAND system. The message Connecting Call appears in
the multifunction display.
Call priority As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
If other service calls such as a Roadside via Internet in the My Tele Aid section of
Assistance call or Information call are active, Owners Online, using your ID and password
an emergency call is still possible. In this (USA only).
case, the emergency call will take priority and i The remote door unlock feature is
override all other active calls. available if the relevant cellular phone
The indicator lamp in the respective button network is available.
flashes until the call is concluded. Automatic
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 205
Useful features 205
The SOS button will flash and the message will contact the local law enforcement and
Connecting Call will appear in the you. The vehicles location will only be
multifunction display to indicate receipt of provided to law enforcement.
the door unlock command.
i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled
than 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system will
for more than 20 seconds before door
notify the Customer Assistance Center
unlock authorization was received by the
automatically.
Customer Assistance Center, you must
Controls in detail
wait 15 minutes before pulling the tailgate
recessed handle again.
Garage door opener
Remote door lock The integrated remote control can operate up
to three separately controlled devices
If you have forgotten to lock your vehicle and compatible with HomeLink or some other
are no longer near it, you can have it locked systems.
remotely through the Customer Assistance
Center. G Warning!
The vehicle can be remotely locked within Before programming the integrated remote
four days after the ignition has been switched control to a garage door opener or gate
off. operator, make sure people and objects are
X Contact the Customer Assistance Center out of the way of the device to prevent
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes potential harm or damage. When
(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or programming a garage door opener, the door
1-888-923-8367 (Canada only). moves up or down. When programming a gate
You will be asked to provide your password. operator, the gate opens or closes.
When you are inside your vehicle the next Do not use the integrated remote control with
time and switch on the ignition, the message any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
Tele Aid Doors locked by remote and reverse features as required by U.S.
control will appear on the multifunction federal safety standards (this includes any
display. garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
i The remote door lock feature is available cannot detect an object - signaling the door
if the relevant cellular phone network is to stop and reverse - does not meet current
available and data connection is possible. U.S. federal safety standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services park vehicle outside the garage.
In the event your vehicle was stolen: Do not run the engine while programming the
X
integrated remote control. Inhalation of
Report the incident to the police.
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
The police will issue a numbered incident
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),
report.
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness
X Pass this number on to the Customer
and possible death.
Assistance Center along with your
password.
The Customer Assistance Center will then
attempt to covertly contact the vehicles
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Customer Assistance Center
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 206
206 Useful features
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously

press hand-held remote control button B
and the desired signal transmitter button
(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons
until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
Controls in detail
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately

the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote been programmed, the indicator lamp will
control
start flashing after 20 seconds.
Hand-held remote control A is not part of the X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes
vehicle equipment.
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
Programming the integrated remote button and the signal transmitter button.
control
X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
X Step 1: Switch on the ignition. signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed observe indicator lamp :.
a signal transmitter button and wish to If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,
retain its programming, proceed to step 3. programming is complete and your device
or should activate when the respective signal
X If you are programming the integrated transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
remote control for the first time, press and and released.
hold the two outer signal transmitter i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for
buttons ; and ? and release them when
approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
indicator lamp : begins to flash after
a constant light, continue with
approximately 20 seconds. programming steps 8 through 12 as your
Do not hold the buttons for longer than garage door opener may be equipped with
30 seconds. the rolling code feature.
This procedure erases any previous
X Step 7: To program the remaining two
settings for all three channels and
initializes the memory. If you later wish to signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
program a second and/or third hand-held above starting with step 3.
transmitter to the remaining two signal Rolling code programming
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
and begin directly with step 3. To train a garage door opener (or other rolling
code devices) with the rolling code feature,
X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
follow these instructions after completing the
control A of the device you wish to train Programming portion (steps 1 through 6) of
approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away this text. For your convenience and to
from the signal transmitter button (;, = complete the procedure faster, you might
or ?) to be programmed, while keeping want to have someone assist you.
indicator lamp : in view.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 207
Useful features 207
X Step 8: Locate the training button on the If you live in Canada or if you are having
garage door opener motor head unit. difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
i Exact location and color of the button may programming procedures, replace step 4 with
vary by garage door opener brand. the following:
Depending on manufacturer, the training
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
button may also be referred to as learn or
smart button. If there is difficulty locating transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
the transmitting button, refer to the garage release this button until it has been
Controls in detail
door opener Operators Manual. successfully trained.
X While still holding down the signal
X Step 9: Press the training button on the
transmitter button (;, = or ?), cycle
garage door opener motor head unit.
your hand-held remote control button B
The training light is activated.
as follows: Press and hold button B for
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
following two steps.
and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.
X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly
Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the remote control until the frequency signal
programmed signal transmitter button (;, has been learned.
= or ?). Upon successful training, indicator
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly
release same signal transmitter button a after several seconds.
second time to complete the training X Proceed with programming step 5 and
process. step 6 to complete.
i Some garage door openers (or other i Upon completion of programming the
rolling code equipped devices) may require integrated remote control, make sure you
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and retain the hand-held remote control that
release the same signal transmitter button came with the garage door opener, gate
a third time to complete the training operator or other device. You may need it
process. for use in other vehicles, for future
X Step 12: Confirm the garage door programming of an integrated remote
operation by pressing the programmed control, or simply for continued use as a
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?). hand-held remote control to operate the
X Step 13: To program the remaining two
respective device in other situations.
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3. Reprogramming a single signal
transmitter button
Gate operator/Canadian programming To program a device using a signal
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter button previously trained, follow
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) these steps:
after several seconds of transmission which
may not be long enough for the integrated
signal transmitter to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 208
208 Useful features
X Switch on the ignition. control is compatible with radio-frequency

X Press and hold the desired signal devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not RPut a new battery in hand-held remote
release the button. control A. This will increase the likelihood
Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after of the hand-held remote control sending a
20 seconds. stronger and more accurate signal to the
X Without releasing the signal transmitter integrated remote control.
button, proceed with programming starting
Controls in detail
RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held

with step 3. remote control A at different lengths and
angles from the signal transmitter button
Operation of integrated remote control (;, = or ?) you are programming.
X Switch on the ignition. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
X Select and press the appropriate
angle at varying distances.
integrated signal transmitter button (;,
RIf another hand-held remote control is
= or ?) to activate the remote controlled
device. available for the same device, try the
The integrated remote control transmitter programming steps again using that other
continues to send the signal as long as the hand-held remote control. Make sure new
button is pressed up to 20 seconds. batteries are in the hand-held remote
control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten the antenna wire from the
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory garage door opener assembly. This may
help improve transmitting and/or receiving
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of signals.
all three channels.
i Certain types of garage door openers are
X Switch on the ignition. incompatible with the integrated remote
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal control. If you should experience further
transmitter buttons ; and ?, for difficulties with programming the
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator integrated remote control, contact an
lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
longer than 30 seconds. the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
The codes of all three channels are erased. Center (USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),
Programming tips or the HomeLink Hotline (USA only) at
1-800-355-3515, or the Customer Service
If you are having difficulty programming the (Canada only) at 1-800-387-0100.
integrated remote control, here are some
helpful tips:
RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote
control A (typically located on the reverse
side of the remote). The integrated remote
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 209
Useful features 209
i USA only: X Move the drivers seat as far to the rear as

This device complies with Part 15 of the possible.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
Controls in detail
operation.
X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer
i Canada only: pins :.
This device complies with RSS-210 of X Installing: Press floormat eyelets ; onto
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to retainer pins :.
and
operation of the device.
Floormat (drivers side)

G Warning!
Whenever you are using a floormat, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormat is securely fastened.
The floormat should always be securely
fastened using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormat is
securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A
loose floormat could slip and hinder proper
functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of each
other as this may impair pedal movement.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 210
210
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 211
211
Vehicle equipment ............................ 212

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 212
At the gas station ............................. 212
Engine compartment ........................ 214
Tires and wheels ............................... 218
Winter driving ................................... 241
Driving instructions .......................... 243
Maintenance ...................................... 250
Vehicle care ....................................... 251
Operation
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 212
212 At the gas station
Vehicle equipment At the gas station
i This Operators Manual describes all Refueling

features, standard or optional, potentially G Warning!
available for your vehicle at the time of Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
purchase. Please be aware that your It burns violently and can cause serious
vehicle might not be equipped with all personal injury.
features described in this manual.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline!
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Turn off the engine before refueling.
Operation
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
during the break-in period, the more satisfied contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
you will be with its performance later on. Direct skin contact with fuels and the
RDrive your vehicle during the first inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but health.
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
RDuring
G Warning!
this period, avoid heavy loads (full
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
throttle driving) and excessive engine
pressure in the system which could cause a
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
in each gear). spray back out when removing the fuel pump
RSelect C as the preferred shift program nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
(Y page 106) for the first 1 000 miles
(1 500 km). ! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine
RAvoid accelerating by kickdown. with diesel fuel. Even small amounts of
diesel fuel will damage the fuel system and
RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by
engine. Damage resulting from the use of
shifting to a lower gear using the gear non-approved fuels or fuel additives or
selector lever. resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel
RSelect gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 106) fuel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
only when driving at moderate speeds (for Limited Warranty.
hill driving).
! If you have accidentally filled the tank
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may
with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the
to the permissible maximum.
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into
All of the above instructions, as may apply to the fuel lines. The fuel system must be
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the drained completely. Contact an authorized
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine, Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel
the transfer case, the front differential or the system drained completely.
rear differential have been replaced.
i Always obey applicable speed limits. ! To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 213
At the gas station 213
Any noticeable irregularities in engine starter switch. The drivers door then can
operation should be repaired promptly. be closed again.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to point indicated by the arrow.
overheat and potentially start a fire. X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise.
X Take off fuel filler cap ;.
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 X Place fuel filler cap ; in direction of arrow
(average of 96 RON/86 MON). into holder =.
Information on gasoline quality can X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
normally be found on the fuel pump. Please
Operation
X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
contact gas station personnel in case
labels on the pump cannot be found. cuts out do not top off or overfill.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automatically until it audibly engages.
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
i In case the central locking system does vehicle. Otherwise the flap locking pin will
not release the fuel filler flap, see Fuel filler prevent closing the fuel filler flap.
flap (Y page 301). X Close fuel filler flap :.
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle towards the rear.
Check regularly and before a long trip
For information on quantities and
requirements of operating agents, see Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc. (Y page 334).
Check the following:
REngine oil level (Y page 215)
RTire inflation pressure (Y page 221)
RCoolant level (Y page 216)
RVehicle lighting (Y page 303)
X Turn off the engine. RWasher system and headlamp cleaning
system (Y page 217)
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel
filler cap open can cause the yellow engine RBrake fluid (Y page 217)
malfunction indicator lamp ; to
illuminate.
For more information, see also Practical
hints (Y page 295).
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
KEYLESS-GO: Open the drivers door. This
puts the starter switch in position 0, same
as with the SmartKey removed from the
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 214
214 Engine compartment
Engine compartment G Warning!

The engine is equipped with a transistorized
Hood
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
G Warning! it is dangerous to touch any components
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be socket) of the ignition system
forced open by passing air flow. Rwith the engine running
This could cause the hood to come loose and Rwhile starting the engine
injure you and/or others.
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
Operation
engine is turned manually

Opening
G Warning!
Do not open the hood when the engine is
overheated. You could be seriously injured.
Observe the coolant temperature gauge to
determine whether the engine may be
overheated. If you see flames or smoke
coming from the engine compartment, move
away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine
has cooled. If necessary, call the fire
department.
G Warning! X Pull hood lock release lever :.

You could be injured when the hood is open The hood is unlocked.
even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
! Never open the hood if the wiper arms are
prevent burns, let the engine cool completely folded forward away from the windshield.
before touching any components on the Otherwise the windshield wipers or the
vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety hood could be damaged.
precautions.
G Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or may even
restart after the engine has been turned off.
Stay clear of fan blades.
X Push handle ; under the hood upwards.

X Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood will be held open at shoulder
height by gas-filled struts automatically.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 215
Engine compartment 215
Closing at least 5 minutes with the engine turned

off
G Warning!
Rwith the engine not at operating
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
temperature, the vehicle must have been
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
stationary for at least 30 minutes with the
you do not close the hood on anyone.
engine turned off
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
before driving off. Do not continue driving if
the hood can no longer engage after an
Checking engine oil level
accident, for example. The hood could X Open the hood (Y page 214).
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
Operation
motion and injure you and/or others.
X Let the hood drop from a height of

approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point above
the headlamps, then it is not properly
closed. Open it again and let it drop with
somewhat greater force.
X Pull out oil dipstick :.
X Wipe oil dipstick : clean.
Engine oil
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the
The amount of oil your engine consumes will
dipstick guide tube.
depend on a number of factors, including
X Pull out oil dipstick : again after
driving style. Increased oil consumption can
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle approximately 3 seconds to obtain
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds. accurate reading.
Engine oil consumption checks should only The oil level is correct when it is between
be made after the vehicle break-in period. lower (min) mark = and upper (max)
mark ; of oil dipstick :.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies. i The filling quantity between the upper and
Using special additives not approved by lower marks on the oil dipstick is
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
X If necessary, add engine oil.
Warranty.
For more information on engine oil, see
For further information contact an
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
(Y page 334).
Notes on checking engine oil level For information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
When checking the oil level see the Practical hints section
Rthe vehicle must be parked on level ground (Y page 282).
Rwith the engine at operating temperature,
the vehicle must have been stationary for
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 216
216 Engine compartment
Adding engine oil Transmission fluid level

! Only use approved engine oils and oil The transmission fluid level does not need to
filters required for vehicles with be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
Maintenance System. For a listing of loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
approved engine oils and oil filters, contact authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or transmission.
visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The following will result in engine or
emission control system damage not Coolant level
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
Operation
Warranty: anticorrosion/antifreeze.
RUsing engine oils and oil filters of When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
specification other than those expressly must be parked on level ground, and the
required for the Maintenance System. coolant temperature must be below 158
RChanging of oil and oil filter at change (70).
intervals longer than those called for by G Warning!
the Maintenance System. In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
RUsing any oil additives. RUse extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
if the coolant temperature gauge indicates
that the coolant is overheated.
RDo not remove the cap on the coolant
expansion tank if the coolant temperature
is above 158 (70). Allow the engine to
cool down before removing the cap. The
coolant expansion tank contains hot fluid
and is under pressure.
RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap
X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck. approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise
X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not to relieve excess pressure. If opened
to overfill with oil. immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. will be blown out under pressure.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
entering the ground or water. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained may burn if it comes into contact with hot
off. It could cause damage to the engine engine parts.
and emission control system not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see the
Technical data section (Y page 334) and
(Y page 335).
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 217
Engine compartment 217
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for

plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in

the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be
damaged.
Fluid for the washer system, rear window
washer system, and the headlamp cleaning
Operation
X Using a rag, slowly open cap : system is supplied from the washer fluid
approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise reservoir.
to relieve excess pressure. During all seasons, use MB Windshield
X Continue turning cap : counterclockwise Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit. Mix it
and remove it. with water or premixed washer solvent/
antifreeze depending on the ambient
The coolant level is correct if the level
temperature (Y page 339).
Rforcold coolant: reaches marking bar
= in coolant expansion tank ;
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
X Add coolant as required.
X Screw cap : back on and tighten it.
For more information on coolant, see the
Technical data section (Y page 334) and
(Y page 337).
X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab

Washer system and headlamp
of cap : upwards.
cleaning system
X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.
G Warning! X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly cap : onto filler hole until it engages.
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
For more information, see Washer system
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
and headlamp cleaning system
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
(Y page 335).
burned.
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze Brake fluid level

where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could result ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
in damage to the washer system/fluid fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
reservoir. mark or below, have the brake system
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks
immediately. Contact an authorized
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 218
218 Tires and wheels
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do the tires have sustained damage, replace

not add brake fluid as this will not solve the them.
problem. For more information, see When replacing rims, only use genuine
Practical hints. Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
When checking the brake fluid level, the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
vehicle must be parked on level ground. in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
Operation
recognized on retreads. The operating safety

of the vehicle cannot be assured when such
tires are used.
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
The brake fluid level is correct when it is damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir. carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
Tires and wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
Safety notes nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center tire dealer for repairs.
for information on tested and recommended
rims and tires for summer and winter G Warning!
operation. They can also offer advice Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
concerning tire service and purchase. the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
G Warning! driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
Replace rims or tires with the same with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
designation, manufacturer and type as shown up and possibly a fire.
on the original part. For further information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If incorrectly sized rims and tires are Important guidelines
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
components can be damaged. Also, the
operating clearance of the wheels and the type and make.
tires may no longer be correct. RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
RBreak in new tires for approximately

G Warning!
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if RRegularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 219
Tires and wheels 219
inflation pressure loss and damage to the 1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient
tire beads. temperature, the driving speed and the tire
RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire load, the tire temperature changes. When the
inflation pressure and correct as required. tire temperature changes by 18 (10), the
tire inflation pressure will change by
RDo not allow your tires to wear down too approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are mind when checking tire inflation pressure on
sharply reduced at tread depths of less warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only
than 1/8 in (3 mm). if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the
RWhen replacing individual tires, you should current operating conditions. If you check the
mount new tires on the front wheels first tire inflation pressure when the tires are
Operation
(on vehicles with same-sized wheels all warm, the reading will be higher than the cold
around). reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to
match the specified cold tire inflation
pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
G Warning! pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Information placard on the drivers door
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires B-pillar.
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
affect handling and fuel economy, and are the best handling, tread life and riding
more likely to fail from being overheated. comfort.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can In addition to the Tire and Loading
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, Information placard on the drivers door
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) pressure label on the inside of the filler flap
because they are more likely to become for any additional information pertaining to
punctured or damaged by road debris, special driving situations. For more
potholes etc. information, see Important notes on tire
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the inflation pressure (Y page 220).
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire i Data shown on Tire and Loading
and Loading Information placard on the Information placard example are for
drivers door B-pillar. Overloading the tires illustration purposes only. Tire data are
can overheat them, possibly causing a specific to each vehicle and may vary from
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result data shown in the following illustration.
in handling or steering problems, or brake Refer to Tire and Loading Information
failure. placard on vehicle for actual data specific
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and to your vehicle.
Loading Information placard located on the
drivers door B-pillar (Y page 227).
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 220
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation

pressure for normal driving speeds.
Supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for different loading conditions of
the vehicle can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
For the tire inflation pressure for spare
wheels such as Minispare wheels or spare
Operation
wheels with collapsible tire refer to

The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
Rthe yellow label on the spare wheel rim
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle Rthe Technical data section of this
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed Operators Manual (Y page 333)
apply to the tires installed as original Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
equipment.
the drivers door B-pillar
Important notes on tire inflation Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflation
pressure pressures on the tire inflation pressure label
are valid for all approved, factory-equipped
G Warning! tires.
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly, i Data shown on tire inflation pressure
check the tires for punctures from foreign label examples are for illustration purposes
objects and/or whether air is leaking from the only. Tire inflation pressure data are
valves or from around the rim. specific to each vehicle and may vary from
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure data shown in the following illustrations.
are also increased while driving, depending Refer to the tire inflation pressure label on
on the driving speed and the tire load. vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
If you are not sure about the proper tire
inflation pressure, contact an authorized
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for all
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the approved, factory equipped tires
value for speeds above 100 mph When a tire size is specified, the tire inflation
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation pressure that follows applies to that
pressure label located on the inside of the particular tire size only.
fuel filler flap.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 221
Underinflated tires can

Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear
Radversely affect fuel economy
Rlead to tire failure from being overheated
Radversely affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tires
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Operation
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
particular tire sizes
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
Some tire inflation pressure labels may only wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
show the rim diameter instead of the entire and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
tire size, e.g. R 18 or 18". because they are more likely to become
The rim diameter is part of the tire size as punctured or damaged by road debris,
specified on the tire sidewall (Y page 235). potholes etc.
Overinflated tires can

Radversely affect handling characteristics
Rcause uneven tire wear
Rbe more prone to damage from road
hazards
Radversely affect ride comfort
Rincrease stopping distance
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures

specific to rim diameter Checking tire inflation pressure
i When towing a trailer, inflate the tires to Safety notes

the tire inflation pressure as specified for a G Warning!
fully loaded vehicle. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Potential problems associated with
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
underinflated and overinflated tires
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
Underinflated tires more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
G Warning!
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely because they are more likely to become
affect handling and fuel economy, and are punctured or damaged by road debris,
more likely to fail from being overheated. potholes etc.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 222
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the see a corresponding warning message in the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire multifunction display.
and Loading Information placard on the The tire pressure loss warning system may
drivers door B-pillar. Overloading the tires function in a restricted manner or with a delay
can overheat them, possibly causing a Rwhen snow chains are mounted to the
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result vehicle
in handling or steering problems, or brake
Rin the presence of ice and snow
failure.
Rwhen you are driving on a loose surface
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
(e.g. sand or gravel)
a month.
Operation
Rwhen you are driving in a very sporty

Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are cold (Y page 219). manner (involving rapid acceleration or
high speeds in curves)
Checking tire inflation pressure Rwhen you are driving with a loaded roof
manually rack or heavily laden vehicle
Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire G Warning!
inflation pressure: When the multifunction display shows the
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. message Check Tire Pressure Soon, one
X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve. or more of your tires are significantly
X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire underinflated. You should stop and check
gauge and check against the your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
recommended tire inflation pressure on the them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
Tire and Loading Information placard on the indicated on the vehicles Tire and Loading
drivers door B-pillar (Y page 227). If Information placard or, if available, on the tire
necessary, add air to achieve the inflation pressure label.
recommended tire inflation pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
inflation pressure by pushing the metal tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
with the tire gauge. Each tire, including the spare, should be
X Install the valve cap. checked at least once a month when cold.
Inflate the tires to the recommended tire
X Repeat this procedure for each tire.
inflation pressure as specified on
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
Tire pressure loss warning system
the drivers door B-pillar
(Canada only)
or
While the vehicle is being driven, the tire
Rthe tire inflation pressure label located on
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each the inside of the fuel filler flap
wheels rotational speed. This allows the
system to detect a significant loss of pressure
in a tire. If a wheels rotational speed changes
due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 223
i The recommended tire inflation pressures G Warning!

for your vehicle can be found on The tire pressure loss warning system can
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard only warn you in a reliable manner if you have
located on the drivers door B-pillar set the correct tire inflation pressures for
(Y page 227) each tire.
Rthe tire inflation pressure label on the If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,
inside of the fuel filler flap the system will monitor the pressure
according to the incorrect value.
The tire inflation pressures are not listed in
the Operators Manual. X Switch on the ignition.
Operation
G Warning! X Press button = or ; on the
The tire pressure loss warning system does multifunction steering wheel to select the
not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire Service menu (Y page 118).
inflation pressures. Always adjust tire X Press button 9 or : on the
inflation pressure according to the Tire and multifunction steering wheel to select
Loading Information placard on the drivers Tire Pressure.
door B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressure X Press button a on the multifunction
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. steering wheel to confirm.
The tire pressure loss warning system does The following message appears in the
not replace regular checks of the tire inflation multifunction display:
pressures since a gradual pressure loss in Run Flat Indicator
more than one tire cannot be detected by the Active
tire pressure loss warning system. Press 'OK' to Restart
The tire pressure loss warning system is not X Press button a.
able to issue a warning due to a sudden The following message will appear in the
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. multifunction display:
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In Tire Pressure
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully Now OK?
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt Cancel
steering maneuvers. Yes
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning X If you wish to confirm: Press button
system 9 or : to select Yes.
The tire pressure loss warning system must X Press button a.
be restarted in the following situations: The following message will appear in the
Rafter you have changed the tire inflation multifunction display:
pressure Run Flat
Indicator
Rafter you have replaced the wheels or tires Restarted
Rafter you have installed new wheels or tires After a certain learning phase, the tire
X Using the Tire and Loading Information pressure loss warning system checks the
placard on the drivers door B-pillar or, if set pressure values for all four tires.
available, the tire inflation pressure label on X If you wish to cancel: Press button 9
the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure or : to select Cancel.
the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is X Press button a to confirm.
correct. The previous settings remain unchanged.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 224
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the
System (Advanced TPMS), (USA only) inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has
Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced tires of a different size than the size indicated
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced on the Tire and Loading Information placard
TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure or the tire inflation pressure label, you should
in the vehicles tires and issues warnings in determine the proper tire inflation pressure
case of pressure loss in one or more of the for those tires.
tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
The TPMS is equipped with a combination low been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
tire pressure/ TPMS malfunction telltale in system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
Operation
the instrument cluster. Depending on how the pressure telltale when one or more of your
telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire tires are significantly underinflated.
pressure condition or a malfunction in the Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
TPMS system itself: telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
or more of your tires is significantly significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
underinflated. There is no malfunction in to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the TPMS.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
RIf the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system handling and stopping ability. Please note that
itself is not operating properly. the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are maintenance, and it is the drivers
equipped with the proper electronic sensors. responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
G Warning! reached the level to trigger illumination of the
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
Tire and Loading Information placard or the the system is not operating properly. The
supplemental tire inflation pressure TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap. the low tire pressure telltale. When the
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire flash for approximately 1 minute and then
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this remain continuously illuminated. This
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully sequence will continue upon subsequent
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
steering maneuvers. exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
G Warning! detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
should be checked at least once a month reasons, including the installation of
when cold and inflated to the inflation incompatible replacement or alternate tires
pressure recommended by the vehicle or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading TPMS from functioning properly. Always
Information placard on the drivers door B- check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 225
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
i If a condition causing the TPMS to

malfunction develops, it may take up to
10 minutes for the system to signal a
malfunction using the TPMS telltale When the vehicle has been parked for longer
flashing and illumination sequence. than 20 minutes, the message Tire
pressures will be displayed after
Operation
The telltale extinguishes after a few
minutes driving if the malfunction has been driving a few minutes appears in the
corrected. multifunction display.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
multifunction display. The current tire may still indicate the tire inflation pressure
inflation pressure for each tire appears in the of the removed road wheel for some
multifunction display after a few minutes of minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that
driving. the indicated value where the spare wheel
is mounted does not reflect the actual
i Possible differences between the spare tire inflation pressure.
readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the i Operating radio transmission equipment
vehicles control system can occur. The tire (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
pressure displayed by the control system or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
apply to sea level. In high-altitude to malfunction.
locations, the reading on a tire pressure
gauge will be higher than the reading issued i This device complies with Part 15 of the
by the vehicles control system. Do not FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
reduce the tire inflation pressure under following two conditions:
such circumstances.
1. This device may not cause harmful
X Switch on the ignition. interference, and
X Press button = or ; on the 2. this device must accept any
multifunction steering wheel to select the interference received, including
Service menu (Y page 118). interference that may cause undesired.
X Press button 9 or : to select Tire Any unauthorized modification to this
Pressure. device could void the users authority to
X Press button a. operate the equipment.
The current inflation pressure for each tire Tire inflation pressure warnings
appears in the multifunction display.
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure in one or more than one
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
display. In addition, an acoustic warning
sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
instrument cluster comes on.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 226
X Press button = or ; on the

multifunction steering wheel to select the
Service menu.
X Press button 9 or : on the
multifunction steering wheel to select
Tire Pressure.
X Press button a.
The current inflation pressure for each tire
The respective tire is indicated by a red appears in the multifunction display or the
rectangle. following message appears in the
Operation
Restarting Advanced TPMS multifunction display:

Tire pressures
G Warning! will be displayed
It is the drivers responsibility to set the tire after driving
inflation pressure to the recommended cold a few minutes
tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires X Press button :.
affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
The following message appears in the
You might lose control over the vehicle.
multifunction display:
When you restart the TPMS, the system sets Use Current
new reference values for each tire. Pressures As New
The TPMS must be restarted when you have Reference Values
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new Press 'OK' to Confirm
level (e.g. because of different load or driving X Press button a.
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to The following message appears in the
the current tire inflation pressures. multifunction display:
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire Tire Press. Monitor
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure Restarted
recommended for the vehicle operating After driving a few minutes the system
condition. Tire inflation pressure should only verifies that the current tire inflation
be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the pressures are within the systems specified
recommended tire inflation pressure on the range. Afterwards the current tire inflation
Tire and Loading Information placard on the pressures are accepted as reference values
drivers door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have and then monitored.
supplemental tire inflation pressure X If you wish to cancel: Press button %.
information for driving at high speeds or for or
vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded
X Press button 9 to exit the menu screen.
vehicle condition. If such information is
provided, it can be found on the inside of the i When the wheel positions have been
fuel filler flap. changed, the inflation pressure of a tire
X Using the Tire and Loading Information may be displayed for the wrong position
placard on the drivers door B-pillar temporarily. After driving for a few minutes,
(Y page 227) or the supplemental tire the inflation pressure will be shown for the
inflation pressure information on the inside correct position.
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 227
Maximum tire inflation pressure B-pillar. This placard tells you important
information about the number of people
G Warning! that can be in the vehicle and the total
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation weight that can be carried in the vehicle.
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation It also contains information on the proper
pressures. size and recommended tire inflation
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires pressures for the original equipment tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely on your vehicle.
affect handling and fuel economy, and are (2) The certification label, also found on the
more likely to fail from being overheated. drivers door B-pillar. It tells you about the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
Operation
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
because they are more likely to become cargo. The certification label also tells
punctured or damaged by road debris, you about the front and rear axle weight
potholes etc. capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data

on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure : for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 219) for proper tire
inflation.
Loading the vehicle

: Drivers door B-pillar
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry. Following is a discussion on how to work with
the information contained on the Tire and
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
can be found on the drivers door
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 228
Loading Information placard with regards to applicable) should never exceed the weight
loading your vehicle. referenced in that statement.
Tire and Loading Information Seating capacity

G Warning! i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Information placard example are for
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire illustration purposes only. Seating capacity
and Loading Information placard on the data are specific to each vehicle and may
drivers door B-pillar. Overloading the tires vary from data shown in the following
can overheat them, possibly causing a illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Operation
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result Information placard on vehicle for actual
in handling or steering problems, or brake data specific to your vehicle.
failure.
Tire and Loading Information placard

i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants that
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear
seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing seating
capacity : is located on the drivers door
B-pillar (Y page 227).
Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
The Tire and Loading Information placard
pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor
showing load limit information : is located
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.
on the drivers door B-pillar (Y page 227).
X Step 1: Locate the statement The
X Locate the statement The combined
combined weight of occupants and cargo
weight of occupants and cargo should
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
on your vehicles Tire and Loading
on the Tire and Loading Information
Information placard.
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
The combined weight of all occupants,
the driver and passengers that will be riding
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if
in your vehicle.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 229
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the XXX amount
equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs
(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Operation
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 231).
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. The following
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicles Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 228).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 230
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined weight limit 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard

Step 2 Number of occupants 5 3 1
(driver and passengers)
Operation
Seating configuration front: 2 front: 1 front: 1

rear: 3 rear: 2
Occupants weight Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
150 lbs 200 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs 190 lbs
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 4:
140 lbs
Occupant 5:
120 lbs
Combined weight of all 750 lbs 540 lbs 150 lbs
occupants

Step 3 Available cargo/ 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs -
luggage and trailer 750 lbs = 540 lbs = 150 lbs =
tongue weight (total 750 lbs 960 lbs 1 350 lbs
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all occupants, the Certification label

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
Even after careful determination of the
available.
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
For more information, see Trailer tongue the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
load (Y page 231). (Y page 231) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 231
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The
certification label can be found on the drivers
door B-pillar, see the Technical data section
(Y page 328).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR.
Operation
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
allowable weight that can be carried by a on tires are specific to each vehicle and
single axle (front or rear). may vary from data shown in above
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed illustration.
the maximum permissible weight limits The maximum tire load rating : is the
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), maximum weight the tires are designed to
have the loaded vehicle (including driver, support.
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
For more information on tire load rating, see
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
(Y page 236).
commercial scale.
For information on calculating total and cargo
Trailer tongue load load capacities, see (Y page 228).
The tongue load of any trailer is an important

weight to measure because it affects the load Direction of rotation
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
such as better hydroplaning performance. To
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo
benefit, however, you must make sure the
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
tires rotate in the direction specified.
load typically is 8% of the trailer weight and
everything loaded in it. An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
Maximum tire load direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
G Warning! the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the replaced. Always observe and follow
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire applicable temporary use restrictions and
and Loading Information placard on the speed limitations indicated on the spare
drivers door B-pillar. Overloading the tires wheel.
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
failure.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 232
Tire care and maintenance Tread depth
G Warning! G Warning!
Regularly check the tires for damage. Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible
control of your vehicle. at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire recommend that you do not allow your tires
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if to wear down to that level. As tread depth
the tires have sustained damage, replace approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
them. properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Operation
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once Depending upon the weather and/or road
a month. For more information on checking surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
tire inflation pressure, see Recommended widely.
tire inflation pressure (Y page 219). Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
Tire inspection reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
Every time you check the tire inflation (3 mm).
pressure, you should also inspect your tires Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
for the following: law. These indicators are located in six places
Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 232) on the tread circumference and become
visible at a tread depth of approximately
Rcord or fabric showing through the tires 1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
rubber
considered worn and should be replaced.
Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the The recommended minimum tire tread depth
tread or side of the tire for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
Replace the tire if you find any of the above recommended minimum tire tread depth for
conditions. winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
tires will age and become worn over time even
if never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary.
Life of tire
G Warning!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid
varying factors including but not limited to: band across the tread.
RDriving style
RTire inflation pressure
RDistance driven
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 233
Storing tires Treadwear Traction Temperature

! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place 200 AA A
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels. All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash Treadwear
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Operation
damage to the tire.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Always replace a damaged tire. under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (1 1/2) times as well on the government
Standards
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. based on straight-ahead braking traction
Government requirement designed to give tests, and does not include acceleration,
drivers consistent and reliable information cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
regarding tire performance. Tire characteristics.
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
resistance =. Although not a Government of the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in measured under controlled conditions on
North America have these grades branded on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
the sidewall. and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and G Warning!
may vary from data shown in above If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will
illustration. be substantially reduced. Under such weather
conditions, drive, steer and brake with
Quality grades can be found, where
extreme caution.
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 234
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy laboratory test wheel than the minimum
road is always lower than on a dry road. required by law.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperature is close to the freezing point. Rotating tires
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires G Warning!
(Y page 241) with a minimum tread depth of
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels are of the same dimension.
for the winter season to ensure normal If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
balanced handling characteristics. On tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
Operation
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping tire rotation is not possible.
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still G Warning!
considerably greater than when the road is Have the tightening torque checked after
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise changing a wheel. The wheels could come
appropriate caution. loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
cause serious damage to the drivetrain Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz specified for your vehicles rims.
Limited Warranty.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
Temperature with tires of the same dimension all around.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
G Warning! same dimension all around, tires can be
The temperature grade for this tire is rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
established for a tire that is properly inflated pattern that will maintain the intended
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
underinflation, or excessive loading, either (Y page 231).
separately or in combination, can cause In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
excessive heat build-up and possible tire equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
failure. dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
possible.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
If applicable to your vehicles tire
B, and C, representing the tires resistance to
configuration, tires can be rotated according
the generation of heat and its ability to
to the tire manufacturers recommended
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
intervals in the tire manufacturers warranty
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
and reduce tire life, and excessive
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
The grade C corresponds to a level of
(spinning) direction must be maintained.
performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
represent higher levels of performance on the on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires).
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 235
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the on tires are specific to each vehicle and
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for may vary from data shown in above
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. illustration.
For information on wheel change, see Flat For more information, see Rims and tires
tire (Y page 312). (Y page 331).
Tire size designation, load and speed

Tire labeling rating
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
Operation
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicles tires:
: Tire width
; Aspect ratio in %
= Radial tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load index
B Speed symbol

on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
illustration.
(Y page 233)
; DOT, Tire Identification Number General: Depending on the design standards
(Y page 238) used, the tire size molded into the sidewall
may have no letter or a letter preceding the
= Maximum tire load (Y page 231)
tire size designation.
? Maximum tire inflation pressure
No letter preceding the size designation (as
(Y page 227)
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based
A Manufacturer on European design standards.
B Tire ply material (Y page 239) Letter P preceding the size designation:
C Tire size designation, load and speed Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
rating (Y page 235) standards.
D Load identification (Y page 238) Letter LT preceding the size designation:
E Tire name Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 236
Letter T preceding the size designation: and Loading Information placard on the
Temporary spare tires which are high drivers door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
pressure compact spares designed for can overheat them, possibly causing a
temporary emergency use only. blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
Tire width
failure.
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width
in millimeters. Load index A is a numerical code associated
with the maximum load a tire can support.
Aspect ratio
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds
Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
Operation
relationship between tire section height and tire is designed to support. See also
section width and is expressed in percentage. Maximum tire load (Y page 231) where the
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing maximum load associated with the load index
section height by section width. is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
Tire code For additional information on the load index,
Tire code = indicates the tire construction see Load identification (Y page 238).
type. The R stands for radial tire type. Letter Speed symbol
D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
letter B means belted-bias ply construction. G Warning!
Even when permitted by law, never operate a
At the tire manufacturers option, any tire
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
with a speed capability above 149 mph
speed rating of the tires.
(240 km/h) can include a ZR in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
additional information, see Tire speed are rated can lead to sudden tire failure,
rating (Y page 236). causing loss of vehicle control and possibly
resulting in an accident and/or serious
Rim diameter personal injury and possible death, for you
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead and for others.
seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
Load index driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
G Warning!
Speed symbol B indicates the approved
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise, maximum speed (tire speed rating) for the
tire failure may be the result which may cause tire.
an accident and/or serious injury to you or Summer tires
others. Index Speed rating
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as shown Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
on the original part. R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
G Warning! S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 237
Index Speed rating Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual
maximum permissible speed of the tire.
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) All-season and winter tires
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Index Speed rating
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Q M+S10 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
T M+S10 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
H M+S10 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
Operation
V M+S10 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
RAt
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
the tire manufacturers option, any tire
winter performance. Make sure the tires
with a speed capability above 149 mph
you use show M+S and the mountain/
(240 km/h) can include a ZR in the size
snowflakeimarking on the tire
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
To determine the maximum speed sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
capability of the tire, the service traction performance requirements of the
description for the tire must be referred to. Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
The service description is comprised of
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
load index A and speed symbol B.
for use in snow conditions.
If your tire includes ZR in the size
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
designation and no service description is
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
given, the tire manufacturer must be
(210 km/h).
consulted for the maximum speed
capability. The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
may have a tire speed rating above the
If a service description is given, the speed
maximum speed permitted by the electronic
capability is limited by the speed symbol in
speed limiter.
the service description. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, 97Y Make sure your tires have the required tire
is the service description. The letter Y speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
designates the speed rating and the speed the Technical data section (Y page 331),
capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph for example when purchasing new tires.
(300 km/h). If you are uncertain about the correct reading
RAny of the information given on a tires sidewall,
tire with a speed capability above
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a ZR
glad to assist you.
in the size designation AND the service
description must be placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The (Y)
speed symbol in parenthesis designates
the maximum speed capability of the tire
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h).
10 or M+Sifor winter tires
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 238
Load identification
Operation
The TIN is a unique identifier. The TIN

facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data notify purchasers in recall situations or other
on tires are specific to each vehicle and safety matters concerning tires. It gives
may vary from data shown in above purchasers the means to easily identify such
illustration. tires.
In addition to the load index, special load The TIN is comprised of Manufacturers
identification : may be molded into the tire identification mark ;, Tire size =, Tire
sidewall following the letter designating the type code ? and Date of manufacture
speed symbol B (Y page 235). A.
RNo specification given: absence of any text i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
(like in above example) indicates a on tires are specific to each vehicle and
standard load (SL) tire. may vary from data shown in above
RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load illustration.
(or reinforced) tire.
RLight
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Load: designates a light load tire.
RC, D, E: designates load range associated Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
with the maximum load a tire can carry at meets requirements of the U.S. Department
a specified pressure. of Transportation.
Manufacturers identification mark

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Manufacturers identification mark ;
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire denotes the tire manufacturer.
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN New tires have a mark with two symbols.
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. Retreaded tires have a mark with four
symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (Y page 218).
Tire size
Code = indicates the tire size.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 239
Tire type code radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed
Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
equipment (whether installed or not).
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
Air pressure
the tire.
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
Date of manufacture outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square
The date of manufacture A identifies the inch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.
week and year of manufacture.
Operation
The first two figures identify the week, Aspect ratio
starting with 01 to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two Dimensional relationship between tire
figures represent the year. section height and section width expressed
For example, 3208 represents the 32nd in percentage.
week of 2008.
Bar
Metric unit for air pressure. There are
Tire ply material 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
on tires are specific to each vehicle and Curb weight
may vary from data shown in above The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
illustration. equipment including the maximum capacity
This marking tells you about the type of cord of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,
and number of plies in the sidewall : and air conditioning and additional optional
under the tread ;. equipment, but without passengers and
cargo.
Tire and loading terminology DOT (Department of Transportation)
Accessory weight A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire

meets requirements of the U.S. Department
The combined weight (in excess of those of Transportation.
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 240
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle total load limit, and production options
must never exceed the GAWR for the front weight.
and rear axle indicated on the certification
label located on the drivers door B-pillar. Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
This number is the greatest amount of air
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc.
Operation
loaded on the trailer. Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants the vehicle is
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle (150 lb).
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if Occupant distribution
applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
certification label located on the drivers door their designated seating positions.
B-pillar.
Production options weight
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The combined weight of those installed
This is the maximum permissible vehicle regular production options weighing over
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
the vehicle including all options, passengers, standard items which they replace, not
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer previously considered in curb weight or
tongue load). It is indicated on the accessory weight, including heavy duty
certification label located on the drivers door brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
B-pillar. battery, and special trim.
Kilopascal (kPa) PSI (Pounds per square inch)
Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure
is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to Recommended tire inflation pressure
1 bar. The recommended tire inflation pressure for
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire
Load index and Loading Information placard located on
Numerical code associated with the the drivers door B-pillar. It provides best
maximum load a tire can support. handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Supplemental information pertaining to
special driving situations can be found on the
Maximum load rating
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds the fuel filler flap.
that can be carried by the tire.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 241
Winter driving 241
Rim Tread
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube The portion of a tire that comes into contact
assembly upon which the tire beads are with the road.
seated.
Treadwear indicators
Sidewall
Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars
The portion of a tire between the tread and that show across the tread of a tire when only
the bead. 1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
16
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Operation
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by Maximum permissible weight on trailer
tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in tongue.
recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchasers the Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is
comprised of Manufacturers identification A tire information system that provides
mark, Tire size, Tire type code and Date consumers with ratings for a tires traction,
of manufacture. temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
Tire ply composition and material used government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in Vehicle maximum load on the tire
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply Load on an individual tire that is determined
materials in the tire and sidewall, which by distributing to each axle its share of the
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing
it by two.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation (speed symbol); Winter driving
indicates the speed range for which a tire is
approved. General information
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Total load limit Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicles
designated seating capacity. Winter tires
G Warning!
Traction Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface on 6
which it moves. The amount of grip provided. longer suitable for winter operation.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 242
242 Winter driving
G Warning! Snow chains

If you use your spare wheel when winter tires ! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid
the difference in tire characteristics may very
serious damage to your vehicle or tires,
well impair turning stability and that overall
make sure the use of snow chains is
driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
permissible as specified in the Technical
driving style accordingly.
data section of this Operators Manual.
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest Snow chains should only be driven on snow-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. covered roads at speeds not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
Operation
Always use winter tires at temperatures as possible when driving on roads without
below 45 (7) and whenever wintry road snow.
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires Observe the following guidelines when using
provide special winter performance. Make snow chains:
sure the tires you use show the mountain/ RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall.
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 331).
These tires meet specific snow traction
RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear
performance requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the wheels only. Follow the manufacturers
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and mounting instructions.
have been designed specifically for use in ! If snow chains are mounted to the front
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
wheels, they may scrape against the body
only way to achieve the maximum
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
effectiveness of your vehicles driving safety
could be damaged as a result.
systems such as the ABS and the ESP in
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure all mounted Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-
winter tires are of the same make and have Benz Center will be glad to advise you on
the same tread design. this subject.
RUse of snow chains may be prohibited
For information on winter tires for your
vehicle model, see the Technical data depending on location. Always check local
section (Y page 331). and state laws before installing snow
Always observe the speed rating of the winter chains.
tires installed on your vehicle. RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
After installing winter tires: i When driving with snow chains, you may
X Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust wish to switch off the ESP (Y page 61)
it if necessary (Y page 221). before setting the vehicle in motion. This
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning will improve the vehicles traction.
system (Y page 222) or the Advanced Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (Y page 224).
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 243
Driving instructions 243
Winter driving instructions bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency

back to normal.
G Warning! If the vehicle is parked after being driven on
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe should be tested as soon as possible after
and from around the vehicle with the engine driving is resumed.
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior G Warning!
resulting in unconsciousness and death. Make sure not to endanger any other road
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open users when carrying out these braking
a window slightly on the side of the vehicle maneuvers.
Operation
not facing the wind.
G Warning! Driving instructions

The outside temperature indicator is not
Drive sensibly save fuel
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. To save fuel you should:
Indicated temperatures just above the RKeep tires at the recommended inflation
freezing point do not guarantee that the road pressures.
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
RRemove unnecessary loads.
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
RRemove roof rack when not in use.
G Warning! RAllow engine to warm up under low load
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in use.
order to obtain braking action. This could
RAvoid frequent acceleration and
control. Your vehicles ABS will not prevent deceleration.
this type of loss of control. RHave all maintenance work performed at
the intervals specified in the Maintenance
The most important rule for slippery or icy Booklet and as required by the
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt Maintenance system. Contact an
acceleration, braking and steering authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions. Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift
short trips and in mountainous areas.
the automatic transmission to neutral
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
Drinking and driving
i For information on driving with snow
chains, see Snow chains (Y page 242). G Warning!
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
driving are very dangerous combinations.
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
force may become necessary to produce the
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
normal brake effect.
judgment.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 244
244 Driving instructions
The possibility of a serious or even fatal When using the engines braking power, a
accident are greatly increased when you drink drive wheel may not spin for an extended
or take drugs and drive. period of time, e.g. on slippery road
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow surfaces. This may cause serious damage
anyone to drive who has been drinking or to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
taking drugs. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Continuous or hard braking

Pedals G Warning!
G Warning! Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
Operation
Make sure absolutely no objects are cause excessive and premature wear of the
obstructing the pedals range of movement. brake pads.
Keep the drivers footwell clear of all It can also result in the brakes overheating,
obstacles. If there are any floormats or thereby significantly reducing their
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop
pedals still have sufficient clearance. the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, accident.
the objects could get caught between the After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on
pedals. You could then no longer brake or for some time, rather than immediately park,
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and so that the air stream will cool down the
injury. brakes faster.
Wet roads
Power assistance
G Warning!
G Warning! After driving in heavy rain for some time
There is no power assistance for the steering without applying the brakes or through water
and the brake when the engine is not running. deep enough to wet brake components, the
Steering and braking requires significantly first braking action may be somewhat
more effort and you could lose control of the reduced and increased pedal pressure may be
vehicle and cause an accident as a result. necessary to obtain expected brake effect.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in
in motion. front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after

driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
Brakes advisable to brake the vehicle with
Downhill grades considerable force prior to parking. The heat
generated serves to dry the brakes.
! When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by Salt-covered roads
shifting into a lower gear to use the
engines braking power. This helps prevent G Warning!
overheating of the brakes and reduces A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake
wear. linings may cause a delay in the braking
effect, resulting in a significantly increased
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 245
braking distance, which could lead to an ! Vehicles with 4MATIC:

accident. Only conduct operational or performance
To avoid this danger, you should: tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Roccasionally brake carefully when you are Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
driving on salt-covered roads, so that any otherwise seriously damage the brake
layer of salt that may have built up on the system or the transfer case which is not
brake discs and the brake linings is covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
removed without putting other road users Warranty.
at risk
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ! Because the ESP operates
Operation
ahead and drive with particular care automatically, the engine and ignition must
Rcarefully
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
apply the brakes at the end of a
position 0 or 1) when
trip and immediately after commencing a
new trip, so that salt residues are removed Rthe parking brake is being tested on a
from the brake disc brake test dynamometer
Brake service axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
with 4MATIC)
! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
Active braking action through the ESP
be too low if the red brake warning lamp in
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
the instrument cluster comes on while the
system which is not covered by the
engine is running and an acoustic warning
sounds. Observe additional messages in
the multifunction display that may appear. If your brake system is only subjected to
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may moderate loads, you should occasionally test
be the reason for low brake fluid in the the effectiveness of the brakes by applying
reservoir. above-normal braking pressure at higher
speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the
Have the brake system inspected
brake pads.
immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. G Warning!
All checks and service work on the brake Make sure not to endanger any other road
system should be carried out by qualified users when carrying out these braking
technicians only. Contact an authorized maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid System (BAS) (Y page 60).
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
G Warning!
If other than recommended brake pads are Driving off
installed, or other than recommended brake Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
fluid is used, the braking properties of the full load on the engine until the operating
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe temperature has been reached.
braking is substantially impaired. This could
result in an accident.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 246
extended period with the ESP switched Rthe maximum depth of the water may not
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to exceed 12 in (30 cm)
the drivetrain which is not covered by the Ryou must drive slowly
! Simultaneously depressing the

accelerator pedal and applying the brakes Trailer towing
reduces engine performance and causes G Warning!
premature brake and drivetrain wear which Failure to use proper equipment and driving
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz technique can result in a loss of vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Operation
control when towing a trailer.

Improper towing or failure to follow the
Hydroplaning instructions in this manual can result in
vehicle damage and/or serious personal
Depending on the depth of the water layer on injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low to assure safe trailer operation.
speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
when conditions indicate possible should you require an explanation of
hydroplaning: information contained in this manual.
X Reduce vehicle speed.
X Avoid track grooves in the road. Trailer hitch
X Apply brakes cautiously. ROnly install a trailer hitch receiver approved
for your vehicle.
For information on availability and
Standing water installation, contact an authorized
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Before driving through water, determine its RThe bumpers on your vehicle are not
depth. designed for use with clamp-type hitches.
If you must drive through standing water, Do not attach rental hitches or other
drive slowly to prevent water from entering bumper-type hitches to them.
the passenger compartment or the engine RTo reduce the possibility of damage,
compartment. Water in these areas could
remove the hitch ball adapter from the
cause damage to electrical components or
receiver when not in use.
wiring of the engine or transmission, or
could result in water being ingested by the
engine through the air intake causing Electrical connections
severe internal engine damage. Any such The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven-
damage is not covered by the Mercedes- wire harness included in the Mercedes-Benz
Benz Limited Warranty. approved trailer hitch receiver kit.
Prevent water from entering the passenger i A four-pole conversion plug is available
compartment or the engine compartment. If from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
you must drive through standing water, keep Center as a spare part.
in mind that
For further information, contact an
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 247
Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings passengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded)
weighed on a commercial scale.
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight
of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, RCheck the vehicles front and rear gross
equipment, luggage, etc. loaded on the axle weight, the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
trailer. The maximum permissible GTW to be and tongue weight.
towed: 3 500 lb (1 588 kg). The values as measured must not exceed
Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the the weight limits listed under Vehicle and
maximum permissible weight on the trailer trailer weights and ratings (Y page 247).
tongue: 280 lb (127 kg) limit for Mercedes-
Benz approved hitch receiver. Coupling a trailer
Operation
Loading a trailer Observe maximum permitted trailer
RWhen loading a trailer, you should observe dimensions (width and length).
that neither the permissible GTW, nor the Most states and all Canadian provinces
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) are require
exceeded. The GVWR is indicated on the Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle
certification label located on the drivers and the trailer
door B-pillar (Y page 227).
The chains should be criss-crossed under
Maximum permissible values are listed on the trailer tongue. They must be attached
the safety compliance certification labels to the hitch receiver, and not to the
for the vehicle and for the trailer to be vehicles bumper or axle.
towed.
Make sure to leave enough slack in the
The lowest value listed must be selected
chains to permit turning corners.
when determining how the vehicle and
trailer are loaded. Ra separate brake system at various trailer
RThe tongue weight at the hitch ball must be
weights
added to the rear axle weight to prevent Ra break-away switch on trailers with a
exceeding the rear Gross Axle Weight separate brake system.
Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is indicated on Check with your local state laws for specific
the certification label located on the requirements.
drivers door B-pillar (Y page 227). The switch activates the trailer brakes in
the possible event that the trailer might
i Mercedes-Benz recommends loading the
separate from the tow vehicle.
trailer in such a manner that it has a tongue
weight between 8 % and 10 % of the GTW. ! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if
trailer is so equipped) directly to the
i The weight of other accessories, vehicles hydraulic brake system, as your
passengers and cargo will reduce the vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes. If
maximum trailer weight and tongue weight you do, neither the vehicles brakes nor the
your vehicle can tow. trailers brakes will function properly.
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer i The provided vehicle electrical wiring
RTo assure that the towing vehicle and trailer
harness for trailer towing has a brake signal
are in compliance with the maximum wire for hook-up to a brake controller.
permissible weight limits, have the loaded
rig (towing vehicle including driver,
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 248
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in RTake into consideration that when towing a
park position P (Y page 103). trailer, the handling characteristics are
X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle different and less stable from those when
(Y page 102). operating the vehicle without a trailer.
X Close all doors and the tailgate. It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.
X Attach the trailer. RThe vehicle and trailer combination is
X Plug in all electrical connectors. heavier, and therefore limited in
acceleration and climbing ability, and has a
larger braking distance.
Towing a trailer
It is more prone to reacting to cross wind
Operation
There are many different laws, including gusts, and requires more sensitive steering
speed limit restrictions, having to do with input.
trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be legal,
RIf possible, do not brake abruptly, but
not only for where you reside, but also for
rather engage the brake slightly at first to
where you will be driving. A good source for
permit the trailer to activate its brake. Then
this information can be the police or local
increase the braking force.
authorities.
Note the following, when driving with a trailer: ! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce
RIn
the vehicles speed immediately.
order to gain skill and an understanding
of the vehicles behavior, you should Do not attempt to straighten out the tow
practice turning, stopping and backing up vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed.
in an area which is free of traffic. RIf the transmission shifts between gears on
RBefore you start driving check the inclines repeatedly, shift to a lower gear
range manually (Y page 106). Select 4, 3,
- trailer hitch 2 or 1.
- break-away switch A lower gear and reduction of speed
- safety chains reduces the chance of engine overloading
and/or overheating.
- electrical connections
RWhen going down an incline, shift into a
- lighting
lower gear and use the engines braking
- tires effect.
RAdjust the mirrors (Y page 84) to permit Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheating
unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer. the vehicle and trailer brakes (if so
equipped).
RIf the trailer has electric brakes, start your
RIf the engine coolant rises to an extremely
vehicle and trailer moving slowly, and then
apply only the trailer brake controller by high temperature when the air conditioning
hand to make sure the brakes are working is on, turn off the air conditioning system.
properly. Engine coolant heat can be additionally
RAlways
vented by opening the windows, switching
secure items in the trailer to
the climate control fan speed to high and
prevent load shifts while driving.
setting the temperature control to the
RWhen towing a trailer, check occasionally maximum.
to make sure the load is secure, and that RDuring a passing maneuver extreme care
trailer lighting and brakes (if so equipped)
must be exercised since your vehicle with
are functioning properly.
a trailer will require additional passing
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 249
distance ahead than when driving without and traffic conditions permit. Some
a trailer. jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
Because your vehicle and trailer is longer mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
than your vehicle alone, you will also need Only operate the audio system or
to go much farther ahead of the passed COMAND11 (Cockpit Management and Data
vehicle before you can return to your lane. System) if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not be
Decoupling a trailer able to observe traffic conditions and could
endanger yourself and others.
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P (Y page 103). Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Operation
X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle
(Y page 102). 14 m) every second.
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
X Engage the parking brake for the trailer.
X Disconnect all electrical plug connectors. Emission control

X Decouple the trailer. Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
X Make sure that the trailer coupling is free the toxic components of the exhaust gases
of load. within permissible limits required by law.
These systems will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
Driving abroad specifications. Any adjustments on the
engine should, therefore, be carried out only
If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.
by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
or Canada, you should request dealer
authorized technicians.
network information for your destination from
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Engine adjustments should not be altered in
any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly
Control and operation of radio according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
transmitters requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
Safety notes
G Warning!
G Warning! Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
Please do not forget that your primary health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A drivers monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
attention to the road must always be his/her unconsciousness and possible death.
primary focus when driving. For your safety Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
and the safety of others, we recommend that as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
you pull over to a safe location and stop If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
before placing or taking a telephone call. entering the vehicle while driving, have the
If you choose to use the telephone11 while cause determined and corrected
driving, please use the hands-free device and immediately. If you must drive under these
only use the telephone when road, weather conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
11 Observe all legal requirements.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 250
250 Maintenance
Maintenance
Notes
The Maintenance System in your vehicle
tracks the distance driven and the time
elapsed since the last maintenance service.
It calculates other maintenance service work
required, and calls for the next maintenance An additional number or a further letter in
service accordingly. combination with the maintenance type can
We strongly recommend that you have your be indicated. This indicates that further
auxiliary maintenance work is required.
Operation
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordance Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
with the Maintenance Booklet at the times for more information.
called for by the maintenance service
indicator. Clearing the maintenance service
indicator message
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet The maintenance service indicator message
and maintenance service indicator at the is cleared automatically
designated times/mileage will result in Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you
vehicle damage not covered by the switch on the ignition
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Rafter approximately 10 seconds when
reaching the service threshold while driving
Maintenance service indicator Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the
message suggested maintenance service term has
passed
Information on maintenance work and
maintenance intervals are specified in the X Clearing the maintenance service
Maintenance Booklet. Contact an authorized indicator message manually: Press
Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit button % or button a on the
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for additional multifunction steering wheel.
information. The standard display appears in the
The maintenance service indicator message multifunction display.
will notify you when the next maintenance
service is required. Maintenance service term exceeded
Starting approximately 1 month before the If you have exceeded the suggested
next maintenance service is required, one of maintenance service term, you will see the
the following messages will appear in the following message in the multifunction
multifunction display. The messages will display:
appear while you are driving or when you
Service A Exceeded by XXXXX miles
switch on the ignition (example service A):
(km)
Next Service A in XXXX miles (km)
Service A Exceeded by XXX days
Next Service A in XX days
In addition, a signal sounds when the
Service A Due message appears.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 251
Vehicle care 251
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will service indicator in the maintenance-relevant

reset the maintenance service indicator literature for your vehicle.
following a completed maintenance service. Such literature is available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
Mercedes-Benz.
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display ! If the maintenance service indicator was
reset inadvertently, have an authorized
i The menu overview can be found on Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
(Y page 113). Only reset the maintenance service
You can call up the maintenance service indicator if the proper maintenance service
Operation
indicator display at any time to check when has been performed. Not following the
the next maintenance service is required. proper maintenance service as described
X Switch on the ignition. in the Maintenance Booklet will result in
The standard display of the control system engine damage and/or other vehicle
appears (Y page 113). damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
X Press button = or ; on the
multifunction steering wheel to select the
Service menu. Vehicle care
X Press button : or 9 to select
ASSYST PLUS. Cleaning and care of the vehicle
X Press button a on the multifunction Notes
steering wheel to confirm.
The maintenance service indicator display Regular and proper care will help to maintain
with the maintenance service deadline the value of your vehicle.
appears in the multifunction display. G Warning!
i If the battery was disconnected, the days Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
of disconnection will not be included in the Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
count shown by the maintenance service Always follow the instructions on the
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance particular container. Always open your
service deadline, you will need to subtract vehicles doors or windows when cleaning the
these days from the days shown in the inside.
maintenance service indicator message or Never use fluids or solvents that are not
maintenance service indicator display. designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and keep
them out of reach of children.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator ! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use
In the event that the maintenance service on scouring agents. Never apply strong force
your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
maintenance service indicator reset. surface to be cleaned.
The automotive maintenance facility carrying While in operation, even while parked, your
out the maintenance service will find the vehicle is subjected to varying external
information for resetting the maintenance influences which, if gone unchecked, can
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 252
252 Vehicle care
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle incompatibility between materials used in the
underbody and cause lasting damage. production process and others applied later.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme We have selected vehicle-care products and
and varying climatic conditions, but also by: compiled recommendations which are
RAir pollution specially matched to our vehicles and which
always reflect the latest technology. You can
RRoad salt obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
RTar products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
RGravel
Center.
and stone chipping
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
To avoid paint damage, you should
Operation
damage due to negligent or incorrect care

immediately remove: cannot always be removed or repaired with
RGrease and oil the vehicle-care products recommended
RFuel here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
RCoolant
The following topics deal with the cleaning
RBrake fluid and care of your vehicle and give important
RBird droppings how-to information as well as references to
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
RInsects
products.
RTree resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates Power washer
the aggressiveness and potency of the above ! Follow the instructions provided by the
adverse influences. power washer manufacturer on
More frequent washings are necessary to maintaining a distance between the vehicle
deal with unfavorable conditions: and the nozzle of the power washer.
Rnear the ocean Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust tires. The intense jet of water can result in
emissions) damage to the tire.
Rduring
Always replace a damaged tire.
winter operation
Always keep the jet of water moving across
You should check your vehicle from time to the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
damage should be repaired as soon as rubber parts.
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of Tar stains
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
check is a washing of the underbody followed Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas become more difficult to remove. A tar
need to be re-undercoated. remover is recommended.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body Paintwork, painted body components
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither or similar materials to painted body
necessary nor recommended by Mercedes- components may damage the paintwork.
Benz because of the possibility of
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 253
Vehicle care 253
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
be applied when water drops on the paint diffused jet of water.
surface do not bead up. This should X Do not spray directly towards the
normally be done every 3 to 5 months, ventilation intake.
depending on the climate and washing X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
detergent used. and chamois frequently.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner X Rinse with clean water and dry with a
should be applied if the paint surface shows chamois thoroughly.
signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
Do not apply any of these products or wax if finish.
Operation
your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
is still hot. Automatic car wash
X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for You can have your vehicle washed in an
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint automatic car wash from the start. Brushless
damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle car washes are preferable.
doors, etc.). X To protect the filter system, activate the air
recirculation mode using button g on
Engine cleaning the climate control panel.
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
make sure to protect electrical components touchless car wash which uses caustic
and connectors from contact with water and spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
cleaning agents. or ornamental moldings.
Corrosion protection, such as MB
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the
running it through the automatic car wash.
engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage ! Make sure the combination switch is set
bushings and joints should be lubricated. The to wiper setting $. Otherwise, the rain
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be sensor could activate and cause the wipers
protected from any wax. to move unintentionally. This may lead to
vehicle damage.
Vehicle washing Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
road salt as soon as possible. the vehicle through an automatic car wash
to prevent damage to the mirrors.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. X When taking the vehicle through an
automatic conveyor-type car wash:
Hand-wash
Make sure the automatic transmission
X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle remains in neutral position N.
in direct sunlight. When leaving the automatic car wash, make
X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to sure the mirrors are folded out.
clean the vehicle. After running the vehicle through an
X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent, automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
Shampoo. will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 254
254 Vehicle care
which can be caused by residual wax on the Cleaning the driving system sensors
windshield.
Ornamental moldings
X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
moldings, use a damp cloth.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
may have chrome appearance, they could
be made of anodized aluminum that will be
Operation
damaged when cleaned with chrome

cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
ornamental molding is chrome-plated, To clean the bumper area near driving system
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz sensors : observe the following:
Center.
RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
with plenty of water.
side markers, turn signal lenses
RUse a soft, non-scratching cloth.
X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, ! If you use a power washer to clean the
with plenty of water. sensor covers, observe the following:
RFollow the instructions provided by the
! Only use window cleaning solutions that
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. power washer manufacturer.
Window cleaning solutions which are not RMaintain a distance between the sensor
suitable may damage the plastic lamp covers and the nozzle of the power
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not washer.
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
contain solvents. Cleaning the rear view camera lens
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 255
Vehicle care 255
X Only use clean water and a soft, non- X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap
scratching cloth to clean rear view camera into place.
lens :. X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
Be careful not to apply wax to rear view inserts with a clean cloth and mild
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If detergent solution.
necessary, remove the wax using the X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with cleaning solution on all outside and inside
plenty of water. glass surfaces.
! Do not clean the camera and the area An automotive glass cleaner is
around the camera recommended.
Operation
Rwith a high-pressure cleaner ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
Rwith a dry cloth and strong pressure the windshield before turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch.
Rwith aggressive cleaning agents
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
You could otherwise damage the camera. arm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring could
Cleaning the windows and the wiper crack the windshield.
blades
! To clean the window interior, do not use
! The windshield wipers must be in a a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
vertical position before folding them away containing solvents. Do not touch the
from the windshield. They could otherwise inside of the windows with hard objects
damage the hood. such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
Never open the hood when the wiper arms damage the windows.
are folded forward.
X
Cleaning the panorama roof
Make sure the hood is fully closed.
X Switch on the ignition. The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a
X With wiper arms in vertical position, switch protective layer on the inside.
off the ignition. X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
cleaning solution.
G Warning! An automotive glass cleaner is
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and recommended.
remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper ! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents
blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could or cleaners containing solvents. Do not
suddenly turn on and cause injury. touch the protective layer with hard objects
such as an ice scraper or ring. Never apply
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. strong force and only use a soft, non-
They could tear. scratching cloth when cleaning the rear
part of the tilt/sliding panel.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
protective layer.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 256
256 Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.

If possible, clean wheels once a week. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of Hard plastic trim items
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels. X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the pressure.
clear coat.
Audio or COMAND display
Operation
! The vehicle should not be parked for an

extended period of time immediately after ! You must switch off the audio or
it has been cleaned. This applies especially COMAND display and allow it to cool prior
after the wheel rims have been cleaned to cleaning.
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners
! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
can lead to increased corrosion of the
brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved These can damage or even destroy the
wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel audio or COMAND display screen.
paint if the vehicle is not driven after X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
cleaning. with light pressure.
Therefore, the vehicles brake system
should always be warmed-up before it is Steering wheel and gear selector lever
parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Wheel Care products, take care not to
spray them on the brake disks. Carpets
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and
Plastic and rubber parts
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing Headliner
solution.
X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
solution. cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
The surface may temporarily change color.
If this is the case, wait for it to dry. Seat belts
X
G Warning! Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays ! The seat belts must not be treated with
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents seat belts at temperatures above 176
will make the surface porous and vehicle (80) or in direct sunlight.
occupants could suffer serious injuries from
plastic parts coming loose in the event of air
bag deployment.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 257
Vehicle care 257
G Warning! As leather is a natural product, it could

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may otherwise harden or become porous.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may RExercise particular care when cleaning
not be able to provide adequate protection. perforated leather as its underside
should not become wet.
Upholstery
Wood trims
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the wood trims in your vehicle.
upholstery to become permanently
Operation
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper ! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
be prevented. these may be abrasive.
G Warning! Chrome-plated exhaust tip

Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
Benz for your vehicle model.
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
and the classy appearance.
Using other seat or head restraint covers may
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
interfere with or prevent the activation of the
NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/ Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
or the deployment of the front side impact air been washed, especially during the winter.
bags. ! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center wheel cleaners as they could cause
for availability. corrosion.
Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to a
natural aging process. Leather upholstery
may also react to certain ambient influences
such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
Benz approved Leather Care.
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
RWipe with light pressure only.
RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 258
258
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 259
259

Where will I find ...? .......................... 260
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 262
What to do if .................................. 288
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 299
Resetting activated NECK-PRO
active front head restraints ............. 301
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 302
Replacing bulbs ................................. 303
Replacing wiper blades .................... 310
Practical hints
Flat tire .............................................. 312
Battery ............................................... 317
Jump starting .................................... 319
Towing the vehicle ............................ 321
Fuses .................................................. 325
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 260
260 Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment The vehicle tool kit includes:

RCollapsible wheel chock12
i This Operators Manual describes all
RElectric air pump
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of RFuse chart
purchase. Please be aware that your RJack12
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual. RPair of gloves12
RReversible ratchet for jack12
RTowing eye bolt
Where will I find ...?
RValve extractor12
First aid kit
RWheel wrench12
Practical hints
i Check expiration dates and contents for

completeness at least once a year and
RSpare wheel bolts12
replace missing/expired items. X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 71).
The first aid kit is located in the cargo X Lift the cargo compartment floor and
compartment on the left side storage pocket. secure it on upper cargo compartment lip
(Y page 194).
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
: First aid kit
Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
factory-equipped with the tools required for X Remove storage compartment : upwards
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel in direction of arrow.
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel X Remove cover ; in direction of arrow.
change are specific to your vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to obtain the tools approved for
your vehicle.
12 Vehicles with spare wheel only.

X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 261
Where will I find ...? 261
For information on where to place wheel

chocks when changing a wheel, see Lifting
the vehicle (Y page 313).
Jack
G Warning!
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
you use the jack for any other purpose, you or
others could be injured, as the jack is
= Wheel wrench designed only for the purpose of changing a
? Towing eye bolt wheel.
Practical hints
A Jack When using the jack, observe the safety notes
B Fuse chart in the Mounting the spare wheel section and
C Spare wheel bolts the notes on the jack.
D Pair of gloves X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit
E Reversible ratchet for jack (Y page 260).
F Electric air pump
G Valve extractor
H Collapsible wheel chock
Collapsible wheel chock

The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 260).
Storage position
X Take the reversible ratchet from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 260).
X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.

X Fold the lower plate outward ;.
X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
into the openings of base plate =.
Operational position
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 262
262 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
X Attach reversible ratchet ; to jack : in Storing the spare wheel after use
such a way that the word UP can be seen.
If you wish to store the spare wheel after use,
Before placing the jack and the reversible carry out the following steps. Otherwise, the
ratchet back into the vehicle tool kit: spare wheel may not fit into the spare wheel
X Fully collapse the jack (storage position). well.
X Remove the reversible ratchet. ! Make sure the spare wheel is dry before
storing it.
X Take the valve extractor from the vehicle
Spare wheel tool kit (Y page 260).
G Observe Safety notes, see page 312. X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the
The spare wheel is located in the space collapsible tire.

Practical hints
underneath the cargo compartment floor. X Use the valve extractor to unscrew the
X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 71). valve insert from the valve.
X Allow the air to escape.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor and
secure it on the upper cargo compartment i It may take a few minutes for the
lip (Y page 194). collapsible tire to deflate completely.
! To prevent damage, always disengage the X Use the valve extractor to screw the valve
securing hook from upper cargo insert back into the valve.
compartment lip and lower the cargo X Screw the valve cap back onto the valve.
compartment floor before closing the X Place the valve extractor back into the
tailgate. vehicle tool kit.
X Place spare wheel = into the spare wheel
well (Y page 262).
X Secure spare wheel = by turning retaining
screw ; clockwise (Y page 262).
Vehicle status messages in the

multifunction display
Notes
Warning and malfunction messages appear in
X Remove storage compartment : the multifunction display located in the
(Y page 260). instrument cluster.
X Remove retaining screw ; by turning it Certain warning and malfunction messages
counterclockwise. are accompanied by an audible signal.
X Remove spare wheel =. Address these messages accordingly and
X Take the spare wheel bolts from the vehicle follow the additional instructions given in this
tool kit (Y page 260). Operators Manual.
For information on mounting the spare wheel, High-priority messages appear in the
see Flat tire (Y page 312). multifunction display in red color.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 263
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 263
Certain messages of high priority cannot be G Warning!

cleared from the multifunction display using No messages will be displayed if either the
a or % on the multifunction steering instrument cluster or the multifunction
wheel (Y page 110). display is inoperative.
Other messages of high priority and As a result, you will not be able to see
messages of less immediate priority can be information about your driving conditions,
cleared from the multifunction display using such as
a or %. They are then stored in the Rspeed
vehicle status message memory
Routside temperature
(Y page 118). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message Rwarning/indicator lamps
disappear. Clearing a message will not Rmalfunction/warning messages
correct the condition that caused the
Practical hints
message to appear. Rfailure of any systems
G Warning! Driving characteristics may be impaired.

All categories of messages contain important If you must continue to drive, do so with added
information which should be taken note of caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
and, where a malfunction is indicated, Benz Center as soon as possible.
addressed as soon as possible at an On the pages that follow, you will find a
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. compilation of the most important warning
Failure to repair the condition noted may and malfunction messages that may appear.
cause damage not covered by the Mercedes- For your convenience the messages are
Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property divided into text messages (Y page 264) and
damage or personal injury. symbol messages (Y page 270).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 264
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is activated while driving
Airbag even though a child, small individual, or object below the
Enabled systems weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or
See the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
Operators forces acting on the seat may make the system sense
Manual supplemental weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
Practical hints

X Open the front passenger door.
X Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat
and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the
child restraint if necessary.
X Make sure no objects which apply supplemental weight to
the seat are present. The system may recognize such
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the
front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually
present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 45 indicator lamp in the center console
(Y page 44) and the multifunction display in the instrument
cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center console should
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger front air
bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operators Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operators Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 265

classification sensed by the OCS, the 45 indicator
lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
G Warning!
If the 45 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps,
do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 266

Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving
Airbag even though an adult or someone larger than a small
Disabled individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces
See acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in
Operators weight.
Manual X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the
Practical hints
vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 45 indicator lamp in the center console
(Y page 44) and the multifunction display in the instrument
cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center console should
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger front air
bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operators Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operators Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 45 indicator
lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 267

Check See Vehicles with BabySmart (Canada only):
Child Operator's The BabySmart child seat is not positioned correctly.
Seat Manual Risk of injury!
Position
X Install the BabySmart child seat in correct position.
Vehicles with BabySmart (Canada only):

The sensor for child seat recognition is malfunctioning.
Risk of injury!
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
G Warning!
If the 45 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front passenger
seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Driving systems

Cruise Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.
Control e In addition an acoustic warning sounds.
X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
Cruise - - - mph One of the activation conditions for cruise control has not
Control been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 169).
Vehicle

Shift to to Start You have attempted to start the engine while the automatic
'P' or 'N' Engine transmission was in reverse gear R or drive position D.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or
neutral position N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 268
Tires

Check Then There has been a warning message about a loss in the tire
Tire Restart inflation pressure and the tire pressure loss warning system
Pressure Run Flat was not restarted yet.
Indicator X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each
tire.
X Then restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 222).
Run Flat Inoperativ The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
Indicator e
Practical hints
X Have the tire pressure loss warning system checked at an

Check Tire The tire pressure loss warning system indicates that the tire
Pressure inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Soon X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 312).
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 221).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system after
adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (Y page 222).
Tire after The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the Advanced
pressures driving a TPMS.
will be few X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
displayed minutes
Tire Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
Press. e X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Inoperativ There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
Pressure e No (e.g. winter tires).
Monitor Wheel X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Sensors Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 269

TirePress. Sensor(s)M At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).
issing The respective tire is indicated by instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors is

mounted (e.g. spare wheel).
The respective tire is indicated by instead of the tire
Practical hints
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Tire Currently The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressure
Press. Unavailabl due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient
Monitor e power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
Correct The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Tire or
Pressure The tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ from
each other significantly.
The tire inflation pressure values are shown in the
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 221).
X Restart the Advanced TPMS (Y page 226).
Caution At least one tire is deflating.

Tire The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
Defect X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 312).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 270

Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly
Tires below the reference value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
Practical hints
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Symbol messages
Brake
# Check The brake pads have reached their wear limit.

Brake Pad X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible at an
Wear authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 271
$ ABS and In addition, the yellow ESP warning lamp d and the
ESC yellow ABS indicator lamp ! come on.
(USA only) Inoperativ The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
J e See malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP, and the hill-start
(Canada Operators assist system are unavailable.
only) Manual
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Practical hints
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
(USA only) Currently The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
J Unavailabl malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP, and the hill-start
(Canada e See assist system are unavailable.
only) Operators
Manual The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
X Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed
of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the ESP is available again.
If the message does not disappear:
responsiveness.
accident.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 272
(USA only) Currently The brake system still functions normally but due to
J Unavailabl insufficient power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP, and
(Canada e See the hill-start assist system are unavailable.
only) Operators
Manual
responsiveness.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS,
Practical hints
the BAS, the ESP, and the hill-start assist system are
operational again and the message should disappear.
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
accident.
$ EBD, ABS, In addition, the yellow ESP warning lamp d and the
and ESC yellow ABS indicator lamp ! come on.
(USA only) Inoperativ The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
J e See malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, and the ESP are
(Canada Operator's unavailable.
only) Manual
responsiveness.
accident.
$ Release You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In addition
Parking an acoustic warning sounds.
(USA only) Brake X Release the parking brake.
!
(Canada
only)
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 273
$ Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

Brake Risk of accident!
(USA only) Fluid X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
J Level
to do so.
(Canada X Engage the parking brake.
only)
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
Practical hints
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 274
Safety systems
ESC In addition, the yellow ESP warning lamp d comes on.

Inoperativ The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
e See malfunction, the BAS, the ESP, and the hill-start assist
Operator's system are unavailable.
Manual
responsiveness.
Practical hints

accident.

Currently The brake system still functions normally but due to
Unavailabl insufficient power supply the BAS, the ESP, and the hill-start
e See assist system are not available.
Operator's
Manual
responsiveness.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the
ESP is operational again and the message in the
multifunction display should disappear.
If the message in the multifunction display does not
disappear:
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
accident.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 275

Currently The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
Unavailabl
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
e See
BAS, the ESP, and the hill-start assist system available.
Operator's
Manual X Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed
of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the ESP is available again.
Practical hints
responsiveness.
accident.
ESC If the yellow ESP warning lamp d flashes while driving

Currently and this message appears, the Electronic Traction System
Unavailabl (ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the
e See drive wheel brakes.
Operator's As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
Manual System (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP warning lamp d goes out.
G Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized
6 SRS There is a malfunction in the Supplemental Restraint System

Malfunctio (SRS). The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
n Service could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
Required X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
6 Front Components of the drivers supplemental restraint system

Left SRS may not work properly.
Malfunctio X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
n Service Mercedes-Benz Center.
Required
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 276
6 Front Components of the front passengers supplemental restraint

Right SRS system may not work properly.
Required
6 Rear Left Components of the left rear passengers supplemental

SRS restraint system may not work properly.
Required
Practical hints
6 Rear Components of the center rear passengers supplemental

Center restraint system may not work properly.
SRS X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Malfunctio Mercedes-Benz Center.
n Service
Required
6 Rear Components of the right rear passengers supplemental

Right SRS restraint system may not work properly.
Required
6 Left Side The left window curtain air bag may not work properly.
Curtain X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Airbag Mercedes-Benz Center.
Malfunctio
n Service
Required
6 Right The right window curtain air bag may not work properly.
Side X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Curtain Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbag
Malfunctio
n Service
Required
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 277
Vehicle
A The tailgate is open.

X Close the tailgate (Y page 71).
? You are driving with the hood open.

X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 215).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
You are driving with at least one door open. The display
Practical hints
; symbol shows you which doors are open.
X Close all doors.
+ Key A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle was

Detected recognized while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.
In Vehicle X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
+ Dont This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if the

Forget drivers door is opened with the engine turned off and no
Your Key SmartKey in the starter switch. This message is only a
reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.
+ Take Your You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.

Key From X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Ignition
+ Obtain A The SmartKey is malfunctioning.

New Key X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
+ Close You tried to lock the vehicle but not all doors were closed.
Doors To X Close doors and lock the vehicle again.
Lock
Vehicle
+ Key Does The SmartKey in the starter switch does not belong to the
Not vehicle.
Belong to X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Vehicle
+ Replace The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are

Key discharged.
Battery X Replace the batteries (Y page 302).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 278
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
(message X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
appears in X Engage the parking brake.
red)
X Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the engine
be started again after the engine is stopped.
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because there is strong radio-frequency
(message interference.
Practical hints
appears in X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

red) X Engage the parking brake.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
(Y page 77).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.

Detected X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
(message X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the
appears in
starter switch (Y page 77).
white)
+ Remove The KEYLESS-GO system is malfunctioning.

'Start' X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
Button (Y page 77).
and X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Insert Key
Check The water level has dropped to approximately 1.1 US qts

Washer (1.0 l).
Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 217).
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 279
D Power Power assistance for the steering system is not available. A

Steering considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to steer the
Malfunctio vehicle.
n X Check whether you are capable to apply the higher degree
See of effort necessary to safely steer the vehicle.
Operator's
Manual If you are able to steer the vehicle safely:
X Continue driving with added caution.
Center.
If, in any way, you feel that you are not able to steer the vehicle
Practical hints
safely:
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Do not continue to drive.
Engine
+ Check The coolant level is too low.

Coolant X Add coolant (Y page 216).
Level See X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Operator's
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 280
? Coolant The coolant is too hot.

Low Stop X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Vehicle! X Turn off the engine immediately.
Turn
Engine Off
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument
cluster.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Practical hints
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city

traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248
(120).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 (120).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 281
? Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken.

Low Stop X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Vehicle! X Turn off the engine immediately.
Turn
X Check the poly-V-belt.
Engine Off
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine
Practical hints
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
cluster.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.

cluster.
If the coolant temperature is below 248 (120), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
# The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning
Rbroken poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronic system
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 282
4 Check The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.

Engine X Check the engine oil level (Y page 215) and add engine oil
Oil At as required (Y page 216).
Next X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
Refueling
checked for possible leaks.
If the message Check Engine Oil At Next For information on approved engine oils
Refueling appears while the engine is contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
running and at operating temperature, the or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
engine oil level has dropped to approximately ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
Practical hints
the minimum level.

ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
The message will be stored in the vehicle displayed could result in serious engine
status message memory after you have damage that is not covered by the
cleared it from the multifunction display. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
station to refill your engine oil to the required
level.
C The fuel level is low.

X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Fuel The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Level Low X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Gas Cap A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
Loose fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaking.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 212).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 283
Lamps
b Active The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning.

Headlamps X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ possible.
e
b Check The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 303).
Reverse
Lamp
or
Practical hints
Check
Right
Reverse
Lamp
b Check The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Brake Lamp
or
Check
Right
Brake Lamp
b Check The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This

Center message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
Brake Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b Check The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Fog X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Lamp possible.
or
Check
Right Fog
Lamp
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 284
b Check The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Front X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 303).
Left
Sidemarker
Lamp
or
Check
Front
Right
Sidemarker
Lamp
Practical hints
b Check The rear left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Rear Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 303).
Sidemarker
Lamp
or
Check
Rear
Right
Sidemarker
Lamp
b Check The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning.

Left
Parking
Lamp
or
Check
Front
Right
Parking
Lamp
b Check The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left High X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Beam (Y page 303).
or X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Check
Right
High Beam
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 285
b Check The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

License
Plate Lamp
or
Check
Right
License
Plate Lamp
b Auto Lamp The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on

Function automatically.
Practical hints
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
e possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X Switch off the daytime running lamp mode in the control
system (Y page 122).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 87).
b Check The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Low X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Beam (Y page 303).
or X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Check
Right Low
Beam
b Check The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Rear Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 303).
Fog Lamp
b Switch You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Off Lights opened the drivers door and left the headlamps on or
removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicle
and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or c
(Y page 87).
or
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in the exterior
lamp switch to its stop.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 286
b Check The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Tail X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 303).
Lamp
or
Check
Right
Tail Lamp
b Check The left or right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Tail X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 303).
and Brake
Lamps
Practical hints
or
Check
Right
Tail and
Brake
Lamps
b Check The left or right corner-illuminating lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Cornering possible.
Light
or
Check
Right
Cornering
Light
b Check The left or right trailer brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Trailer X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Brake Lamp
b Check The left or right trailer tail lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Tail
Lamp
or
Check
Trailer
Right
Tail Lamp
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 287
b Check The left or right trailer turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Turn
Signal
or
Check
Trailer
Right
Turn
Signal
b Check The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
Practical hints
Rear Left X Vehicles with halogen headlamps: Replace the bulb as
Turn soon as possible (Y page 303).
Signal X Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Contact an
or
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Check
Rear
Right
Turn
Signal
b Check The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Turn
Signal
or
Check
Front
Right
Turn
Signal
b Check The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
Left malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
Mirror stopped working.
Turn X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Signal possible.
or
Check
Right
Mirror
Turn
Signal
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 288
288 What to do if
Tires
h Tire At least one tire is deflating.

Press. X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Warning steering and braking maneuvers.
Caution X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 312).
Tire
Malfunctio
n
h Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly

Tire below the reference value.
Practical hints
Pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
What to do if When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in

the instrument cluster come on. The low-
Lamps in instrument cluster beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beam
headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal
Notes
indicator lamps, and the indicator lamps for
If any of the following lamps in the instrument the fog lamps will only come on if activated.
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
check when switching on the ignition, have come on when the ignition is switched on,
the respective bulb checked and replaced if have it checked and replaced if necessary.
necessary.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 289
What to do if 289
Brake
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! The yellow ABS The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS,
indicator lamp the ESP, and the EBP are also switched off.
comes on while The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
the engine is systems specified above available.
running.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be
malfunctioning.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Practical hints
responsiveness.
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
accident.
! The yellow ABS The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.
indicator lamp The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
comes on while When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
the engine is operational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.
running.
responsiveness.
X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator
and the battery checked.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 290
290 What to do if

! The yellow ABS The ABS is temporarily not available. The ESP, the BAS, and the
indicator lamp EBP are also unavailable.
comes on while The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.
the engine is
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
running.
systems specified above.
The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a
vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
Practical hints

responsiveness.
accident.
! The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
d malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, and the ESP are
The yellow ABS unavailable.
indicator lamp and the X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
yellow ESP warning hard braking, reducing steering capability.
lamp come on while the X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
engine is running and multifunction display (Y page 262).
an acoustic warning X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
sounds.
accident.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 291
What to do if 291

! The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) switched off due to a
d malfunction.
The red brake warning The ABS, the BAS, and the ESP are also switched off.
lamp comes on while The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
driving. In addition, the systems specified above available.
yellow ABS indicator
lamp, and the yellow
ESP warning lamp
come on and an
acoustic warning responsiveness.
sounds. X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
Practical hints
accident.
$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and an acoustic
warning sounds.
$ (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
J (Canada only) Risk of accident!
The red brake warning X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
lamp comes on while soon as it is safe to do so.
the engine is running. X Engage the parking brake.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning! the brake fluid catching fire. You can be

Driving with the brake warning lamp seriously burned.
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
brake fluid before checking the brake system. mark or below, have the brake system
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 292
292 What to do if
Safety systems

7 The red seat belt The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten
telltale comes your seat belts before driving off.
on for a X Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
6 seconds after
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
starting the
starting the engine.
engine.
7 The red seat belt You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
telltale comes X Fasten your seat belt.
Practical hints
on. In addition The warning chime stops sounding.

you hear a
warning chime
for a maximum
of 6 seconds
after starting the
engine.
7 The red seat belt You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your
telltale comes seat belts.
on while the X Fasten your seat belts.
vehicle is The seat belt telltale goes out.
standing still
and the engine is There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
running or while the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
driving. X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
7 The red seat belt The vehicles speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you
telltale flashes and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
while driving. In belts.
addition, an X Fasten your seat belts.
intermittent The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
warning chime sounding.
sounds with
increasing There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
intensity. the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 293
What to do if 293
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver and front passengers seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.

6 The red SRS There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
indicator lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
comes on while or fail to activate in an accident.
driving. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Practical hints
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.

d The yellow ESP The ESP has been switched off.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while
When the ESP is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
the engine is
system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
running.
is spinning.
X Switch the ESP back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 62).
X If leaving the ESP switched off, adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESP cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
d The yellow ESP The ESP is not operational due to a malfunction.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while X
Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
the engine is
running.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 294
294 What to do if

d The yellow ESP The ESP or the ETS/4-ETS has come into operation because of
warning lamp detected traction loss in at least one tire.
flashes while X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
driving. X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (Y page 62).

accident.
Practical hints
At least one wheel is spinning and the Electronic Traction System

(ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive
wheel brakes.
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
System (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP warning lamp d goes out.
Vehicle

8 The yellow fuel The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
tank reserve X Refuel at the next gas station.
warning lamp
comes on when
the engine is
running.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 295
What to do if 295
Engine

; There may be a malfunction in
The yellow engine Rthe fuel management system
malfunction indicator Rthe ignition system
lamp comes on when
the engine is running. Rthe emission control system
Rsystems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Practical hints
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
; A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel
The yellow engine cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
malfunction indicator X Check the fuel cap (Y page 212).
lamp comes on when X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
the engine is running. X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
? The red coolant There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir.
temperature If this warning lamp comes on frequently, there is a leak in the
warning lamp cooling system.
comes on when If the coolant level is correct, the electric radiator fan may be
the engine is broken.
running.
X Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating
(Y page 216).
X Have the cooling system checked.
X If the coolant temperature is below 248 (120), you can
continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
X Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-go
driving.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 296
296 What to do if

? The red coolant The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 (120).
temperature X Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engine
warning lamp and coolant to cool down.
comes on when
the engine is
running and an
acoustic
warning sounds.
G Warning! Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from

Driving when your engine is overheated can other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
Practical hints
cause some fluids which may have leaked into vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine compartment to catch fire. You the engine has cooled down.
could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause ! The engine should not be operated with
serious burns which can occur just by opening the coolant temperature above 248
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine (120). Doing so may cause serious
if you see or hear steam coming from it. damage which is not covered by the
Tires

h Combination The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
low tire pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
telltale/TPMS braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
malfunction X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
telltale for the
(Y page 262).
Advanced TPMS
illuminates If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
continuously. corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
h Combination There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.
low tire pressure X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
telltale/TPMS (Y page 262).
malfunction X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-
telltale for the
Benz Center.
Advanced TPMS
flashes 60 After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
seconds and pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
then stays of driving.
illuminated.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 297
What to do if 297
G Warning! maintenance, and it is the drivers

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), responsibility to maintain correct tire
should be checked at least once a month pressure, even if underinflation has not
when cold and inflated to the inflation reached the level to trigger illumination of the
pressure recommended by the vehicle TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
Information placard on the drivers door B- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the the system is not operating properly. The
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
tires of a different size than the size indicated the low tire pressure telltale. When the
on the Tire and Loading Information placard system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should flash for approximately 1 minute and then
determine the proper tire inflation pressure remain continuously illuminated. This
Practical hints
for those tires. sequence will continue upon subsequent
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring exists. When the malfunction indicator is
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire illuminated, the system may not be able to
pressure telltale when one or more of your detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
tires are significantly underinflated. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure reasons, including the installation of
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check incompatible replacement or alternate tires
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a TPMS from functioning properly. Always
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
handling and stopping ability. Please note that continue to function properly.
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
Lamp in center console

Canada only: A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the front passenger seat.
45 Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.
The front passenger
The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child
front air bag off
seat installed on the front passenger seat.
indicator lamp
illuminates and X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
remains illuminated Mercedes-Benz Center.
(Y page 46).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 298
298 What to do if

Canada only: The system is malfunctioning.
45 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.
The front passenger X Check installation of the child seat (Y page 56).
front air bag off If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:
indicator lamp does not
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
illuminate or does not
remain illuminated with
a BabySmartTM child Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the
seat properly installed front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
on the passenger seat.
Practical hints
USA only: The system is malfunctioning.

45 X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
The front passenger Mercedes-Benz Center.
front air bag off X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
indicator lamp follow corrective steps (Y page 262).
illuminates and
remains illuminated
with the weight of a
typical adult or
someone larger than a
small individual on the
front passenger seat.
G Warning! individual on the front passenger seat, do not

If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates have any passenger use the front passenger
and remains illuminated with the weight of a seat until the system has been repaired.
typical adult or someone larger than a small

USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
45 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
The front passenger and check installation of the child seat.
front air bag off X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the
indicator lamp does not seat are present.
illuminate and/or does X If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains
not remain illuminated out, have the system checked as soon as possible at an
with the weight of a authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on
typical 12-month-old the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
child in a standard child X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
restraint or less on the
follow corrective steps (Y page 262).
front passenger seat.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 299
Unlocking/locking manually 299
G Warning! Unlocking the drivers door

If the 45 indicator lamp does not
illuminate or remains out with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or less on the front passenger seat,
do not transport a child on the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
X Insert mechanical key ; into the drivers
Practical hints
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the door lock.
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise
drivers door using the mechanical key. to position 1.
The anti-theft alarm system will trigger when X Pull the door handle to open the drivers
you
door.
Runlock the drivers door with the X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
mechanical key it from the drivers door lock.
and
Ropen the drivers door
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey into Locking the vehicle
the starter switch. If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as
Removing the mechanical key follows:
X Open the drivers door.
X Close the front passenger door, the rear
doors, and the tailgate.
X Press the central locking switch
(Y page 71).
The locking knobs of the front passenger
door and the rear doors move down.
X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
drained: Press down the locking knobs on
the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
X Move locking tab : in the direction of X Exit the vehicle.
arrow. X Close the drivers door.
X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 300
300 Unlocking/locking manually
X Remove mechanical key ; from the X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 299). SmartKey (Y page 299).
Practical hints
X Insert mechanical key ; into the drivers X Insert mechanical key ; into the opening
door lock. in trim :.
X Turn mechanical key ; clockwise to X Press mechanical key ; in direction of the
position 1. arrow and open the tailgate.
The vehicle is locked.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
it from the drivers door lock. make sure there is sufficient clearance
X Check whether the doors and the tailgate above and behind the vehicle.
are locked.
X Open the tailgate.
i This procedure does not arm the anti-
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
from the outside using the SmartKey or
filler flap.
KEYLESS-GO, opening the tailgate from the
inside using the emergency release will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Unlocking and opening the tailgate
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked and following:
opened using button F on the SmartKey RInsert the SmartKey into the starter
or the KEYLESS-GO function, use the switch.
emergency release to unlock and open the
RPress button % or & on the
tailgate.
SmartKey.
The emergency release is located on the
inside of the tailgate. In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
RPull an outside door handle.
A minimum height clearance of 6.9 ft
(2.10 m) is required to open the tailgate. The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m)
of the vehicle.
RPress the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 301
Resetting activated NECK-PRO active front head restraints 301
Manually unlocking the gear selector Fuel filler flap

lever
G Warning!
If the vehicles electrical system is Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
remain locked in park position P. In this case could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
the gear selector lever can be unlocked filler flap.
manually, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
X Engage the parking brake. In case the central locking system does not
release the fuel filler flap, you can open it
manually.
The fuel filler flap release is located on the
passenger side in the cargo compartment
behind the cover.
Practical hints
X Open the tailgate (Y page 71).
X Open the passenger-side trim panel
(Y page 309).
! Do not use sharp objects to loosen the

gear selector lever cover in the center
console, as this could damage the gear
selector lever cover or the center console.
X Insert a flat, blunt object into the right edge
of gear selector lever cover : at the
positions indicated by the arrows.
X Loosen gear selector lever cover : using X Pull fuel filler flap release :.
this object. The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Pull gear selector lever cover : out and
X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 212).
remove.
X Close the passenger-side trim panel.
X Simultaneously push down release ; and
X Close the tailgate.
move the gear selector lever out of park
position P.
The gear selector lever is unlocked.
Resetting activated NECK-PRO active
i The gear selector lever is locked again as front head restraints
soon as you move it back to park position
P. If the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
have been triggered in a rear-end collision,
they must be reset.
You can tell that the NECK-PRO active front
head restraints have been triggered when
they have been moved forward and cannot be
adjusted.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 302
302 Replacing SmartKey batteries
G Warning! Replacing SmartKey batteries

For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO active
front head restraints checked at an If the batteries in the SmartKey are
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
rear-end collision. locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized
G Warning! Mercedes-Benz Center.
When pushing back the head restraint
G Warning!
cushion, make sure your fingers do not
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
become caught between the head restraint
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
of reach of children.
lead to injury.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
Practical hints
i Pressing the head restraint cushion back immediately.

requires high force. If you encounter
G Warning!
difficulties when pushing the head restraint
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
back, please have the procedure
material, which may require special handling
performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
and regard for the environment. Check with
Center.
your local governments disposal guidelines.
California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the

environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
of disposal. Many states (USA only) or
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
When inserting the batteries, make sure they
are clean and free of lint.
X Push the head restraint cushion at the
bottom, back as far as possible ;. When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
X Push the head restraint cushion down into
the guide =. i The required replacement batteries are
X Fold the head restraint cushion by the top, available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
back firmly until it engages :. Center.
X Repeat this procedure on the NECK-PRO Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
active front head restraint for the second CR 2025 or equivalent.
front seat. X Remove the mechanical key from the
For information on NECK-PRO active front SmartKey (Y page 299).
head restraints, see NECK-PRO active front
head restraints (Y page 51).
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 303
Replacing bulbs 303
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely

important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
headlamp adjustment.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow
the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
opening until battery compartment bulb can explode if you
Practical hints
cover : opens. Do not keep the cover Rtouch or move it when hot
shut. Rdrop the bulb
Rscratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
i Since replacing bulbs is a technically

highly demanding process, we recommend
X Remove the battery compartment cover. to have them replaced at an authorized
X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your
hand until battery = falls out. i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
X Insert the new battery with the positive fogged up on the inside as a result of high
terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth. humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment the lights on should clear up the fogging.
cover into the housing and press the cover
closed.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey as
well as the KEYLESS-GO function.
Replacing bulbs
Safety notes
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling to a large
degree.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 304
304 Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
You can replace the following bulbs yourself:
Halogen headlamps Type
: Turn signal and side marker lamp:
WY 5 W
; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
= High-beam lamp: H7 55 W
? Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
A Low-beam lamp: H7 55 W
Practical hints
Bi-Xenon headlamps Type

: Turn signal and side marker lamp:
WY 5 W
; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
= Corner-illuminating lamp: H7 55 W
? Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 305
Replacing bulbs 305
Rear lamps Type

: Brake lamp, tail lamp: P 21 W
; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W or LED13
= Backup lamp: W 16 W or P 21 W13
? Passenger side: Tail lamp P 21 W
Drivers side: Tail lamp and rear fog lamp
P 21 W
A Side marker lamp: W 3 W
Practical hints
License plate lamps Type
: License plate lamps: W 5 W
Notes on bulb replacement RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
grease.
! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not
RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
described in this section. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs or on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and Center.
bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes- i Mercedes-Benz recommends using
Benz Center. Longlife (LL) bulbs.
ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and
with the specified watt rating. Replacing bulbs for front lamps
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb G Warning!
to prevent short circuits. Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
handling bulbs. lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. It is
recommended to have such work done by a
qualified technician.
13 Vehicles with LEDs in tail lamp only.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 306
306 Replacing bulbs
Before you start to replace a bulb for a front

lamp, do the following:
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$.
X Open the hood (Y page 214).
X Remove the cover above the respective
headlamp (Y page 306).
X Drivers side only: Release the washer fluid
reservoir (Y page 306).
X Releasing: Turn screw ;
Removing/installing cover above counterclockwise and remove it.
Practical hints
headlamp X Tilt washer fluid reservoir : to the side as

far as necessary to access the headlamp
bulbs.
X Fixing: Tilt washer fluid reservoir : back
into fixing position.
X Fasten screw ; by turning it clockwise.
Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps

only)
Example illustration: Passenger side

X Removing: Press tab : in direction of
arrow and pull cover ; upward out of the
retainer.
X Pull cover ; off of cover =.
X Reinstalling: Insert the soft, front edge of
cover ; sideways into the gap between
fender and headlamp.
X Stick cover ; onto cover = so that they X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
are flush with each other. and remove it.
X Press cover ; down into the front retainer X Pull electric plug ; off bulb ?.
until tab : engages. X Remove wire clip = from bulb holder by
pushing down and release from arrestor
Releasing/fixing the washer fluid hook.
reservoir X Pull bulb ? at its socket out of bulb holder.
To replace bulbs of the drivers side X Insert the new bulb so that its socket
headlamp, the washer fluid reservoir in the locates in the recess of bulb holder and is
engine compartment must be released. level to it.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 307
Replacing bulbs 307
X Fold wire clip = back and press it down on X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket.
bulb holder to engage it in the arrestor Lamp pin = must point up.
hook. X Place bulb socket back into the housing
X Connect electric plug ; on bulb ?. X Pull bulb socket handle ; until the bulb
X Align housing cover : and turn it socket engages.
clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it
X Drivers side only: Fix the washer fluid clockwise until it engages.
reservoir (Y page 306). X Drivers side only: Fix the washer fluid
X Install the cover above the headlamp reservoir (Y page 306).
(Y page 306). X Install the cover above the headlamp
(Y page 306).
High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb
Practical hints
(halogen headlamps only) Parking and standing lamp bulb
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise

and remove it. and remove it.
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise X Pull out bulb socket ;.
and remove it. X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ;.
X Press handle ; in direction of the arrow X Insert the new bulb into bulb socket ;.
until the bulb socket is released. X Insert bulb socket ;.
X Pull out the bulb socket using handle ;.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket. clockwise.
X Drivers side only: Fix the washer fluid
X Install the cover above the headlamp
(Y page 306).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 308
308 Replacing bulbs
Corner-illuminating lamps bulb (Bi- Turn signal and side marker lamps
Xenon headlamps only)
X Turn bulb socket : or ;

Practical hints
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise counterclockwise and pull it out together

and remove it. with the bulb.
X Press handle ; in direction of the arrow X Turn signal lamp bulb PY 21 W: Press the
until the bulb socket is released. bulb in slightly and turn it
X Pull out the bulb socket using handle ;. counterclockwise. Pull it out of bulb
socket ;.
X Insert new bulb into bulb socket ;. Press
the bulb in slightly and turn it clockwise.
X Turn signal and side marker lamp bulb
WY 5 W: Pull the bulb out of bulb
socket :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb socket :.
X Insert bulb socket ; or :.
X Turn bulb socket ; or : clockwise until
it engages.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket.
Lamp pin = must point up.
X Insert bulb socket.
(Y page 306).
X Pull bulb socket handle ; until the bulb
socket engages.
X Align housing cover : and turn it Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
clockwise.
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following:
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
(Y page 306).
$.
X Open the tailgate.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 309
Replacing bulbs 309
Opening and closing side trim panel

You must open the side trim panels in the
cargo compartment before you can replace
the tail lamp bulbs.
X Pull off plug :.

X Press retainers ; in direction of the
Practical hints
arrows simultaneously and remove the
bulb carrier.
Left side trim panel
Example illustration: Bulb carrier without LED turn

Right side trim panel signals
= Tail lamp, brake lamp
X Opening: Turn lock : counterclockwise ? Turn signal lamp
by 90 and remove side trim panel ;. A Backup lamp
X Closing: Insert side trim panel ; and turn
B Rear fog lamp (drivers side only), tail lamp
lock : clockwise by 90.
C Side marker lamp
Tail lamp unit X Bulb =, ? and B: Press respective bulb

gently into the bulb socket, turn it
X Open the respective side trim panel counterclockwise and remove the bulb.
(Y page 309).
X Insert the respective new bulb into the bulb
socket and turn the bulb clockwise.
X Bulb A: Pull bulb out of the socket.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket.
X Bulb C: Turn the bulb counterclockwise
and remove it from the back of the bulb
carrier.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 310
310 Replacing wiper blades
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb carrier and twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.
turn the bulb clockwise. Otherwise the windows will not be wiped
X Insert the bulb carrier and press it in. properly. As a result, you may not be able to
The bulb carrier retainers ; engage observe surrounding traffic conditions and
audibly. could cause an accident.
X Reconnect the plug.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 309). ! To avoid damage to the hood, the front
wiper arms should only be folded forward
when in the vertical position.
License plate lamps
! Never open the hood when a front wiper
arm is folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
Practical hints
arm back. If released, the force of the

impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield or the rear window.
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
windshield glass or the rear window
without a wiper blade inserted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
this work carried out at an authorized
X Press tab ; of license plate lamp : in Mercedes-Benz Center.
direction of the arrow and loosen the lens
of license plate lamp :.
X Remove the lens of license plate lamp :. Placing wiper arms in vertical position
X Replace the bulb.
X Insert the lens of license plate lamp : and
press it in until engages audibly.
Replacing wiper blades

Safety notes
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Wiper arms in vertical position
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the X Make sure the hood is fully closed.
vehicles on-board electronics have status 0)
before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause Vehicles with SmartKey
injury. X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
G Warning!
X Turn the combination switch to wiper
Wiper blades are components that are subject setting .
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 311
Replacing wiper blades 311
X With wiper arms in vertical position, turn Rear wiper blade

the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It
could tear.
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

X Turn off the engine.
With the drivers door closed, the starter
switch is now in position 1.
setting .
Practical hints
X With wiper arms in vertical position, open
the drivers door.
The starter switch is set to position 0, same X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
as the SmartKey removed from the starter window until it engages.
switch. X Turn wiper blade ; as far as it will go.
X Hold wiper arm : and disengage wiper
setting $.
blade ; by carefully sliding it in direction
of arrow.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
Removing wiper blades
Front wiper blades
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. Installing wiper blades
They could tear. Front wiper blades
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they X Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm in
engage. opposite direction of arrow (Y page 311).
X Rotate the wiper blade into position parallel
to the wiper arm.
X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
windshield.
Make sure you hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
! Make sure the wiper blades are installed
properly. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage.
X Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to

wiper arm.
X Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the
retainer.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 312
312 Flat tire
Rear wiper blade spare wheel replaced with a regular road

wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than one
spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP when a spare
wheel is mounted.
Preparing the vehicle

X Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a
safe distance from moving traffic on a hard,
X
flat surface.
Insert wiper blade ; into wiper arm :.
Practical hints
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.

X Hold wiper arm : and engage wiper
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
blade ; by pushing it in direction of arrow
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
until it locks into place.
X Check whether the wiper blade is securely
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
fastened.
position P.
X Fold wiper arm : to rest on the rear
window.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
folding the wiper arm back. switch.
or
! Make sure the wiper blade is installed
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
properly. An improperly installed wiper
drivers door (this puts the starter switch in
blade may cause rear window damage.
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The
drivers door can then be closed again.
Flat tire
Open doors only when conditions are safe
Safety notes to do so.
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
G Warning! safe distance from the roadway. Open
The dimensions of the spare wheel are doors only when conditions are safe to do
different from those of the road wheels. As a so.
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style Mounting the spare wheel
accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only. Introduction
When driving with a spare wheel mounted, X Prepare the vehicle as described
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do (Y page 312).
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
X Take the following out of the vehicle:
(80 km/h).
Rspare wheel
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center as soon as possible to have the Rjack
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 313
Flat tire 313
Rreversible ratchet sizeable objects before raising the vehicle

Rvehicle tool kit box with the jack. Do not disengage the parking
brake while the vehicle is raised.
Relectric air pump
Make sure that the ground on which the
For information on where to find the vehicle is standing and where you place the
respective items, see Where will I find ...? jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
(Y page 260) and (Y page 262). necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
factory-equipped with the tools required for a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
change are specific to your vehicle. not be able to achieve its load-bearing
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz capacity if it is not at its full height.
Practical hints
Center to obtain the tools approved for Never start the engine when the vehicle is
your vehicle. This section describes the raised.
wheel change using the tools approved and Also observe the notes on the jack.
recommended for your vehicle.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
Lifting the vehicle blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects.
G Warning!
When your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack
chock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit
which has been specifically approved by
(Y page 260). For information on setting up
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
the collapsible wheel chock, see
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up (Y page 261).
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built
into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the When changing a wheel on a level surface:
jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable
bracket. The jack must always be vertical object in front of and another wheel chock
when in use, especially on inclines or or other sizeable object behind the wheel
declines. that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle being changed.
briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
performing maintenance work under the a level surface. However, should
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the circumstances require you to do so on a hill:
jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
change.
objects on the downhill side in front of both
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
wheels on the side opposite to the side on
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
which the wheel is to be changed.
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient G Warning!
capacity jackstands before working under the
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on
vehicle.
slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the
Always engage the parking brake firmly and vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or
block the wheels with wheel chocks or other others.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 314
314 Flat tire
X Attach reversible ratchet ? to jack = in

such a way that the word UP can be seen.
X Place jack = on firm ground.
X Position jack = under take-up
bracket ; so that it is always vertical as
seen from the side, even if the vehicle is
parked on an incline.
X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do

not yet remove the wheel bolts
Practical hints
(approximately one full turn with wheel

wrench :).
X Assemble the jack (Y page 261).
The jack take-up brackets are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings.
X Turn ratchet ? up and down until jack =
G Warning! is fully seated in take-up bracket ; and the
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up jack base evenly meets the ground.
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
take-up bracket.
If you do not position the jack correctly in the
Removing the wheel
jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall off
the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts.
others.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
! Do not position the jack on the body of This could result in damage to the wheel
bolts and wheel hub threads.
the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
the vehicle. X Remove the wheel.
Attaching the spare wheel

G Warning!
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged
or rusted.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 315
Flat tire 315
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
Damaged wheel hub threads should be hub.
repaired immediately. Do not continue to ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
drive under these circumstances! Contact an against hub and hold it there while
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call installing first wheel bolt.
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
This could cause an accident. Make sure to
use the correct wheel bolts.
G Warning!
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.
Practical hints
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
X Guide the spare wheel onto the wheel hub
and push it on.
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
X Inflate the collapsible tire (Y page 315).
Inflating the collapsible tire

G Warning!
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly attached.
Wheel bolt : must be used for 17", 19" and Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
20" light alloy wheels. Wheel bolt ; must be
used for the spare wheel. The wheel bolts for G Warning!
the spare wheel are located in the cargo
Observe safety instructions on air pump label.
compartment with the vehicle tool kit.
! Wheel bolts ; must be used when ! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating
mounting the spare wheel with collapsible the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may
tire. The use of any wheel bolts other than be damaged.
wheel bolts ; for the spare wheel with
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of
collapsible tire will damage the vehicles two versions of the electric air pump:
brakes.
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
G Warning! gauge and the electrical plug are located
Make sure to use the original length wheel behind a flap.
bolts when remounting the original wheel RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
after it has been repaired.
in the pump housing. The air hose and
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 316
316 Flat tire
electrical plug are located at the bottom of X Make sure air pump switch ; is set to 0.
the pump housing. X Insert electrical plug = into the cigarette
The following description applies to both lighter socket (Y page 197) or a power
versions. Differences in usage are expressly outlet (Y page 197).
declared. X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do
not depress the brake pedal.
X Press I on electric air pump switch ;.
The electric air pump switches on and
Practical hints
inflates the collapsible tire.

X Inflate the collapsible tire to the
recommended tire inflation pressure as
Version 1 specified for your vehicle (Y page 333).
This should take approximately 5 minutes.
G Warning!
The air hose and the union nut can become
hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution
to avoid burning yourself when using the
equipment.
! Do not operate the electric air pump

longer than 8 minutes without interruption.
Otherwise it may overheat.
Version 2 You may operate the air pump again after
it has cooled off.
X Version 1 only: Open flap : on electric
air pump. ! Compare the recommended tire inflation
X Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug pressure for your vehicle with the tire
= and air hose with pressure gauge and inflation pressure on the yellow label
vent screw ?. located on the spare wheel rim.
X Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug = and If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
the air hose out of the pump housing label on the spare wheel rim differs from
bottom. the values given in this Operators Manual,
X Version 1 only: Close vent screw on air
inflate the tire to the recommended tire
hose ?. inflation pressure given on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim.
X Remove the valve cap from the collapsible
tire valve.
X Screw union nut A onto the collapsible tire
valve.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 317
Battery 317
X Press 0 on electric air pump switch ;.

X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice. Do
not depress the brake pedal.
X Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressure
is above the recommended tire inflation
pressure as specified for your vehicle
(Y page 333), decrease tire pressure using X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
the vent screw on air hose ?. following the diagonal sequence illustrated
Practical hints
X Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressure (: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe
is above the recommended tire inflation a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
pressure as specified for your vehicle
(Y page 333), decrease tire pressure using G Warning!
deflate button B. Have the tightening torque checked after
G Observe Safety notes, see page 221. changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
X Detach the electric air pump. 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
X Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.
X Version 1 only: Store electrical plug = X Fully collapse the jack to storage position,
and air hose ? behind flap :. see (Y page 261).
X Version 2 only: Store electrical plug = X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools
and the air hose back into the pump in the designated storage space.
housing bottom. i The damaged road wheel cannot be
X Place the electric air pump back in its stored in the spare wheel well under the
designated storage space. cargo compartment floor. It should be
X Lower the vehicle. transported in the cargo compartment
wrapped in a protective wrap.
Lowering the vehicle
i Vehicles with TPMS:
G Warning! Do not restart the tire inflation pressure
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is monitor until a full size wheel/tire with
properly attached. functioning sensor has been placed back
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric into service on the vehicle.
X Attach ratchet to vehicle jack so that the Battery

word DOWN can be seen. Safety notes
Lower the vehicle until the vehicle is resting A battery should always be sufficiently
fully on its own weight: charged in order to achieve its rated service
X Turn ratchet in direction DOWN. life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
maintenance intervals.
X Remove the jack.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 318
318 Battery
If you use your vehicle mostly for short- or provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
distance trips, you will need to have the batteries to accept the old battery for
battery charge checked more frequently. recycling.
When replacing a battery, always use a G Warning!
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle in severe injury or death.
for an extended period of time, contact an
Never lean over batteries while connecting.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
You might get injured.
steps you need to observe.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
G Warning! allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
Observe all safety instructions and skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
precautions when handling automotive flush affected area with water and seek
Practical hints
batteries. medical help if necessary.

Risk of explosion. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
Fire, open flames and smoking etc.
smoking are prohibited
when handling batteries. G Warning!
Avoid creating sparks. Do not place metal objects on the battery as
Battery acid is caustic. Do this could result in a short circuit.
not allow it to come into Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk
contact with skin, eyes or of acid burns in the event of an accident.
clothing.
Take care that you do not become statically
Wear suitable protective charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
clothing, especially gloves, rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
apron and faceguard. also should not pull or push the battery over
Wear eye protection. carpets or other synthetic materials.
Rinse any acid spills Never touch the battery first. First touch the
immediately with clear outside body of the vehicle in order to release
water. Contact a physician any possible electrostatic charges.
if necessary. Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The
Keep children away. battery could explode if touched due to
electrostatic charge or due to spark
formation.
Follow the instructions in
this Operators Manual. ! As any other battery, the battery may
discharge if you do not operate the vehicle
for an extended period of time. Have the
battery disconnected at a qualified
A battery contains materials that can harm
workshop or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
the environment if disposed of improperly. A
Center in such a case. You may also
large 12 V storage battery contains lead.
connect an accessory battery charge unit
Recycling of the battery is the preferred
expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for
method of disposal. Many states (USA only)
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 319
Jump starting 319
your vehicle model to maintain the battery available. It permits the charging of the
charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes- battery in its installed position. Contact an
Benz Center for further information. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
The battery, the battery ventilation hose information and availability.
and the lateral plug must always be Charge battery in accordance with the
securely installed when the vehicle is in separate instructions for the accessory
operation. battery charger.
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal Have the battery charged at an authorized
clamps while the engine is running or the Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the
SmartKey is in the starter switch. battery yourself, follow the operating
Otherwise the alternator and other instructions for your charging device.
electronic components could be severely Only use a battery charge unit with a
Practical hints
damaged. maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Have the battery checked regularly at an X Charge battery in accordance with the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. instructions of the battery charger
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for manufacturer.
maintenance intervals or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information. Jump starting
i After battery power was interrupted, do
the following:
G Warning!
Failure to follow these directions will cause
RReset the automatic exterior mirror fold damage to the electronic components, and
in function (Y page 86). can lead to a battery explosion and severe
RSet the clock (Y page 121). Vehicles with injury or death.
COMAND: see separate COMAND Never lean over batteries while connecting or
operating instructions. jump starting. You might get injured.
RSynchronize the tilt/sliding panel Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
(Y page 186). allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
Charging the battery medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
G Warning! which is flammable and explosive. Keep
Never charge a battery while still installed in flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
the vehicle unless the accessory battery improper connection of jumper cables,
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is smoking, etc.
being used. Gases may escape during Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can
charging and could cause an explosion that result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
may result in personal injury, paint damage or
Read all instructions before proceeding.
corrosion.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
otherwise seriously damage the automatic
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 320
320 Jump starting
transmission which is not covered by the RDo not jump start the engine or charge the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. battery if the battery is frozen. Let the
battery thaw out first.
! Jump starting should only be performed ROnly jump start from batteries with the
using the jump-start terminals located in
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
the engine compartment.
with a more powerful battery could damage
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting the vehicles electrical system. Such
attempts. damage will not be covered by the
Do not attempt to start the engine using a Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
battery quick-charge unit. ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
If the engine does not run after several cross-section and insulated terminal
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it clamps.
checked at the nearest authorized
Practical hints
RAlways make sure the jumper cables are

not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
that move when an engine is started or
repeated failed starting attempts may
running.
damage the catalytic converter and may
present a fire risk. RShould the battery be drained completely,
Make sure the jumper cables do not have let the donating power source charge the
loose or missing insulation. vehicle for several minutes before
reattempting the starting process.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
any other metal part while the other end is The jump-start contacts are located in the
still attached to a battery. engine compartment on the passenger side.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
started with jumper cables and the fully X Switch off all electrical consumers.
charged battery of another vehicle or an X Engage the parking brake.
equivalent starter pack. Observe the X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
following: park position P.
RAccess to the battery is not possible on all X Open the hood (Y page 214).
vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
of the other vehicle, provide jump start
power by an external battery or starter
pack.
RJump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter
are cold.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 321
Towing the vehicle 321
Practical hints
Position B represents the charged battery of X Remove the jumper cables from positive
another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack. terminals ; and =.
X Slide cover : from positive terminal = in You can now switch on the headlamps.
direction of arrow. X Slide cover : from positive terminal =
back.
! Never invert the terminal connections! X Have the battery checked at the nearest
X Connect positive terminal ; of charged authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
battery B with positive terminal = with a
jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive
terminal ; of charged battery B first. Towing the vehicle
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged Safety notes
battery B and run at idle speed.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
X Connect negative terminal ? of charged
be transported with all wheels off the ground
battery B with negative terminal A with using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to equipment. This method is preferable to other
negative terminal ? of charged battery types of towing.
B first.
! To prevent damage during transport, do
X Start engine of the vehicle with the
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
discharged battery and run at idle speed.
suspension parts.
You can now turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not switch on the If circumstances do not permit the
headlamps under any circumstances. recommended towing methods, the vehicle
X Remove the jumper cables from negative may be towed with all wheels on the ground
terminals ? and A first. or front axle raised (except vehicles with
4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have the
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 322
322 Towing the vehicle
vehicle moved to a safe location where the For information on manually unlocking the
recommended towing methods can be gear selector lever, see (Y page 301).
employed.
! Before towing the vehicle observe the
Installing towing eye bolt
following instructions:
RDo not tow-start the vehicle. You could Depending on whether you are towing a
otherwise seriously damage the vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
automatic transmission which is not bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited which are located behind covers on each
Warranty. bumper.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
RDo not tow with sling-type equipment. vehicle tool kit, located in the cargo
Towing with sling-type equipment over compartment underneath the cargo
Practical hints
bumpy roads will damage radiator and compartment floor (Y page 260).
supports.
X Take the towing eye bolt out of the space
RTowing of the vehicle should only be underneath the cargo compartment floor.
done using the properly installed towing
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, Removing cover in front bumper
frame or suspension parts.
G Warning!
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or

diagonally, since it could result in damage X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
to the chassis alignment. arrow.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
! Do not use the towing eye bolt for
recovery, as this could damage the vehicle. for the towing eye bolt.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
Removing cover in rear bumper
i If the battery is disconnected or
discharged G Warning!
Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter In order to avoid possible serious burns or
switch injury, use extreme caution when removing
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe
Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
is extremely hot.
park position P
For more information see Battery
(Y page 317) or Jump starting
(Y page 319).
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 323
Towing the vehicle 323
X Take the towing eye bolt and, if so

equipped, the wheel wrench from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 260).
X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise into
threaded hole to its stop.
X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
tighten towing eye bolt ; by turning it
clockwise.
or
X If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel
Vehicles without AMG Sport Package wrench, use a suitable object to turn the
towing eye bolt.
Practical hints
Removing towing eye bolt
X Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it
counterclockwise.
X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.
X Reinstalling cover: Fit cover :
(Y page 322) and snap it into place.
X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheel
Vehicles with AMG Sport Package wrench back into the vehicle tool kit.
X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the

arrow. Towing with all wheels on the ground
X Vehicles with AMG Sport Package: Pry
cover : with a round, blunt object as a G Warning!
lever in the hole as indicated by the arrow. If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow with
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
a tow bar if:
for the towing eye bolt.
Rthe engine will not run
Fixing towing eye bolt Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
or in the vehicles electrical system
This is necessary to adequately control the
towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
Example illustration front bumper case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 324
324 Towing the vehicle
remove SmartKey from starter switch and When towing the vehicle with one axle raised,
reinsert. the wheels on the ground have to move freely.
Therefore follow the respective steps below,
G Warning! after the front or the rear axle being raised:
assistance for the brake and steering Towing with the front axle raised
systems. In this case, it is important to keep X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X Make sure the ignition is switched on. neutral position N.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the X Release the brake pedal.
Practical hints
brake pedal and keep it pressed. X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Shift the automatic transmission into X Switch off the automatic central locking
neutral position N. (Y page 124).
X Release the brake pedal. X Switch off the ignition and leave the
X If engaged, release the parking brake. SmartKey in the starter switch.
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
(Y page 90). (Y page 90).
! The vehicle may be towed only for ! Because the ESP operates
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a automatically, the engine and ignition must
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1) when the vehicle is being
i While being towed with the hazard towed with one axle raised.
warning flasher in use, use the combination Active braking action through the ESP
switch in the usual manner to signal turns. may otherwise seriously damage the brake
Only the selected turn signal will operate. system which is not covered by the
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
warning flasher will operate again.
Towing with the rear axle raised
Towing with one axle raised X Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch.
! The vehicle may be towed only for
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
(Y page 90).
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with the vehicle.
one axle raised. Doing so could damage the
transfer case, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Stranded vehicle
All wheels must be on or off the ground. Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
Observe instructions for towing the vehicle wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be
with all wheels on the ground. done with the greatest of care, especially if
the vehicle is heavily loaded.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 325
Fuses 325
Note the following when freeing a stranded The fuse chart is located in the cargo
vehicle: compartment with the vehicle tool kit
RAvoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or (Y page 260). The fuse chart explains the fuse
diagonally, since it could result in damage allocation and fuse amperages.
to the chassis alignment.
RNever try to free a vehicle that is still Before replacing fuses
coupled to a trailer.
RIf possible, a vehicle equipped with a trailer
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
hitch receiver should be pulled backward in
park position P.
its own previously made tracks.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Practical hints
Fuses X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Introduction
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits. Fuse box in passenger compartment
If a fuse is blown, the components and ! Do not use sharp objects such as a
systems secured by that fuse will stop screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in
operating. the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
G Warning! box cover or the dashboard.
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system in
question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the cause
determined and remedied by an authorized
A blown fuse must be replaced by an

appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its X Open the drivers door.
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of X Opening: Using your hands, pull fuse box
the amperage recommended in the fuse cover : in direction of arrow = and
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad remove in direction of arrow ;.
to advise you on this subject.
X Closing: Hook fuse box cover : into the
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside opening at the front.
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes- X Press fuse box cover : back on until it
Benz Center. engages.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
cause determined and rectified by an ! The fuse box cover must be properly
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. positioned as described. Otherwise,
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 326
326 Fuses
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box Fuse box in cargo compartment
and possibly impair fuse operation.
Fuse box in engine compartment

X Open the hood.
X Opening: Open the cargo compartment.

Practical hints
X Lift the cargo compartment floor ;

(Y page 260).
X Remove the storage space :.
X Fold down cover =.
X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
X Closing: Install everything in reverse order.
fuse box cover.
X Opening: Release wire ; from fuse box
cover.
X Release clamps :.
X Remove fuse box cover.
X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is

positioned properly.
X Press fuse box cover down and secure with
clamps :.
X Fasten wire ; on fuse box cover.
! The fuse box cover must be properly

positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 327
327

Parts service ..................................... 328
Warranty coverage ........................... 328
Identification labels .......................... 328
Vehicle specification GLK 350
(204.956) ........................................... 330
Vehicle specification GLK 350
4MATIC (204.987) ............................. 330
Rims and tires ................................... 331
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 334
Technical data
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 328
328 Identification labels
Vehicle equipment RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

REmission System Warranty
i This Operators Manual describes all REmission Performance Warranty
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
purchase. Please be aware that your Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
features described in this manual. Control Systems Warranty
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Parts service
Replacement parts and accessories are
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Accessories warranties, copies of which are
Parts required for maintenance and repair available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
work. In addition, strategically located parts Center.
Technical data
distribution centers provide quick and

reliable parts service.
Loss of Service and Warranty
More than 300 000 different parts for Information booklet
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected Should you lose your Service and Warranty
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has Information booklet, have an authorized
been specifically developed, manufactured or Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz replacement. It will be mailed to you.
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
Identification labels
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicles durability
or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 329
Identification labels 329
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can certification label on vehicle for actual data
be found specific to your vehicle.
Ron certification label : on the drivers door
B-pillar
Rembossed underneath the carpet in the
front passenger footwell (Y page 329)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 329)
X Move the front passenger seat backward

as far as possible (Y page 79).
Technical data
X Fold carpet ? backward.
VIN A is now visible.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)

; Paintwork code
= VIN
B Emission control information label,

Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
includes both federal and California
; Paintwork code
certification exhaust emission standards
= VIN C Engine number (engraved on engine)
i Data shown on certification label are for D VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
illustration purposes only. These data are
i When ordering parts, please specify
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
vehicle identification and engine number.
data shown in the illustration. Refer to
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 330
330 Vehicle specification GLK 350 4MATIC (204.987)
Vehicle specification GLK 350 Electrical system GLK 350

(204.956)
Battery 12 V/70 Ah
The quoted data apply only to the standard Spark plugs, type Bosch J 7 MPP33
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
special bodies and special equipment. electrode gap
i The GLK 350 is available in the USA only. Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
Engine GLK 350
Engine, type 272 Main dimensions GLK 350
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, Overall vehicle 178.3 in (4 528 mm)
gasoline injection length
179.4 in
No. of cylinders 6
Technical data
(4 556 mm)15
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Overall vehicle 79.4 in (2 016 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm) width16
Total piston 213.5 cu in Overall vehicle 66.9 in (1 698 mm)
displacement (3 498 cm3) height
66.4 in (1 686 mm)15
Compression 10.7:1
Wheelbase 108.5 in (2 755 mm)
ratio
Track, front 61.7 in (1 568 mm)
Output acc. to 268 hp/6 000 rpm
SAE J 134914 (200 kW/6 000 rpm) Track, rear 62.5 in (1 589 mm)
Maximum torque 258 lb-ft/ Ground clearance 7.9 in (201 mm)17
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm
(350 Nm/ Turning circle 37.7 ft (11.5 m)
2 400 - 5 000 rpm)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm Weights GLK 350
speed Roof load max. 165 lb (75 kg)
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm Vehicle specification GLK 350
4MATIC (204.987)
Electrical system GLK 350
The quoted data apply only to the standard
Alternator 14 V/150 A vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
14 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
15 Vehicles with AMG Sport Package.
16 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
17 Operational vehicle (vehicle with driver, all liquids, and full fuel tank).
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 331
Rims and tires 331
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all Electrical system GLK 350 4MATIC
special bodies and special equipment.
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Engine GLK 350 4MATIC electrode gap
Engine, type 272 Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 Main dimensions GLK 350 4MATIC
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm) Overall vehicle 178.3 in (4 528 mm)
length
Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm) 179.4 in
(4 556 mm)19
Total piston 213.5 cu in
displacement (3 498 cm3) Overall vehicle 79.4 in (2 016 mm)
width20
Technical data
Compression 10.7:1
ratio Overall vehicle 66.9 in (1 698 mm)
height
Output acc. to 268 hp/6 000 rpm 66.4 in (1 686 mm)19
SAE J 134918 (200 kW/6 000 rpm)
Wheelbase 108.5 in (2 755 mm)
Maximum torque 258 lb-ft/
Track, front 61.7 in (1 568 mm)
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm
(350 Nm/ Track, rear 62.5 in (1 589 mm)
2 400 - 5 000 rpm)
Ground clearance 7.9 in (201 mm)21
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm
speed Turning circle 37.7 ft (11.5 m)
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5

Weights GLK 350 4MATIC
Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm
Roof load max. 165 lb (75 kg)
Electrical system GLK 350 4MATIC

Alternator 14 V/150 A Rims and tires
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW Notes
Battery 12 V/70 Ah ! Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
Spark plugs, type Bosch J 7 MPP33 approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
to provide best possible performance in
conjunction with the driving safety systems
on your vehicle such as the ABS or the
18 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
19 Vehicles with AMG Sport Package.
20 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
21 Operational vehicle (vehicle with driver, all liquids, and full fuel tank).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 332
332 Rims and tires
ESP. Tires specially developed for your pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
vehicle and tested and approved by label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
the following on the tires sidewall: checked regularly and should only be
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
equipment tires manufacturers maintenance
recommendation included with the vehicle.
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that For information on recommended tire
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz inflation pressure and supplemental tire
Limited Warranty. inflation pressure information for special
driving situations, see (Y page 219).
! Using tires other than those approved by i Please keep in mind that the vehicle must
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental be equipped
effects, such as
Rwith wheels of identical dimensions on
Rpoor handling characteristics
each axle (left and right)
Technical data
Rincreased noise
Rwith tires of identical characteristics all
Rincreased fuel consumption around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires, or
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by all-season tires etc.
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit
dimensional variations and different tire i The following pages also list the approved
deformation characteristics that could rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle
cause them to come into contact with the with winter tires. Winter tires are not
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the available as standard or optional factory
tires or the vehicle may be the result. equipment, but can be purchased from an
i Further information on tires and rims is Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz approved for your vehicle model may
Center. The Tire and Loading Information require the purchase of rims of the
placard with the recommended tire recommended size for use with these
inflation pressures for cold tires is located winter tires. This depends on vehicle model
on the drivers door B-pillar. Supplemental and the standard or optional factory-
tire inflation pressure information for equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads your vehicle. For more information contact
less than the maximum loaded vehicle an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
condition can be found on the tire inflation
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 333
Rims and tires 333
Same size tires
Model GLK 35022

GLK 350 4MATIC
17" wheels Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset 1.87 in (47.5 mm)
Winter tires23,24 235/60 R17 102H M+Si
Wheel offset 1.85 in (47 mm)
All-season tires23 235/50 R19 99H M+S
Technical data
All-season tires23 235/45 R20 100H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operators Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure
given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
Model All models

Rim (light alloy) 6 B x 17 H2
Collapsible tire25 185/75-17 98P
Recommended tire inflation pressure 41 psi (2.8 bar)
22 USA only.
23 Radial-plytires.
24 Notavailable as factory equipment.
25 Must not be used with snow chains.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 334
334 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
Vehicle components and their respective children.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct contact
Benz. with your skin or clothing.
For information on tested and approved If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- physician immediately.
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
Technical data
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil All models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine
filter oils
Automatic GLK 35026 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic
transmission Transmission Fluid
GLK 350 4MATIC 9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
Front axle GLK 350 4MATIC 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil
(SAE 75W-85)
Rear axle GLK 35026 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
(SAE 75W-85)
GLK 350 4MATIC 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
Transfer case GLK 350 4MATIC 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) MB Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Power steering All models approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering
Fluid (Pentosin
CHF 11.S)
Brake system All models 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
Cooling system All models approx. 8.9 US qt (8.4 l) MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze
26 USA only.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 335
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 335
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Fuel tank All models 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) Premium unleaded
gasoline (Minimum
Fuel tank All models approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) Posted Octane 91
reserve [Avg. of
96 RON/86 MON])
Air All models R134a refrigerant
conditioning and special
system PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Washer system All models 6.3 US qt (6.0 l) MB Windshield
and headlamp Washer
cleaning Concentrate27
Technical data
system (Y page 339)
Washer fluid mixing
ratio (Y page 339)
Approved engine oils not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for our Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
service intervals. Therefore, only use Use the table below to determine the
approved engine oils and oil filters required MB sheet number.
for vehicles with the Maintenance System.
Model Engine, MB sheet
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil type number
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only). GLK 35028 272 229.5
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a GLK 350 4MATIC 272 229.5
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change i MB sheet numbers are printed on the
intervals longer than those called for by the outside of oil containers.
Maintenance System will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
recommendations for scheduled oil
changes. Failure to do so will result in
engine or emission control system damage
27 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.

28 USA only.
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 336
Viscosity grades for engine oils Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
Using the chart below, select oil viscosity regularly. Refer to your vehicles Maintenance
according to the lowest air temperature Booklet for replacement interval.
expected before the next oil change. Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center will provide you with additional
information.
Premium unleaded gasoline

G Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury.
Technical data
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking

materials near gasoline!
Engine oil additives
Turn off the engine before refueling.
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
They may damage the engine. Damage or inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
malfunctions resulting from blending oil contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
additives are not covered by the Mercedes- Direct skin contact with fuels and the
Benz Limited Warranty. inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
Air conditioning refrigerant ! To maintain the engines durability and

R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG performance, premium unleaded gasoline
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning must be used.
system. If premium unleaded gasoline is not
! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based available and low octane gasoline is used,
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the follow these precautions:
system will occur. RHave the fuel tank only partially filled
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
Brake fluid as possible.
G Warning! RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of acceleration.
the brake fluid is continuously reduced RDo not exceed an engine speed of
through the absorption of moisture from the 3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
atmosphere. light load such as two persons and no
Under extremely strenuous operating luggage.
conditions, this moisture content can lead to RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
reducing the systems efficiency.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 337
is fully loaded or operating in RMisfire

mountainous terrain. RPower loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
Fuel requirements
gasoline which contains these additives, the
Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The use of Mercedes-Benz approved additives is
octane number (posted at the pump) must be recommended.
91 min. It is an average of both the Research Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also listing of approved products. Follow
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. directions on the product label.
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates This only results in unnecessary cost and may
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and be harmful to the engine operation.
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
Technical data
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not ! Damage or malfunction resulting from
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. poor fuel quality or from blending additional
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not fuel additives other than those tested and
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% or Extended Limited Warranties.
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel Coolants
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
RCorrosion protection
Gasoline additives RFreeze protection
A major concern among engine RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by point)
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only
the use of quality gasoline containing The cooling system was filled at the factory
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon with a coolant providing freeze protection to
deposits. approximately -35 (-37) and corrosion
protection.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives carbon deposits can ! Add premixed coolant solution only.
build up, especially on the intake valves and Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
in the combustion area, leading to engine Antifreeze separately from each other,
performance problems such as: could cause engine damage not covered by
RWarm-up hesitation the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
RUnstable idle If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35
(-37), the boiling point of the coolant in the
RKnocking/pinging
pressurized cooling system is reached at
approximately 266 (130).
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 338
The coolant solution must be used year round bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
to provide the necessary corrosion protection system checked for signs of leakage). Please
and increase boil-over protection. Refer to make sure the mixture is in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet for replacement label instructions.
interval. The water in the cooling system must meet
Coolant system design and coolant used minimum requirements, which are usually
determine the replacement interval. The satisfied by normal drinking water.
replacement interval published in the If you are not sure about the water quality,
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution Center.
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
of equal specification are used to renew the Anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant concentration or bring it back up to
the proper level. Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
For information on other Mercedes-Benz parts. The use of aluminum components in
approved products of equal specification, motor vehicle engines necessitates that
Technical data
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in

or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only). such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
To provide important corrosion protection, such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
the solution must be at least 50% result in a significantly shortened service life.
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately -35 Therefore, the following product is strongly
[-37]). recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection Before the start of the winter season (or once
to approximately -49 [-45]), the engine a year in hot southern regions), you should
temperature will increase due to the lower have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
heat transfer capability of the solution. concentration checked.
Therefore, do not use more than this amount The coolant is also regularly checked each
of anticorrosion/antifreeze. time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
Model Approximate freeze protection

-35 (-37) -49 (-45)
Cooling system All models 4.4 US qt (4.2 l) 4.9 US qt (4.6 l)
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 339
Washer system and headlamp

cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

MB SummerFit.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
Technical data
X Mix with commercially available premixed
washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above the freezing point:
1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] MB SummerFit to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] MB SummerFit to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
Z
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 340
340
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 341
Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
We reserve the right to make changes in

design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operators Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time July 17, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.
X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 342
2045841081F
2045841081
Order no. 6515 0716 13 Part no. 204 584 10 81 Edition C 2010

2010 GLK

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 GLK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

X204_AKB; 3; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T19:16:58+02:00 - Seite 1

d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Symbols YY This continuation symbol marks a

! Highlights hazards that may result in

i Helpful hints or further information you

Our company and staff congratulate you on

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25

Introduction ......................................... 19 Safety and security ............................. 35

Controls in detail ................................. 65

Operation ........................................... 211

Practical hints ................................... 259

Technical data ................................... 327

1, 2, 3 ... Air conditioning refrigerant and

Automatic interior lighting control .... 92 Brake Assist System

Resume function ............................ 170 Messages in the multifunction

Electronic Traction System Messages in the multifunction

Front air bags Shifting procedure ......................... 104

NECK-PRO active front head Interior storage spaces

Exterior rear view mirror parking SmartKey ....................................... 277

Proximity key Reserve fuel

Self-test SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

Gasoline additives .......................... 337 Tie-down rings ................................... 188

Speed rating .......................... 236, 241 Trip menu ........................................... 113

Load limit ....................................... 228 Windshield wipers

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Important notice for California retail Maintenance

Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle

G Warning! Problems with your vehicle

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Vehicle data recording

Exterior view ....................................... 26

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel 29

Function Page Multifunction steering wheel

1 Function only available in telephone menu.

30 Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

to go to the next higher to confirm selection or

Center console Upper part

32 Overhead control panel

Function Page Overhead control panel

climate control 177

Drivers door control panel and seat adjustment 33

Function Page Drivers door control panel and seat

4 Depending on vehicle production date.

34 Drivers door control panel and seat adjustment

Seat adjustment, vehicles without memory

Vehicle equipment .............................. 36

Safety and security

Vehicle equipment G Warning!

G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily

Safety and security

order to do its job.

Safety and security

of a rollover unless the vehicles rate of

Safety and security

by the seat belt front passenger is properly positioned.

illuminated or go out. With the 45 infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster

Safety and security

the 45 indicator lamp goes out or

approximate the occupants weight BabySmart air bag deactivation

Safety and security

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or Seat belts